Ranger p375 TKD Hb3b-19a321-Ckb Owner Manual Asean Eng

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.

Part Number: HB3B-19A321-CKB 201702 20180119090227
Table of Contents
Introduction Creating a MyKey ...........................................32

About This Manual ..........................................7 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................32
Symbols Glossary ............................................7 Checking MyKey System Status ..............34
Data Recording .................................................9 MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................35
Replacement Parts Recommendation
...........................................................................10 Doors and Locks
Special Notices ...............................................10 Locking and Unlocking ................................36
Mobile Communications Equipment
.............................................................................11 Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................39
At a Glance Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................39
Instrument Panel Overview ........................12
Steering Wheel
Child Safety Adjusting the Steering Wheel ....................41
Child Seats ........................................................15 Audio Control ...................................................41
Installing Child Restraints ...........................16 Voice Control ..................................................42
Child Restraint Positioning .........................19 Cruise Control .................................................42
Information Display Control ......................42
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................22 Wipers and Washers
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................22 Windshield Wipers .......................................44
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................23 Autowipers ......................................................45
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................23 Windshield Washers ....................................46
Supplementary Restraints Lighting

System
General Information .....................................47
Principle of Operation ..................................25
Lighting Control ..............................................47
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................25
Autolamps .......................................................49
Side Airbags ....................................................26
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................49
Side Curtain Airbags .....................................27
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................50
Daytime Running Lamps ...........................50
Keys and Remote Controls
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................50
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................28 Rear Fog Lamps ..............................................51
Remote Control .............................................28 Headlamp Leveling ........................................51
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control Direction Indicators ......................................53
..........................................................................30 Interior Lamps ................................................53
Ambient Lighting ...........................................54
MyKey™ Cargo Lamps ..................................................54
Principle of Operation ...................................31
Ranger (TKD) Vehicles Built From: 01-08-2016 Vehicles Built Up To: 20-05-2018, HB3B-19A321-CKB enPHI, Edition date: 201702, First Printing
Table of Contents
Windows and Mirrors Center Console ............................................108

Power Windows .............................................55 Overhead Console ......................................109
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................58 Rear Seat Armrest ......................................109
Interior Mirror ..................................................59 Under Seat Storage ....................................109
Instrument Cluster Starting and Stopping the

Gauges ..............................................................60
Engine
Warning Lamps and Indicators ................62 General Information ....................................110
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............66 Ignition Switch ...............................................110
Steering Wheel Lock .....................................111
Information Displays Starting a Gasoline Engine .........................111
General Information ....................................68 Starting a Diesel Engine .............................112
Clock ...................................................................75 Diesel Particulate Filter ...............................113
Trip Computer .................................................75 Switching Off the Engine ...........................113
Personalized Settings ..................................76
Information Messages .................................77
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .......................................114
Climate Control Fuel Quality - Gasoline ...............................114
Manual Climate Control .............................89 Fuel Quality - Diesel ....................................115
Automatic Climate Control .......................90 Fuel Filler Funnel Location ........................115
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate Running Out of Fuel - Gasoline ...............115
..........................................................................94 Running Out of Fuel - Diesel .....................117
Heated Windows and Mirrors ...................97 Catalytic Converter .......................................117
Heated Windshield .......................................97 Refueling ..........................................................118
Cabin Air Filter ................................................97 Fuel Consumption ........................................119
Seats Transmission
Sitting in the Correct Position ..................99 Manual Transmission ..................................121
Head Restraints .............................................99 Automatic Transmission ............................121
Manual Seats ...............................................100
Power Seats ..................................................102 Four-Wheel Drive
Rear Seats ......................................................104 Principle of Operation ................................125
Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................125
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ..............................106 Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential ............................129
Storage Compartments Electronic Locking Differential ...............129
Cup Holders ..................................................108
Glove Box .......................................................108
Table of Contents
Brakes Luggage Covers ............................................164

General Information ...................................130 Roof Racks and Load Carriers ................166
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes Load Retaining Fixtures .............................167
..........................................................................131 Tailgate ............................................................170
Parking Brake ..................................................131
Hill Start Assist ..............................................131 Towing
Towing a Trailer ..............................................171
Traction Control Trailer Sway Control .....................................171
Principle of Operation ................................133 Recommended Towing Weights .............171
Using Traction Control ...............................133 Tow Ball ...........................................................175
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......176
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ................................134 Driving Hints
Using Stability Control ...............................134 Breaking-In .....................................................178
Reduced Engine Performance ................178
Hill Descent Control Cold Weather Precautions .......................178
Principle of Operation ................................136 Driving Through Water ...............................178
Using Hill Descent Control .......................136 Floor Mats .......................................................179
Parking Aids Roadside Emergencies

Principle of Operation ................................138 Hazard Flashers ............................................181
Rear Parking Aid ...........................................139 Fire Extinguisher ............................................181
Front Parking Aid .........................................140 Warning Triangle ...........................................181
Rear View Camera ........................................141 Fuel Shutoff ...................................................182
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................183
Cruise Control Transporting the Vehicle ..........................185
Principle of Operation ................................144 Towing Points ...............................................185
Using Cruise Control ...................................144
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............145 Fuses
Fuse Box Locations ....................................186
Driving Aids Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles With:
Speed Limiter ................................................152 Hydraulic Power Assist Steering
(HPAS) ........................................................188
Driver Alert ......................................................153
Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles With:
Lane Keeping System ................................154 Electronic Power Assist Steering
Steering ...........................................................158 (EPAS) ........................................................198
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................160 Changing a Fuse ..........................................218
Load Carrying Maintenance

General Information ...................................164 General Information ..................................220
Table of Contents
Opening and Closing the Hood .............220 Capacities and Specifications

Under Hood Overview - 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel ............221 Engine Specifications - 2.2L
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L Duratec-HE Duratorq-TDCi (88kW/120PS) - Puma
(122kW/165PS) - MI4 ...........................224 .......................................................................260
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Engine Specifications - 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel ..........226 Duratorq-TDCi (92kW/125PS) - Puma
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi .........................................................................261
(Puma) Diesel/3.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine Specifications - 2.2L
(Puma) Diesel .........................................228 Duratorq-TDCi (110kW/150PS) - Puma
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L Duratec-HE ........................................................................262
(122kW/165PS) - MI4 ...........................228 Engine Specifications - 2.2L
Engine Oil Check .........................................228 Duratorq-TDCi (118kW/160PS) - Puma
........................................................................263
Engine Coolant Check ..............................229
Engine Specifications - 2.5L Duratec-HE
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check ................230 (122kW/165PS) - MI4 ...........................264
Power Steering Fluid Check ...................230 Engine Specifications - 3.2L
Washer Fluid Check ...................................230 Duratorq-TDCi (148kW/200PS) -
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap .......231 Puma ...........................................................265
Changing the 12V Battery .........................231 Vehicle Dimensions - Double Cab/Single
Cab/Super Cab .......................................266
Checking the Wiper Blades .....................233
Vehicle Dimensions - Short Wheelbase,
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................233 Chassis Cab ..............................................270
Removing a Headlamp .............................234 Towbar Dimensions ....................................271
Changing a Bulb ..........................................235 Vehicle Identification Plate .....................275
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................239 Vehicle Identification Number ...............275
Capacities and Specifications ...............276
Vehicle Care
Cleaning the Exterior ..................................241 Audio System
Cleaning the Interior ..................................242 General Information ..................................280
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............242 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/Aux
In/USB/Bluetooth ...................................281
Wheels and Tires Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD
General Information ..................................243 ........................................................................283
Tire Care .........................................................243 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC ...........................................................286
Using Winter Tires ......................................248
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Using Snow Chains ....................................248 SYNC ...........................................................292
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........248 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Changing a Road Wheel ...........................252 SYNC/Touchscreen Display ...............295
Technical Specifications ..........................258 Radio ................................................................297
Compact Disc Player .................................297
Audio Input Jack ..........................................301
Media Hub .....................................................302
Table of Contents
Audio Troubleshooting .............................302
SYNC™
General Information ..................................304
Using Voice Recognition ..........................306
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ..........308
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......319
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................326
SYNC™ Troubleshooting .........................335
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................345
Home Screen ...............................................350
Using Voice Recognition ..........................352
Entertainment ..............................................357
Climate ...........................................................362
Phone .............................................................366
Navigation .......................................................371
Apps .................................................................374
Settings ...........................................................375
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................387
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............399
End User License Agreement ................400
Type Approvals ...........................................426
6
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and E154903
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe B Left-hand side.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable These are some of the symbols you may
local laws that may affect the use of see on your vehicle.
electronic devices while driving. Safety Alert
Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout See Owner's Manual
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the Air conditioning system
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E162384
manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Battery
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
Battery acid
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Introduction
Brake system Explosive gas
Cabin air filter Fan warning
Check engine Fasten seatbelt

E71880
Check fuel cap Front airbag

E67017
Child safety door lock Front fog lamps
Child safety door unlock Fuse compartment
Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers
Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window
Cruise control Heated windshield
E71340
Do not open when hot Windshield defroster
Electronic power steering Interior luggage compartment

malfunction release
Engine air filter Jack
Engine coolant Lighting control
Engine coolant temperature Lock rear window
Engine oil Low tire pressure warning
Introduction
Maintain correct fluid level DATA RECORDING

A large number of electronic components
Panic alarm of your vehicle contain data storage
modules temporarily or permanently
storing technical data about the condition
Parking aid of the vehicle, events and malfunctions.
In general, this technical information
E139213
documents the condition of parts,
Parking brake modules, systems or the environment:
• Operating conditions of system
components (e.g. filling levels).
Power steering fluid • Status messages of the vehicle and its
individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/rotational speed,
Power window lockout deceleration, lateral acceleration).
• Malfunctions and defects in important
system components (e.g. lighting and
Power windows brake system).
• Vehicle reactions in particular driving
Service engine soon situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,
activation of the stability regulation
system).
Side airbag • Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).
These data are exclusively technical and
Stability control help identification and correction of
malfunctions as well as optimisation of
E138639
vehicle functions. Motion profiles indicating
Windshield wash and wipe travelled routes cannot be created with
these data.
If services are used (e.g. repair works,
Keep out of reach of children service processes, warranty cases, quality
assurance), employees of the service
E161353
network (including manufacturers) are
Recyclable product able to read out this technical information
from the event and malfunction data
E161307 storage modules using special diagnostic
Do not dispose of in the trash devices. If required, you will receive further
because the material contains information. After a malfunction has been
E161354 lead corrected, these data are deleted from the
malfunction storage module or they are
Use safety glasses when constantly overwritten.
handling
E161305
Introduction
When using the vehicle, situations may Collision Repairs

occur in which these technical data related
to other information (accident report, We hope that you never experience a
damages on the vehicle, witness collision, but accidents do happen.
statements, etc.) may be associated with Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
a specific person - possibly, with the meet our stringent requirements for fit,
assistance of an expert. finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
Additional functions contractually agreed vehicle development we validate that
upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location these parts deliver the intended level of
in emergency cases) allow the protection as a whole system. A great way
transmission of particular vehicle data to know for sure you are getting this level
from the vehicle. of protection is to use genuine Ford
Note: Do not connect wireless plug-in replacement collision parts.
devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain access Warranty on Replacement Parts
to vehicle data and impair the performance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
of safety related systems. Only allow repair parts are the only replacement parts that
facilities that follow our service and repair benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
instructions to connect their equipment to Warranty may not cover damage caused
the data link connector. to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
REPLACEMENT PARTS refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest SPECIAL NOTICES
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of If converting or modifying your vehicle from
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts production specification, please see your
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled authorised Ford dealer.
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
10
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
loss of vehicle control, crash and
you use extreme caution when using any
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
while driving and encourage the use of
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
11
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Right-hand drive
E244370
A Air vents. F Cruise control switches. See

Using Cruise Control (page
B Multi-function display. See 144).
General Information (page
304). G Direction indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 53).
C Windshield wipers. See
Windshield Wipers (page 44). H Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 47).
D Audio control. See Audio
Control (page 41). Voice I Hood release lever. See
control. See Voice Control Opening and Closing the
(page 42). Hood (page 220).
E Instrument cluster. See Gauges J Ignition switch. See Ignition
(page 60). Switch (page 110).
12
At a Glance
K Steering wheel adjustment lever. M Horn.

See Adjusting the Steering N Climate control. See Manual
Wheel (page 41). Climate Control (page 89).
L Driver knee airbag. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 90).
Left-hand drive
E244371
A Air vents. E Instrument cluster. See Gauges

(page 60).
B Multi-function display. See
General Information (page F Cruise control switches. See
304). Using Cruise Control (page
144).
C Windshield wipers. See
Windshield Wipers (page 44). G Direction indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 53).
D Audio control. See Audio
Control (page 41). Voice H Lighting control. See Lighting
control. See Voice Control Control (page 47).
(page 42).
13
At a Glance
I Hood release lever. See

Opening and Closing the
Hood (page 220).
J Ignition switch. See Ignition
Switch (page 110).
K Steering wheel adjustment lever.
See Adjusting the Steering
Wheel (page 41).
L Driver knee airbag.
M Horn.
N Climate control. See Manual
Climate Control (page 89).
See Automatic Climate
Control (page 90).
14
Child Safety
CHILD SEATS WARNINGS

Do not leave unattended children in
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has been involved in
an accident, have the child restraints
checked by properly trained
technicians.
Note: Mandatory use of child restraints

E133140 varies from country to country.
Only child restraints certified to
ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested
and approved for use in your vehicle. A
choice of these are available from your
Dealer.
Child restraints for different mass

groups
Use the correct child restraint as follows:
Baby safety seat
E68916
WARNINGS
Secure children that are less than
150 centimeters (59 inches) tall in a
suitable, approved child restraint, in
the rear seat.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front
of it!
E68918
Read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when you are fitting a Secure children that weigh less than 13
child restraint. kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facing
baby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rear
Do not modify child restraints in any seat.
way.
Do not hold a child on your lap when
the vehicle is moving.
15
Child Safety
Child safety seat
E68920
Secure children that weigh between 13 and

18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a child E68916
safety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat.
WARNINGS
Use an approved child restraint to
INSTALLING CHILD secure children less than 150 cm tall
RESTRAINTS on the rear seat.
Extreme Hazard! Never use a
seat protected by an active airbag in
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur.
Read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions when you are installing
a child restraint.
E161855 Do not modify child restraints in any
way.
Do not hold a child on your lap when
your vehicle is moving.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the child restraints
checked.
Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies

from country to country.
16
Child Safety
Only child seats certified to ECE-R129 or Secure children that weigh between 13 kg
ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested and 18 kg in a child safety seat (Group 1)
and approved for use in your vehicle. A on the rear seat.
choice of these are available from an
authorized dealer. Booster Seats
Child Seats for Different Mass WARNINGS
Groups Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with only the lap
Use the correct child seat as follows: strap of the seatbelt.
Baby Safety Seat Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with a seatbelt that
is slack or twisted.
Do not put the seatbelt under your
child's arm or behind its back.
Do not use pillows, books or towels
to boost your child's height.
Make sure that your children sit in an
upright position.
When using a child restraint on a rear
seat, the child restraint must rest
tightly against the vehicle seat. It
must not touch the head restraint. If
necessary remove the head restraint.
E68918
See Head Restraints (page 99).
Secure children that weigh less than 13 kg
in a rearward facing baby safety seat WARNING
(Group 0+) on the rear seat. You must reinstall the head restraint
following the removal of the child
Child Safety Seat restraint.
See Head Restraints (page 99).
E68920
17
Child Safety
Note: When using a child restraint on a Booster Cushion (Group 3)

front seat, the following seat positioning
guidelines should be followed. The child
must not be in contact with the instrument
panel. The passenger seat should be
positioned as far rearward as possible by
having a seatbelt routing (from B-pillar ring
to child restraint) in a forward direction. If it
proves difficult to tighten the lap section of
the seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust
the seatback to the fully upright position
and raise the height of the seat.
Note: When using a child seat on a rear
seat, adjust the front seat in a position to E68924
prevent contact with the rear passenger,
child feet or child legs. ISOFIX Anchor Points
Booster Seat (Group 2) WARNING
Use an anti-rotation device when
using the ISOFIX system. We
recommend the use of a top tether
or support leg.
Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX

seat, make sure that you know the correct
mass group and ISOFIX size class for the
intended seating locations. See Child
Restraint Positioning (page 19).
E70710
Secure children that weigh more than 15 kg

but are less than 150 cm tall in a booster
seat or a booster cushion.
We recommend that you use a booster
seat that combines a cushion with a
backrest instead of a booster cushion only.
The raised seating position will allow you
to position the shoulder strap of the adult
seatbelt over the center of your child’s
shoulder and the lap strap tightly across
its hips.
E213581
18
Child Safety
Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that

accommodate universally approved
ISOFIX child restraints.
The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid
attachment arms on the child restraint that
attach to anchor points on the outboard
2nd row seats, where the cushion and
backrest meet. Tether anchor points are
behind the outboard 2nd row seats for
child restraints with a top tether.
Top Tether Anchor Points (If

Equipped)
E87145
2. Push the child restraint back firmly to

engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.
3. Tighten the tether strap in line with the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
E212688 POSITIONING
There are two child restraint anchor points WARNINGS
on the second row seats, one for each rear
seating positions. EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a
Attaching a Child Restraint with seat protected by an airbag in front
Top Tethers of it!
If you use a child restraint and a
WARNINGS seatbelt, make sure that the seatbelt
Do not attach a tether strap to is not slack or twisted.
anything other than the correct
Make sure the child restraint rests
tether anchor point.
tightly against the vehicle seat. If
Make sure that the top tether strap necessary, adjust the seat backrest
is not slack or twisted and is properly to an upright position. It may also be
located on the anchor point. necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint.
Note: Where applicable, remove the
luggage cover to ease installation. See Head Restraints -
1. Route the tether strap to the anchor Australia/China/Taiwan (page ?).
point.
19
Child Safety
Note: See an authorized dealer for the

latest details relating to our recommended
child restraints.
Mass Group Categories
Seating Positions 0 0+ 1 2 3
0–10 kg 0–13 kg 9–18 kg 15–25 kg 22–36 kg

Front passenger seat
X X UF¹ UF¹ UF¹
with airbag ON
Front passenger seat
U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹ U¹
with airbag OFF
Rear seats U U U U U
Single cab center seat X X X X X
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
U¹ Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child
restraint, on the rear seat.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use in this
mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved
child restraint, on the rear seat.
Note: When using a child restraint on a

front seat, always adjust the front passenger
seat to its fully rearward position. If it proves
difficult to tighten the lap section of the
seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust the
seat backrest to the fully upright position
and raise the height of the seat. See Seats
(page 99).
20
Child Safety
ISOFIX Child Restraints

Mass Group Categories
0+ 1
Seating Positions
Rear facing Forward facing
0–13 kg 9–18 kg
Front seat Size class
Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
Rear outermost seat ISOFIX Size class C, D, E
1
A, B, B1, C, D
1
Seat type IL
2
IL, IUF
3
Rear center seat Size class

Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems of the semi-universal category.
Please consult child restraint systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.
IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraint systems of universal category
approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.
1
The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraint systems is
defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX
child restraint.
2
At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax
Romer Baby Safe. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our
recommended child restraints.
3
At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer
Duo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child
restraints.
21
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Status After a Crash
WARNING
WARNINGS
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient Seatbelts subjected to strain, as a
distance between yourself and the result of an accident, should be
steering wheel. Only when you use renewed and the anchorages
the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in a checked by a properly trained technician.
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. Failure to adhere to Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death. WARNING
Never use a seatbelt for more than Position the seatbelt correctly for
one person. It is dangerous to put a your safety and that of your unborn
belt around a child being carried on child. Do not use only the lap strap
the occupant's lap. or the shoulder strap.
Use the correct buckle for each
seatbelt.
Do not use a seatbelt that is slack or
twisted.
Do not wear thick clothing. The
seatbelt must fit tightly around your
body to achieve its optimum effect.
Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt

over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your E68587
hips.
Pregnant women should always wear their
When you use them properly, the seat,
seatbelt. Position the lap strap
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags
comfortably across your hips and low
provide optimum protection in the event
beneath your pregnant abdomen. Position
of a crash.
the shoulder strap between your breasts,
Seatbelt Pretensioners above and to the side of your pregnant
abdomen.
The driver and front passenger seatbelt
systems are fitted with a seatbelt
pretensioner. FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Seatbelt pretensioners have a lower WARNING
deployment threshold than the airbags.
Insert the tongue into the buckle until
During minor collisions, it is possible that you hear a distinct click. You have
only the seatbelt pretensioners will deploy. not fastened the seatbelt properly if
you do not hear a click.
22
Seatbelts
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
E74124
E131388
To raise or lower, pull the locking button

on the adjuster and move as necessary.
SEATBELT REMINDER
WARNING
Do not sit on top of a fastened
seatbelt to prevent the seatbelt
reminder from coming on. The
occupant protection system will only
provide optimum protection when you use
the seatbelt properly.
E85817
Your vehicle may have a seatbelt
Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you reminder warning lamp that
pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.
E71880 appears in the instrument
cluster.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt. Let it retract completely The seatbelt reminder warning lamp may
and smoothly. be activated in the following situations:
23
Seatbelts
• The seatbelt reminder warning lamp

illuminates for six seconds when you
switch the ignition on to remind the
driver to fasten the seatbelt.
illuminates at any time when the driver
seatbelt is not fastened.
illuminates and an audible warning
sounds if the driver or front passenger
seatbelt has not been fastened and the
vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed.
It also illuminates if either of the
seatbelts is unfastened when the
vehicle is moving. The audible warning
goes off after five minutes, but the
seatbelt reminder warning lamp
remains on until you fasten the
seatbelt.
Turning the Seatbelt Reminder Off

Contact an authorized dealer.
24
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

Do not use accessory seat covers.
WARNINGS The use of accessory seat covers
Extreme Hazard! Never use a may prevent the deployment of the
rearward facing child restraint on a side airbags and increase the risk of injury
seat protected by an active airbag in in an accident.
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur. Note: A loud bang sounds and there is a
Do not modify the front of your cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
vehicle in any way. This could airbag deploys. This is normal.
adversely affect deployment of the Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning cloth.
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient
distance between yourself and the AIRBAGS
steering wheel. Only when you use
the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in a
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. Failure to adhere to
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags and
seatbelts must be carried out by an
authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in serious personal
injury or death.
E151127
Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix The airbags deploy during significant
anything to or over the airbag covers. frontal crashes. The airbags inflate within
Objects could become projectiles during a few thousandths of a second and deflate
airbag deployment. Failure to follow this on contact with the occupants, thus
instruction could result in personal injury cushioning forward body movement.
or death. During minor frontal crashes, overturns,
Do not poke sharp objects into areas rear crashes and side crashes, the airbags
where airbags are fitted. This could will not deploy.
damage and adversely affect
deployment of the airbags. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
25
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback. E72658
Do not use accessory seat covers. The side airbags are on the outermost side
The use of accessory seat covers of each front seat backrest. There is a label
may prevent the deployment of the attached to the side of each backrest to
side airbags and increase the risk of injury indicate this.
in an accident.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury E152533
or death.
The side airbags are designed to inflate
between the door panel and the occupant
to enhance the protection in certain
crashes.
The airbag is designed to deploy during a
significant lateral crash. It might also
deploy during a significant frontal crash.
The airbag is not designed to deploy during
a minor lateral or frontal crash, rear crash
or a vehicle rollover.
26
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS

WARNING
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
E75004
The airbags are above the front and rear

side windows.
The airbag is designed to deploy during a
significant lateral or frontal angled crash.
The airbag is not designed to deploy during
a minor lateral and frontal crash, rear crash
or a vehicle rollover.
27
GENERAL INFORMATION ON REMOTE CONTROL

RADIO FREQUENCIES
You can program a maximum of eight
Note: Changes or modifications not remote controls to your vehicle. This
expressly approved by the party responsible includes any you recieved with your
for compliance could void the user’s vehicle. The remote controls must remain
authority to operate the equipment. inside your vehicle during the programming
procedure. Fasten the front seatbelts and
The typical operating range for your close all doors to make sure that
transmitter is approximately 10 m. conflicting chimes do not sound during
A decrease in operating range could be programming.
caused by:
Programming a New Remote
• weather conditions Control
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your Reprogramming the Unlocking
vehicle. Function
The radio frequency used by your remote Note: When you press the unlock button,
control can also be used by other radio either all the doors are unlocked or only the
transmitters, for example amateur radios, driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
medical equipment, wireless headphones, button again unlocks all the doors.
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
frequencies are jammed, you will not be on the remote control simultaneously for
able to use your remote control. You can at least four seconds with the ignition off.
lock and unlock the doors with the key. The direction indicators will flash twice to
indicate a change to the unlocking mode.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked
before leaving it unattended. To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button Programming the additional key
unintentionally.
Note: You need to have two programmed
Note: The remote control contains sensitive keys for this procedure.
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage. 1. Insert the first key and turn the ignition
on.
2. Remove the key within 10 seconds.
3. Insert the second key within 10 seconds
and turn the ignition on.
4. Remove the key within 10 seconds.
5. Insert the additional key within 10
seconds.
28
Changing the Remote Control 3. Carefully remove the cover.

Battery
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
E107998 environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
Remote Control With a Folding Key

Blade - Type 1
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E128811
4. Turn the remote control over to remove

the battery.
1
2
E128809 4
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and E126280
gently push the clip.
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
2. Press the clip down to release the the printed circuit board with the
battery cover. screwdriver.
5. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
6. Reinstall the battery cover.
Remote Control With a Folding Key

Blade - Type 2
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E128810
29
E168254
1. Press the button to release the key

before beginning the procedure.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
5. Carefully remove the battery with the
screwdriver.
E168255
2. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
3. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151801
6. Remove the old battery.

7. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
8. Reinstall the battery cover.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
E151799 be purchased from an authorized dealer.
4. Carefully remove the cover. Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 39).
30
MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Configurable Settings

With an admin key, you can configure
MyKey allows you to program keys with
certain MyKey settings when you first
restricted driving modes to promote good
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
driving habits. All but one of the keys can
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
be activated with these restricted modes.
change the settings afterward with an
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are MyKey key.
referred to as administrator keys or admin
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
keys. They can be used to:
Warnings will be shown in the display
• Create a MyKey. followed by an audible tone when your
• Program configurable MyKey settings. vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
• Clear all MyKey features. depressing the accelerator pedal or by
When you have created a MyKey, you can setting cruise control.
access the following information by using
the information display to determine: WARNING
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are Do not set MyKey maximum speed
programmed to your vehicle. limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
• The total distance your vehicle traveled considering posted speed limits and
with a MyKey. prevailing road conditions. The driver is
Note: Switch the vehicle on to use the always responsible to drive in accordance
system. with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the injury.
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
Non-configurable Settings set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
The following settings cannot be changed audible tone when the preselected
by an MyKey key user: vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Seatbelt reminder. You cannot disable • Audio system maximum volume of
this feature. The audio system will 45%. A message will be shown in the
mute when the front seat passengers’ display when you attempt to exceed
seatbelts are not fastened. the limited volume. Also, the
• Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuel speed-sensitive or compensated
or low charge warning activates earlier, automatic volume control will be
giving the MyKey user more time to disabled.
refuel or recharge. • Always on setting. When this is
• Driver assist features are forced on: selected, you will not be able to switch
parking aid and Blind Spot Information off AdvanceTrac™ or traction control,
System (BLIS) with cross traffic alert. 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
• Satellite radio adult content the do not disturb feature.
restrictions.
31
MyKey™
CREATING A MYKEY 2. Switch the ignition on.

3. Access the main menu on the
Use the information display to create a information display controls. Use the
MyKey: arrow keys to get to the following menu
1. Insert the key you want to program into selections:
the ignition.
Message Action and Description
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
Create MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
When prompted, hold the OK button until Programming/Changing

you see a message informing you to label Configurable Settings
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start. Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
the admin keys. key or remote control.
You can also program configurable 2. Access the main menu on the
settings for the key(s). See information display controls. Use the
Programming/Changing Configurable arrow keys to get to the following menu
Settings. selections:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey

settings at any time during the same key CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you You can clear or change your MyKey
will need an admin key to change or clear settings using the information display
your MyKey settings. control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 68).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
32
MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
33
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM You can find information on programmed

MyKey(s) using the information display
STATUS control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 68).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
34
MyKey™
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 32).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 32).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 39).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
35
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Note: When the doors have been unlocked
using this method, the doors must be locked
Note: Always take your keys and lock all individually until the central locking function
doors when leaving your vehicle. has been repaired.
Note: All the other doors can be unlocked
Locking and unlocking the doors from inside your vehicle by pressing the
with the key unlock button on the driver or front
passenger door panels.
A A Locking and unlocking the doors
with the remote control
Automatic relocking: The doors will
B B relock automatically if you do not open a
door within 45 seconds of unlocking the
doors with the remote control. The door
locks and the alarm will return to their
previous state.
A
B
B
C
E131447
E131278
A Unlock.
B Lock. A Key fold/unfold button.
Note: To double lock the doors, turn the B Unlock.
key to the lock position twice within three
seconds. C Lock.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and Press the button B once to unlock the
you pull the interior handle, you only switch vehicle.
off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. Press the button C once to activate central
locking.
Note: Central locking is activated only when
all the passenger doors are closed.
36
Doors and Locks
Press the button C twice within four Child play protection function
seconds to double lock the doors.
If the remote control buttons are pressed
Note: Double locking is activated only when continuously several times, the locking and
all the passenger doors are closed and the unlocking function will be blocked for a
bonnet is closed in the vehicle fitted with while to avoid door latches from
alarm. overheating.
WARNING
Locking and unlocking the doors
Do not use double locking when from inside
passengers or animals are inside your
vehicle. The doors cannot be Press the button. For item
unlocked or opened from the inside when location. See Instrument
double locked. E131288
Panel Overview (page 12).
Note: If the ignition is switched on with the

double locking function activated, the lock
will automatically return to single lock stage.
Double locking is a theft protection feature
that prevents someone from opening the
doors from the inside.
A
Note: The driver’s door can be unlocked B
with the key. This needs to be used if the
remote control is not functioning.
Note: If the vehicle remains locked for E154892
several weeks, the remote control will be
disabled. The vehicle must be unlocked and
the engine started using the key. Unlocking A Unlock.
and starting the vehicle once will enable the B Open.
remote control.
Reprogramming the unlocking function

Autolock Configuration
The unlocking function may be You can configure autolock and

reprogrammed so that only the driver’s autounlock through the instrument cluster.
door is unlocked. See Remote Control See Instrument Cluster (page 60).
(page 28). Follow the process below if autolock and
autounlock is not configurable through
Locking and unlocking confirmation your instrument cluster.
Note: When you lock the doors, the Note: This operation has to be done within
direction indicators will flash once. 30 seconds.
When you double lock the doors, the 1. Switch the ignition on.
direction indicators will flash twice. 2. Press door lock button three times.
When you unlock the doors the direction
indicators will flash one long flash. 3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press door lock button three times.
37
Doors and Locks
5. Switch the ignition on.

6. Press door lock button two times.
The system will chirp twice to indicate that
the driver configuration mode is enabled.
Automatic locking by speed

Note: Automatic locking by speed is
disabled by default.
All the doors will lock automatically when
the vehicle is driven at or above 7 km/h.
Press the central lock or unlock button
twice within three seconds and wait for
three seconds to toggle the automatic
locking by speed function. The system will
chirp when toggling.
Automatic unlocking
Note: Automatic unlock is enabled by
default.
Press the central lock or unlock button
three time within three seconds and wait
for three seconds to toggle the automatic
unlocking function.
If the automatic unlocking function is
enabled:
• All doors will be unlocked while
opening the driver door or front
passenger door (vehicles not delivered
with remote control) from inside, with
the key in ignition.
If the automatic unlocking function is
disabled:
• Only the respective door will be
unlocked while opening from inside.
Note: Opening the rear doors will never
unlock the other doors, when opened from
inside.
38
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)

SYSTEM
Alarm System
Principle of Operation Your vehicle may have one or more of the
The system prevents someone from following alarm systems:
starting the engine with an incorrectly • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
coded key. • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors
Coded Keys and battery back-up sounder.
• Inclination or motion sensor to set off
If you lose a key, you can purchase a the alarm if the vehicle is moved or
replacement from an authorized dealer. If raised.
possible, provide them with the key
number from the tag provided with the Perimeter Alarm
original keys. You can also obtain extra
keys from an authorized dealer. The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
Note: Have all of your remaining keys through the doors, luggage compartment
erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have and the hood.
replacement keys coded together with
recoding your remaining keys. See an Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
authorized dealer for further information.
The alarm can be activated using the
Note: Do not shield your keys with metal remote control.
objects. This may prevent the receiver from
recognizing a coded key. Interior Sensors
Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engine
immobilizer will arm automatically after a
short time.
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engine
immobilizer will disarm automatically if a E133698
correctly coded key is used.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
If you are unable to start the engine with a
unauthorized access by sensing any
correctly coded key, have your vehicle
movement within your vehicle.
checked by an authorized dealer.
Arming the alarm turns on the interior
sensors.
Note: Do not cover the interior lamp
scanning sensors.
39
Security
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard Reduced Guard
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle, as this could In reduced guard, the interior sensors are
trigger the alarm. off when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not leave the glasses holder open. Note: You can set the alarm to reduce
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Note: To permanently switch off the interior
motion sensor, see an authorized dealer. Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
Note: Fuel fired heater may trigger false Full guard is the standard setting.
alarms.
You can switch this feature on or off and
Inclination or Motion Sensor adjust the settings using the information
display.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
elevation of your vehicle. Note: You can set the alarm to reduced
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Triggering the Alarm Note: The alarm resets to full guard the
next time you unlock and then relock the
• If someone opens a door or the hood
vehicle with the remote control.
without a valid key or remote control.
• If you switch the ignition on without a Arming the Alarm
valid key.
Press the lock button once to lock your
• If the interior sensors detect movement vehicle and arm the alarm.
within your vehicle.
• On vehicles with a battery back-up Disarming the Alarm
sounder, if someone disconnects your
vehicle battery or the battery back-up Disarm the alarm by any of the following
sounder itself. actions:
If the alarm sounds, the alarm horn sounds • Unlock the doors with the key and
for 30 seconds and the hazard warning switch the ignition on with a correctly
lamps flash for five minutes. coded key within 12 seconds.
• Unlock the doors or luggage
Any further attempts to carry out one of compartment using the remote control.
the above will sound the alarm again.
Full and Reduced Guard

Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle or if you are
transporting the vehicle as this could trigger
the alarm.
40
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 99).
2
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)

You can operate the following functions
with the control:
2
1
E95178
1. Unlock the steering column. A

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired C
position.
E
B
D
E199065
A Volume up.
B Seek down or previous.
C Seek up or next.
41
Steering Wheel
Type Two
D Mute.
E Volume down.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
C
E248386
B See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 145).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
E200787 CONTROL
A Voice recognition.
B Answer phone call.
C End phone call.
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)

Type One
E205893
E201284
See Using Cruise Control (page 144).

E201420
42
Steering Wheel
Use the controls to adjust the information

display. Navigate through the screen and
press OK to select. See General
Information (page 68).
43
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Type Two
Note: Operating this function with the

engine off drains the battery. A
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
B
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the C
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
D
E131452
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry

windshield. This may scratch the glass, A Single wipe.
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper B Intermittent wipe or autowipers.
motor to burn out.
C Normal wipe.
Type One
D High speed wipe.
D
C To switch the wipers off, move the control
B to the O or OFF position.
Intermittent Wipe
Type One
A B
A
E227440
E227441
44
Wipers and Washers
Type Two Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,

snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
A smearing.
Type One
A B
E131453
C
C
A Long wipe interval.
B Intermittent wipe. E227441
C Short wipe interval.
Type Two
Push the wiper lever up to switch the
wipers on. Use the rotary control to adjust
the intermittent wipe interval.
A
Speed Dependent Wipers

When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
Push the wiper lever up to switch the
wipers on. Use the rotary control to adjust B
the intermittent wipe interval.
E131453
C
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
A High sensitivity.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on. B On.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield C Low sensitivity.
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the sensitivity of the autowipers. When
windshield, clean the windshield and the selecting low sensitivity, the wipers operate
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the when the sensor detects a large amount
issue, install new wiper blades. of water on the windshield. When
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the selecting high sensitivity, the wipers
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when operate when the sensor detects a small
the windshield wipers continuously operate. amount of water on the windshield.
45
Wipers and Washers
Keep the outside of the windshield clean. Type Two

The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
E131460
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Pull the lever toward you to operate the
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield washers.
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
Note: The washer stops functioning when
holding the lever for more than 10 seconds.
Type One
E227443
46
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front Type 1
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
A
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When D B
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The C
fine mist eventually clears and exits E139254
through the vents during normal operation.

A Off.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions. B Auto-light control.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: C Headlamps.
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, D Position lamps, instrument panel
drip marks or large droplets). lamps, license plate lamps and
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the tail lamps.
lens.
Type 2
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E142449
A Off.
B Position lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.
C Headlamps.
47
Lighting
Position Lamps Note: The parking lamps are a feature of

the position lamps that uses the direction
Note: Prolonged use of the position lamps indicator to illuminate a single desired
when the ignition is off causes the battery position lamp.
to run out of charge.
Type 1
Note: You can switch on the position lamps
within 10 minutes from key removal.
Type 1
D B E212053
C Type 2
E139254
Type 2
E211866
E142449 Move the lever up or down to switch on the

desired parking lamp.
Select the position lamps on the lighting
control to switch the lamps on. The Headlamp Low and High Beam
position lamps operate with the vehicle on
or off. Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Parking Lamps
Headlamp Flasher
Note: Prolonged use of the parking lamps
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
when the ignition is off causes the battery
release it to flash the headlamps.
to run out of charge.
Note: You can switch on the parking lamps
within 10 minutes from key removal.
48
Lighting
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) When the lighting control is in the

autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
WARNING or when the wipers turn on.
The autolamps switch position may If you switch on autolamps, the following
not activate the headlamps in all low also turn on:
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps • Configurable daytime running lamps.
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, • Automatic high beam control.
during all low visibility conditions. Failure • Adaptive headlamp control.
to do so may result in a crash.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
Note: If you switch on autolamps, you can
the information display controls to adjust
switch on the high beams after the
the period of time that the headlamps
headlamps turn on.
remain on.
Note: You may have to manually switch
the headlamps on in severe weather
conditions. INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
Type 1
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
loses charge, the instrument lighting returns
to its brightest setting.
E139256
Type 2
E133586
Press repeatedly, or press and hold until

you reach the level you desire.
E142451
49
Lighting
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY (If Note: Only use fog lamps during reduced
visibility, for example fog, snow or heavy
Equipped) rain.
Type 1
Switch the ignition off and pull the
direction indicator lever toward you to
switch the headlamps on. A short tone
sounds. They automatically turn off after
three minutes or 30 seconds after you
close the last door.
Opening any door within 30 seconds after
closing all the doors results in a three
minute timer starting again.
Switch the ignition on or pull the direction
indicator lever towards you again to switch
off the headlamp exit delay. E205677
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If Rotate the control lever to switch the fog
lamps on or off.
Equipped)
Type 2
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight E232249

conditions.
Press the button to switch the fog lamps
To switch the system on, switch the on or off.
lighting control to the off, autolamp or
parking lamp position. You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
off.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can
only switch the front fog lamps on when the
headlamps are on.
50
Lighting
REAR FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) You can only switch the rear fog lamps on
when the front fog lamps or the
headlamps are on.
WARNING
Do not use the rear fog lamps when
it is raining or snowing and visibility HEADLAMP LEVELING (If Equipped)
is more than 50 m.
Note: Headlamp leveling avoids glare for
other road users when you load the vehicle
Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can in a number of different conditions.
only switch the high beam headlamps on
when the autolamps turn the headlamps Note: You can adjust the level of the
on. headlamp beams according to the vehicle
load.
Type 1
Type 1
A
1
0
E205678
Rotate the control lever to switch the fog

lamps on or off. B
Type 2 E133544
A Raise headlamp beams.

B Lower headlamp beams.
E232250
Press the button to switch the fog lamps

on or off.
51
Lighting
Type 2 Headlamp Leveling to Suit Vehicle

Load
2 0
2
0
1
1
E132711 1
1. Press to release the control.
2. Rotate the control to the required
setting.
2
3. Press to close the control.
3
E206726
Set the headlamp leveling to the

corresponding switch setting, depending
on the vehicles loading condition.
Set the headlamp leveling control to zero
when you unload your vehicle.
52
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS Courtesy lamp
Type 1 A B C
E112207
A Off.
B Door contact.
C On.
E212053
When setting the switch to position B, the

Type 2
courtesy lamp turns on when you unlock
or open a door.
When setting the switch to position C with
the vehicle off, the courtesy lamp turns on.
Reading lamps
Type One
E166224
Push the lever up or down to use the

direction indicators. E112208
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the Type Two

direction indicators flash three times.
INTERIOR LAMPS (If Equipped)

Note: When switching the ignition off, the
lamps turn off after a period of time to
prevent the battery from draining. To switch
the lamps on, switch on the ignition.
E226564
53
Lighting
Type Three
E224576
E226565
Press the button on the instrument panel
to switch on the cargo lamps. You cannot
switch off the cargo lamps by pressing the
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped) button again.
Adjust the ambient lighting using the

touchscreen. See your SYNC information.
CARGO LAMPS (If Equipped)

Note: The cargo lamps turn off after a
period of time.
The cargo lamp is above the load
compartment.
You can only switch on the cargo lamps
when:
• The vehicle is in park (P) and you apply
the parking brake (manual
transmission).
• The driver or passenger door is open.
• Your vehicle is off.
54
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS Driver’s Door Switches (Double

Cab)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may B
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings. A
If the vehicle is to be left
unsupervised, the vehicle key should
be taken to ensure that the windows
are not operated inadvertently.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
Note: If you operate the switches often E131466
during a short period of time the system

might become inoperable for a certain time A Press the switch to open the
to prevent damage due to overheating. window.
Note: If you operate both the switch on the B Lift the switch to close the
relevant door and the switch for that window.
window on the driver’s door at the same
time, the window will stop moving.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows are open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
55
Windows and Mirrors
Driver’s Door Switches (Single and Front and Rear Passengers’ Door
Stretch Cab) Switches
B
B
A
A
E131467
A Press the switch to open the

window.
B Lift the switch to close the
window.
Opening and Closing the Driver

E131469
Side Window Automatically
Press or lift the switch to the second action
A Press the switch to open the point and release it.
window. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
B Lift the switch to close the
window. Opening and Closing Other
Windows Automatically (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch to the second action
point and release it.
Press again or lift it to stop the window.
Safety Switch for the Rear

Windows
Note: Once the safety switch is pressed,
you can still operate the rear windows and
front passenger window from the driver’s
door if global opening and closing is fitted.
56
Windows and Mirrors
Note: In vehicles without global opening 5. If the window does not open or close
and closing, the rear windows cannot be automatically when the switch is
operated from driver side when the safety pressed or lifted to second action
switch is pressed. In certain vehicles front points, repeat the procedure.
passenger windows cannot be operated as
well. Safety Mode
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not active
during this procedure.
If the system detects a malfunction, it

enters a safety mode. The windows will
move a little at a time and then stop again.
E131468 Close the windows by pressing the switch
again when the windows stop moving.
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear Contact an authorized dealer.
window controls.
Bounce-Back
Resetting the Memory of the
Electric Windows - Vehicle with The window will automatically stop and
One Touch Up/Down on Driver reverse some distance if it detects an
Side only obstacle while closing.
WARNING Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

The bounce back feature remains WARNING
turned off until you reset the
memory. When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
In the event of a flat battery or after the when closing the windows to avoid
battery has been disconnected from the personal injury.
vehicle, you must reset the memory for
driver window.
Proceed as follows to override this
1. Open the window and then try to close protection feature when there is a
using the one-touch feature. resistance, for example in winter:
2. Lift and hold the switch to second 1. Close the window twice until it reaches
action point until the window is fully the point of resistance and let it
closed. reverse.
3. Hold the switch lifted for more than 2. Close the window a third time to the
two seconds and release. point of resistance. The Bouce-back
4. Open the window using the first action feature is now disabled and you can
point and try to close it automatically close the window manually. The
using second action point. window will go past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully.
57
Windows and Mirrors
See an authorized dealer as soon as

possible if the window does not close after
the third attempt.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING
The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until you reset the
memory.
If you have disconnected the battery, you

must reset the bounce-back memory B
separately for each window. A C
1. Lift and hold the switch until the E131480
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch. A Left-hand side.
3. Lift the switch again for one second. B Off.
4. Press and hold the switch until the C Right-hand side.
window is fully open.
5. Release the switch.
6. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
7. Open the window and then try to close
it automatically.
8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the
window does not close automatically.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
E131481
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror
in its support when returning it to its
original position.
58
Windows and Mirrors
Power-Folding Mirrors INTERIOR MIRROR

The power folding mirrors operate with the
ignition on. Manual Dimming Mirror
Note: The mirrors no longer operate if you WARNING
switch the ignition off. Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
serious personal injury or death.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you

to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
E131482
Press the button to fold the mirrors inward. The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
Release the button to stop and reverse the bright light from behind. It returns to
direction of movement, or to fold the normal when the bright light from behind
mirrors outward. is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
The heated exterior mirrors will remove
ice, mist and fog. See Heated Windows Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
and Mirrors (page 97). center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror

housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
59
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1
E228150
A Tachometer. D Fuel gauge.

B Multi-function display. E Engine coolant temperature
gauge.
C Speedometer.
60
Instrument Cluster
Type 2
B A B
E205854
A Speedometer. Compass
B Multi-function display. Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Trip Computer
Note: In the design and manufacture of
instrumentation, Ford comply with the See General Information (page 68).
government regulations that the indicated
value of the speedometer is not less than Vehicle Settings and Personalization
the actual speed. In normal operation,
customers may observe by other See General Information (page 68).
instruments (such as a GPS Unit) that the Engine Coolant Temperature
indicated speed is slightly faster than the
Gauge
actual vehicle speed. This is normal and
does not represent an instrument At normal operating temperature, the
malfunction. needle will remain in the center section. If
the needle enters the red section, the
Information Display engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
Odometer
cause once the engine has cooled down.
Registers the accumulated distance your Note: Do not restart the engine until the
vehicle has traveled. cause of overheating has been determined
and resolved.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
61
Instrument Cluster
WARNING WARNING LAMPS AND

Never remove the coolant reservoir INDICATORS
cap while the engine is running or hot.
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
Fuel Gauge that may become serious. Some lamps
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will illuminate when you start your vehicle to
indicate approximately how much fuel is make sure they work. If any lamps remain
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which respective system warning lamp for further
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is information.
located. Note: Some warning indicators appear in
After refueling some variability in needle the information display and operate the
position is normal: same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
• It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station. Note: Depending on your vehicle
This is normal and depends upon the specification, some warning lamps and
slope of pavement at the gas station. indicators may not be active.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and The speed control system
depends upon the slope of pavement indicator light changes color to
E144524
at the gas station. indicate what mode the system
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 144).
before the tank is full, try a different On (white light): Illuminates when the
gas pump nozzle. adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
Low Fuel Reminder system is turned off.
A low fuel reminder triggers when the trip Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
computer distance-to-empty reaches the adaptive cruise control system is
80km (when the fuel gauge needle is at engaged. Turns off when the speed control
approximately 1/16th fuel remaining). system is disengaged.
Changes in driving pattern may cause the
value to vary. Anti-Lock Braking System Warning
Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without anti-lock braking system) unless
the brake system warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
62
Instrument Cluster
Automatic High Beam Lamp WARNING

It will illuminate when this Driving your vehicle with the warning
feature is on. See Autolamps lamp on is dangerous. A significant
(page 49). decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
Auto Start-Stop Lamp your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Driving
It will illuminate to inform you extended distances with the parking brake
when the engine shuts down or engaged can cause brake failure and the
in conjunction with a message. risk of personal injury.
Battery Warning Lamp Cruise Control Indicator

If it illuminates when driving, this It will illuminate when you switch
indicates a malfunction. Switch this feature on. See Using
off all unnecessary electrical E71340 Cruise Control (page 144).
equipment. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Direction Indicator
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator Illuminates when the left or right
direction indicator or the hazard
It will illuminate when you switch warning flasher is turned on. If
this feature off or in conjunction the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
E124823
with a message. See for a burnt out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
Information Messages (page 77). (page 235).
Brake System Warning Lamp Door Ajar Indicator

It will illuminate when you It will illuminate when the
engage the parking brake with ignition is on and any door is not
the ignition on. completely closed.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If Engine Coolant Temperature
the parking brake is not engaged, this Warning Lamp
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have your vehicle It will illuminate when the engine
checked by an authorized dealer or motor coolant temperature is
immediately. high. Stop your vehicle as soon
as possible and contact your authorized
dealer.
63
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Warning Lamp Front Fog Lamps Indicator

WARNING It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
If it illuminates when you are driving
do not continue your journey, even if
the oil level is correct. Have your Frost Warning Lamp
vehicle checked.
WARNING
If it illuminates with the engine Even if the temperature rises to
running or when you are driving, above 4°C there is no guarantee that
this indicates a malfunction. the road is free of hazards caused by
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to inclement weather.
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
It will illuminate when the
outside air temperature is 4°C or
Electronic Locking Differential below.
Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential. Glow Plug Indicator
E163170
With the key in the on position,
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp illuminates when the glow plug
heat is necessary as a starting
It will illuminate and a chime will aid. Wait until the light goes off before
sound to remind you to fasten starting.
E71880 your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 23). After you start the engine, the light should
turn off. When the engine is cold, the light
should always illuminate for a short period.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators
Illuminates when four-wheel High Beam Indicator
drive low is engaged.
E181780 It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
Illuminates when four-wheel will flash when you use the
drive high is engaged. headlamp flasher.
E181779
Front Airbag Warning Lamp Hill Descent Control
If the warning lamp does not Illuminates when hill descent

illuminate during start up, control is switched on.
E163171
E67017 remains on or flashes, the
system may be disabled. Hood Ajar Warning Lamp
Have your vehicle checked by an
It will illuminate when the
authorized dealer.
ignition is on and the hood is not
E159324
completely closed.
64
Instrument Cluster
Lane Keeping Aid Indicator Powertrain Fault

It will illuminate when you It will illuminate when a
activate the lane keeping powertrain or a four-wheel drive
E144813
system. fault has been detected. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as It will illuminate when you switch
possible. E67040 the rear fog lamps on.
Low Tire Pressure Warning

Fasten Rear Seatbelt Warning
Will illuminate when your tire Lamp
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine It will illuminate and a chime will
running or when driving, check your tire sound to signal the rear
pressure as soon as possible.
E206718
seatbelts are not buckled.
It will also illuminate momentarily when Service Engine Soon

you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate The service engine soon
when you switch the ignition on, or begins indicator light illuminates when
to flash at any time, have the system the ignition is first turned on prior
checked by an authorized dealer. to engine start to check the bulb.If the
service engine soon indicator light stays
Low Washer Fluid illuminated after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
It illuminates when the system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
windshield washer fluid is low. of the vehicle emissions control system.
E132353
Refer to the Fuel and Refueling chapter for
more information about having your
Over Speed Warning vehicle serviced.
It will illuminate if the vehicle WARNING
exceeds 120km/h.
E165368
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
Parking Lamps Indicator could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
It will illuminate when you switch coverings or other vehicle components,
the parking lamps on. possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
65
Instrument Cluster
If the light is blinking, an engine misfire is Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp

occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate It will illuminate when there is
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and excess water in the fuel filter.
deceleration) and have your vehicle Drain off the water immediately.
serviced immediately. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap
(page 231).
Shift Indicator
It will illuminate to inform you AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
that shifting to a higher gear as
indicated may give better fuel INDICATORS
economy and lower CO2
emissions. It will not illuminate during Note: Depending on your vehicle options
periods of high acceleration, braking or and instrument cluster type, not all of the
when the clutch pedal is pressed. audible warnings and indicators will display
or be available.
Speed Limiter Key in Ignition
It will illuminate when you switch Sounds when the driver's door is open and
on the speed limiter system. See the key is in the ignition.
E172886 Speed Limiter (page 152).
Headlamps On
Stability Control Warning Lamp Sounds when you remove the key from the
It will flash when the system is ignition and open the driver's door and you
active. If it remains illuminated have left the headlamps or parking lamps
E138639 or does not illuminate when you on.
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the Parking Brake On
system will switch off. Have your vehicle Sounds when the parking brake is on and
checked by an authorized dealer your vehicle is moving. If the warning
immediately. See Using Stability chime remains on after you have released
Control (page 134). the parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
Stability Control Off Indicator immediately.
It will illuminate when you switch Door Ajar
the system off. It will go out
E130458 when you switch the system Sounds when the driver's door is ajar, or
back on or when you switch the ignition when any door is ajar while the vehicle is
off. See Using Stability Control (page traveling over 5 km/h.
134).
Seatbelt Reminder
Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in
an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
66
Instrument Cluster
Lane Departure Warning (If Equipped)

Activates when the system detects
unintentional drifting toward the outside
of the lane and alerts or aids you to stay in
the lane through the steering system and
instrument cluster display.
Front and Rear Park Aid (If Equipped)

Sounds to alert driver of objects
approaching the front and rear of the
vehicle while moving forward or reversing.
67
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Information Display

Type 1
WARNING
Make sure you are aware of all applicable E201432
Menu
You can control various systems on your You can access the menu using the
vehicle using the information display information display control.
controls on the steering wheel. Note: It may describe options not fitted to
The information display shows the the vehicle you have purchased.
corresponding information.
Trip 1 and 2
Digital Speedometer
Distance to Empty
Trip odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel used
Average Fuel
Outside temp
All values
Note: Press and hold OK on the current

screen to reset the respective trip, distance,
time and fuel information.
68
Fuel economy
Distance to E
Instantaneous Fuel
Average Fuel
Fuel History
Average Speed
All values
Auto StartStop
Note: You can reset your average fuel

economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand side of the steering
wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Hill Start
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor Tire Press.
Trailer Sway
Settings
Alarm All Sensors
Perim. Sens.
Ask on exit
Vehicle A. Engine Off
Chimes Park Slot
Information
Lighting Auto Beam
69
Settings
A/lamp Dlay Off
XX Seconds
DRL
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Mislock
Unlocking All Doors
Driver Door
Switches Inh.
Power Autofold
Mirror
Reverse Tilt
Oil Life Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Oil Life
Seatbelts
Silent Mode
Windows Remote Open
Rmt Close
Wipers Crtesy wipe
Rain Sensing
Rev. Wiper
Distance Miles & Gallons
Unit
L/100km
Display km/L
Temper- Fahrenh. (°F)
ature
Celsius (°C)
70
Settings
Tire Pres- psi
sure
kPa
bar
Language Choose your applicable setting
Admin "Num" MyKeys
Keys
"Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
MyKey Dist
MyKey Odo Units
Create -
Traction Always On
Ctrl
Selectable
Max Speed selectable based on Region
Speed
Off
Speed Speed selectable based on Region
Minder
Off
Volume Set
Limit
Clear All Clear
Menu
Information Display
You can access the menu using the
Type 2 information display control.
Note: It may describe options not fitted to
the vehicle you have purchased.
E201433
71
Display Setup
Distance Unit Miles & Gallons
L/100km
Km/L
Temperature °Fahrenheit
°Celsius
Gauge Display Fuel Gauge
Fuel + Tach
Tire Pressure
Trip 1 and 2
All values All Values — shows all trip values (Trip

Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left
hand steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
• Instant Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
• Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.
• Auto-Start-Stop - available Auto-Start-Stop messaging will provide details about
what is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 77).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
72
Driver Assist
Blindspot
Cruise Control Adaptive
Normal
Driver Alert Driver Alert
Display
Hill Start
Lane Keeping Sys Mode Alert Only
Aid Only
Both
Intensity High
Normal
Low
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Chimes
Traffic Signs Display
Always Shown
Speed Warning Limits up to 65km/h or
Limits above 65km/h
Chimes
Tire Monitor Tire Press.
Trailer Sway
Settings
Alarm All Sensors Active
Vehicle Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit
73
Settings
Auto Engine Off
Chimes Park Slot Found
Information
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting Auto Highbeam
Autolamp Delay Off
XX Seconds
Daytime Lights
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Mislock
Remote Unlock All Doors
Driver's Door
Switch Inhibit
Mirrors Autofold
Oil Life Hold OK to Reset
Reset
Park Lock Control
Seatbelts
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wipers Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
Reverse Wiper
Display Distance Miles & Gallons

Setup L/100km
74
Settings
Km/L
Temper- °Fahrenheit
ature
°Celsius
Tire Pres- Choose your applicable setting
sure
{0} "Num" MyKeys
Admin
Keys "Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
MyKey Dist
Odo Units
MyKey
Create -
MyKey
Traction Always On
Control
Selectable
Max Speed selectable based on Region
Speed
Off
Speed Speed selectable based on Region
Minder
Off
Volume Set
Limiter
Clear Hold OK to
MyKeys
Clear MyKeys
CLOCK TRIP COMPUTER
For detailed instructions on how to adjust Distance to Empty

the clock See Audio Unit (page 281). Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
75
Instantaneous fuel consumption Measure units

Indicates the current average fuel To toggle between either metric or imperial
consumption. units, scroll to this display and press the
OK button.
Average Fuel Consumption
Toggling the units of measure using this
Indicates the average fuel consumption display will affect the following displays:
since the function was last reset. • Distance to empty.
Trip Odometer • Average fuel consumption.
• Instantaneous fuel consumption.
Records the distance travelled on
individual journeys. • Average speed.
Digital Speedometer Temperature units
The speed your vehicle is traveling at will To toggle between metric and imperial
display as a digital number. units, scroll to this display and press the
OK button.
Average Speed Toggling the temperature units using this
display will affect the following displays:
Indicates the average speed since the
function was last reset. • Outside air temperature.
• The temperature display in the
Outside Air Temperature automatic climate control.
Shows the outside air temperature.
Chime deactivation
Odometer The following chimes can be switched off:
Records the total distance traveled by your • Warning messages.
vehicle. • Information messages.
Resetting the trip computer MyKey
To reset a particular display: MyKey is a feature which allows customers
1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up to assign keys which will enable extra
and down arrow buttons and press the safety features designed for use by young
right arrow button. drivers. Features can be adjusted and
2. Highlight the function to be reset. customized to suit the level of driver.
Features include:
3. Hold the OK button pressed.
• Muted audio when seatbelts are
unbuckled.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS • Vehicle speed limited.
Languages • Speed minder.
• Volume limiter on audio system.
A selection of languages are available
using the menus in the setting menu. • Fuel warnings given at higher distance
to empty values.
76
• Prevention of turning off some driver

assist systems:
• Traction control
• Park aid
• Collision Warning System -
additionally uses maximum
sensitivity as default
• Emergency assist
• Do not disturb
• Mileage logged by MyKeys.
E201420
INFORMATION MESSAGES Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
Note: Depending on the vehicle options information display. Other messages will
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the be removed automatically after a short
messages will display or be available. time.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
Certain messages need to be confirmed
shortened depending upon which cluster
before you can access the menus.
type you have.
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
145).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise
Available cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 145).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar
Available Sensor visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of
Blocked See Manual radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 145).
77
Message Action
Normal Cruise Active Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Front Sensor Not Aligned Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls
Resume Control to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting
Down the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission
into a lower gear.
Airbag
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor.
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
Alarm, Start Vehicle. ized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 39).
78
Auto-Start-Stop
Message Action
Auto StartStop Manual Displayed when Auto-Start-Stop system is not functioning

Restart Required and requires the user to manually restart.
Auto StartStop Press a Displayed when a pedal needs to be pressed to restart the
Pedal to Start Engine engine.
Auto StartStop Select Displayed when neutral needs to be selected to restart engine.
Neutral To Start Engine
Vehicle is ON Displayed when the vehicle is in Auto-Start-Stop mode and
the door is opened. Switch the ignition off before leaving the
vehicle if the system has shut down the engine.
AWD (If Equipped)
Message Action
AWD Temporarily Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily
Disabled disabled to protect itself from overheating.
AWD OFF Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
AWD Restored The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
Service Required sion/AWD light when the AWD system is not operating prop-
erly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
79
4x4
Message Action
4x4 Temporarily Displayed when the 4x4 system has been temporarily disabled
Disabled to protect itself from overheating.
4x4 OFF Displayed when the 4x4 system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
4x4 Restored The 4x4 system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
4WD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
Service Required sion/4x4 light when the 4x4 system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
Low Battery Features Displayed when the battery management system detects an
Temporarily Turned Off extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal
Turn Power Off To Save Displayed when the battery management system determines
Battery that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition
off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message
will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary elec-
trical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
80
Doors and Locks
Message Action
Door Ajar Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and
the vehicle is moving.
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Trunk Ajar Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely
closed.
Hood Ajar Displays when the hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited Displays when the door switches have been disabled.
Security Mode
Child Lock Malfunction Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child
Service Required locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Factory Keypad Code {X Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been
X X X X} reset.
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest break soon.
Suggested
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Hill Start Assist
Message Action
Hill Start Assist Not Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your
Available authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 131).
81
Hill Descent Control
Message Action
For Hill Descent Reduce Displayed when vehicle speed is too high for HDC to engage.
Speed 20MPH or Less Reduce speed to below that indicated in the message to
engage HDC.
For Hill Descent Reduce
Speed 32 Km/h or Less
Hill Descent Control Off Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to excessive
System Cooling heat. Allow system to cool before re-engaging.
Hill Descent Control Displayed when there is a fault with the HDC system. See your
Fault authorized dealer.
For Hill Descent Select Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to vehicle not
Gear being in gear. Select gear to engage HDC.
Keys and Starting
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the
vehicle.
Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for
service.
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
and Clutch starting the vehicle.
To START Press Clutch Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting
the vehicle.
Key Program Successful Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program Failure Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum
Learned number of keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
Learned keys have been programmed.
82
Message Action
Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
Soon soon as possible.
Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key
Integrated Key using two existing keys.
Engine ON Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle
and the engine is on.
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
Malfunction Service dealer as soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
ility Clean Screen shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
tion Service Required dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their
Wheel hands on the steering wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.
Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on with your engine running, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
See Engine Oil Check (page 228).
Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil
Check (page 228).
83
Message Action
Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately. See Brake and Clutch
Fluid Check (page 230).
Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Over Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop the
Temperature vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 229).
Power Reduced to Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help
Lower Engine Temp reduce high coolant temperatures.
Transport Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
your authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Factory mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
Parking Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Front
Parking Aid (page 140).
Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 139).
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the parking aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the parking aid status.
84
Parking Brake
Message Action
Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 5 km/h. If the warning
stays on after the parking brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The parking brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Not Applied Displays when the parking brake is not set.
Apply Park Brake
Park Brake Use Switch Displays when the parking brake is set but has not be released.
to Release
To Release: Press Brake Displays when the parking brake is set but has not be released
and Switch and the vehicle is moving.
Park Brake Limited The parking brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Required
Park Brake System Displays when the parking brake was not released causing it
Overheated to overheat.
Release Park Brake Displays when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is
started.
Park Brake Applied Displays when the parking brake is set.
Park Brake Released Displays when the parking brake is released.
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Lock Fault The power steering system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a
Safely safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within
Service Required the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
85
Powertrain
Message Action
Check Locking Differen- Displayed when there is a malfunction with the electronic
tial locking differential that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.
Fuel Pressure Low Displayed when there is a loss in fuel system pressure. See
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
Engine Start Pending Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
Terrain Management System (If Equipped)
Message Action
Terrain Management Displayed when there is a fault with the Terrain Management
System Fault system. See your authorized dealer.
Mode Change Not Displayed when the Terrain Management system was unable
Accepted, Retry to complete a mode change. Retry to enter terrain modes.
To Enter Rock Mode 4x4 Displayed when Terrain Management system is unable to
LOW is Required enter crawl mode as the vehicle is not in AWD Low. Engage
AWD Low to enter crawl mode.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Exit Displayed when AWD Low cannot be disengaged as the
Rock Mode Terrain Management is in crawl mode. Exit crawl mode to
disengage AWD Low.
86
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire
pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 248).
Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
Fault malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 248).
Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or
Fault your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 248). If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Traction Control
Message Action
Traction Control Off Displays when the traction control system has been switched
off. See Traction Control (page 133).
Traction Control On Displays when the traction control system has been switched
on. See Traction Control (page 133).
Spinout Detected Displays when a Spin out has occurred and the hazards are
Hazards Activated activated.
87
Transmission
Message Action
Transmission Malfunc- See your authorized dealer.

tion Service Now
Transmission Service See your authorized dealer.
Required
Transmission Limited Displays when the transmission has overheated and has
Function See Manual limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page
121).
Transmission Not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Press Brake Pedal Displays as a reminder to press the brake pedal in order to
select a gear.
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Brake Module Displayed when there is a fault with the Trailer module. See
Fault your authorized dealer.
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
Trailer Lighting Module Displayed when there is a fault with the Trailer module. See
Fault See Manual your authorized dealer.
Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Displayed when there is a fault with the stop lamps on the
Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Park Lamps Fault Displayed when there is a fault with the park lamps on the
Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Displayed when there is a fault with the left lamps on the
Fault Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Displayed when there is a fault with the right lamps on the
Fault Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
88
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
C D E F
B H
A I
E205820
Recirculated Air
A Recirculated air.
B A/C. Press the button to switch between
outside air and recirculated air. The air
C Fan speed control. currently in the passenger compartment
D Power. recirculates. This can reduce the time
needed to cool the interior and reduce
E Air distribution control. unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
F Temperature control. Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or
G MAX defrost. prevent you from switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
H MAX A/C. of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
I Heated rear window. and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather in order
to improve cooling efficiency.
89
Climate Control
A/C Temperature Control

Press the button to switch the air Adjusts the temperature of the air
conditioning on or off. Use air conditioning circulated in your vehicle.
with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency. MAX Defrost
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Turn to the right to switch on defrost. Air
maximum defrost), the air conditioning flows through the windshield vents and
compressor may continue to operate even the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You
though you switch off the air conditioning. can also use this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The
Fan Speed Control heated rear window also turns on when
you select maximum defrost.
Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle. Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
Power maximum defrost is on.
Press to switch the system on and off. MAX A/C
When the system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle. Turn to the left for maximum cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
Air Distribution Control instrument panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest
Press to switch air flow from the speed.
windshield, instrument panel or footwell
vents on or off. You can distribute air Heated Rear Window
through any combination of these vents.
Press to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and
Mirrors (page 97).
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
90
Climate Control
Type 1
C D E F E G H
I
B
J
A
K
L M L
E205818
A MAX A/C: Press for maximum Note: In certain conditions (for

cooling. The driver and example, maximum defrost), the
passenger settings set to LO, air conditioning compressor may
recirculated air flows through the continue to operate even though
instrument panel vents, air you switch off the air
conditioning automatically turns conditioning.
on and the fan automatically C Passenger temperature
adjusts to the highest speed. control: Adjusts the
B A/C: Press to switch the air temperature setting on the
conditioning on or off. Use A/C passenger side.
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
91
Climate Control
D Recirculated air: Press to H Driver temperature control:

switch between outside air and Adjusts the temperature setting
recirculated air. The air currently on the driver side. This control
in the passenger compartment also adjusts the passenger side
recirculates. This may reduce the temperature when you switch
time needed to cool the interior off dual zone mode.
(when used with A/C) and I Heated rear window: Press to
reduce unwanted odors from switch the heated rear window
entering your vehicle. on and off. See Heated
Note: Recirculated air may turn Windows and Mirrors (page
off automatically (or prevent you 97).
from switching on) in all modes J MAX Defrost: Press to switch
except MAX A/C to reduce the on defrost. The driver and
risk of fogging. Recirculation may passenger settings set to HI,
also turn on and off outside air flows through the
automatically in Panel or windshield vents, and fan
Panel/Floor airflow modes automatically adjusts to the
during hot weather in order to highest speed. You can also use
improve cooling efficiency. this setting to defog and clear
E Fan speed control: Adjusts the the windshield of a thin covering
volume of air circulated in the of ice. The heated rear window
vehicle. also automatically turns on
when you select maximum
F Air distribution control: Press
defrost.
to switch airflow from the
instrument panel or footwell Note: To prevent window
vents on or off. You can fogging, you cannot select
distribute air through any recirculated air when maximum
combination of these vents. defrost is on.
Note: At least one of these K Power: Press to switch the
buttons illuminates when the system on and off. When the
system is on. system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
G AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to L Heated Seats: Press to switch
select the desired temperature. the heated seats on and off.
Fan speed, air distribution, air M Heated windshield: Press to
conditioning operation, and clear the heated windshield of
outside or recirculated air thin ice and fog.
automatically adjust to heat or
cool the vehicle to maintain the
desired temperature. You can
also switch off dual zone mode
by pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.
92
Climate Control
Type 2
A B C
L D
K E
F J I H G F
E200620
A Passenger temperature D MAX A/C: Press for maximum

control: Adjusts the cooling. The driver and
temperature setting on the passenger settings set to LO,
passenger side. recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
B Fan speed control: Adjusts the conditioning automatically turns
volume of air circulated in the on and the fan automatically
vehicle. adjusts to the highest speed.
C Driver temperature control: E Recirculated air: Press to
Adjusts the temperature setting switch between outside air and
on the driver side. This control recirculated air. The air currently
also adjusts the passenger side in the passenger compartment
temperature when you switch recirculates. This may reduce the
off dual zone mode. time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
93
Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may turn K Defrost: Press to distribute air

off automatically (or prevent you through the windshield air vents
from switching on) in all modes and de-mister. Air distribution to
except MAX A/C to reduce the the instrument panel and
risk of fogging. Recirculation may footwell vents turns off. You can
also turn on and off also use this setting to defog and
automatically in Panel or clear the windshield of a thin
Panel/Floor airflow modes covering of ice.
during hot weather in order to L MAX Defrost: Press to switch
improve cooling efficiency. on defrost. The driver and
F Heated Seats: Press to switch passenger settings set to HI,
the heated seats on and off. outside air flows through the
windshield vents, and fan
G A/C: Press to switch the air
automatically adjusts to the
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
highest speed. You can also use
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
efficiency.
of ice. The heated rear window
Note: In certain conditions (for also automatically turns on
example, maximum defrost), the when you select maximum
air conditioning compressor may defrost.
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
H Power: Press to switch the INTERIOR CLIMATE
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside General Hints
air from entering the vehicle.
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
I AUTO: Press to switch on cause the windows to fog up.
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature. Note: You may feel a small amount of air
Fan speed, air distribution, air from the footwell air vents regardless of the
conditioning operation, and air distribution setting.
outside or recirculated air Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
automatically adjust to heat or your vehicle, do not drive with the system
cool the vehicle to maintain the switched off or with recirculated air always
desired temperature. You can switched on.
also switch off dual zone mode
by pressing and holding for more Note: Do not place objects under the front
than two seconds. seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
J Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
on and off. See Heated the air intake area at the base of the
Windows and Mirrors (page windshield.
97).
94
Climate Control
Note: To improve the time to reach a Note: If you select AUTO during cold
comfortable temperature in hot weather, temperatures, the system directs airflow to
drive with the windows open until you feel the windshield and side window vents. In
cold air through the air vents. addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Manual Climate Control
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
during humid weather, adjust the air is hot, the system automatically uses
distribution control to the windshield air recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
vents position. Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control Automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest Press AUTO.

setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting. desired setting.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
95
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the hot settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
point, then adjust the setting as neces-
sary.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C.

2 Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the cold settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
96
Climate Control
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
2 Press A/C. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
HEATED WINDOWS AND petroleum-based cleaning products.
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
Note: Make sure the engine is running
HEATED WINDSHIELD (If Equipped)
before operating the heated windows.
Press the button to clear the
Heated Rear Window windshield of thin ice and fog.
The heated windshield turns off
Press the button to clear the after a short period of time.
heated rear window of thin ice
E184884 Note: Make sure that the engine is running
and fog. The heated rear
before switching the heated windshield on.
window turns off after a short period of
time. Press the button again to switch it Note: The system does not operate if the
off. battery charge level is low.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals CABIN AIR FILTER
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
damage caused to the heated rear window filter, which gives you and your passengers
grid lines. the following benefits:
Heated Exterior Mirrors • It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle and odor
When you switch the heated rear window concentration.
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. • It improves the interior compartment
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors cleanliness.
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass • It protects the climate control
when it is frozen in place. components from particle deposits.
97
Climate Control
You can locate the cabin air filter behind

the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals.
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see a qualified
technician.
98
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT • Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of your
POSITION head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
WARNINGS comfortable.
Do not recline the seatback too far • Keep sufficient distance between
as this can cause the occupant to yourself and the steering wheel. We
slide under the seatbelt, resulting in recommend a minimum of 25 cm
serious injury in the event of a collision. between your breastbone and the
Always sit upright against your airbag cover.
seatback with your feet on the floor. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
Do not place objects higher than the
top of the seat backrest. Failure to • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
follow this instruction could result in press the pedals fully.
personal injury or death in the event of a • Position the shoulder strap of the
sudden stop or crash. seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Raise the rear head restraints when
passengers occupy the rear seats.
Do not remove the head restraint
from an occupied seat.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,

head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest more
than 30°.
99
Seats
Adjusting the Head Restraints Removing the Head Restraints

Front Head Restraints
2
1 2
1
E140447
Adjust the head restraint so that the top E140447

of it is level with the top of your head.
Pull the the head restraint up. Press locking
Raising the Head Restraint button 1 and at the same time release the
retaining clip 2 using a suitable implement.
Pull the head restraint up until it locks into Pull the head restraint up and out of the
a suitable height. seat backrest.
Lowering the Head Restraint Rear Outer Head Restraints
Press locking button 1 and push the head
restraint down until it locks into a suitable
height.
E151804
Pull the head restraint up. Press the locking

button 1 to lower the head restraint or to
remove the head restraint.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNINGS
Use accessory seat covers designed
for seats with side airbags. Have
these fitted by an authorized dealer.
100
Seats
WARNINGS Adjusting the Lumbar Support

Do not adjust the driver seat when
Note: The seat covers fitted to your vehicle

as part of a special equipment pack are
washable without removing them from the
seats.
Note: The seat covers are designed to work
with the seat's existing features and safety
systems, and should not require adjustment.
If seat cover removal and installation is
required, see an authorized dealer.
Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward
WARNING
Make sure the seat fully locks into
place by rocking it backward and
forward.
E131595
Adjusting the Height of the Driver

Seat
E131590
Note: Do not move the front seats too close

to the instrument panel.
E131593
101
Seats
Recline Adjustment Bench Seat
E131592 E135862
Folding the Seat Backrest - Super

Cab POWER SEATS
Fold the front passenger seat to allow easy WARNINGS
access to the rear seat. Use accessory seat covers designed
for seats with side airbags. Have
these fitted by an authorized dealer.
Do not adjust the driver seat when
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as

part of a special equipment pack are
seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted
to work with the seat's existing features and
safety systems, and should not require
adjustment. If seat cover removal and
E136219 installation is required, see an authorized
dealer.
102
Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and Recline Adjustment

Forward
E131596
E131591
Tilting the Seat

Note: Do not move the front seats too close
to the instrument panel.
Adjusting the Height of the Driver

Seat
E131607
E131594
103
Seats
REAR SEATS Folding the Seat Cushion
Note: The seat covers fitted to your vehicle Double Cab

as part of a special equipment pack are
seats.
Note: The seat covers are designed to work
with the seat's existing features and safety
systems, and should not require adjustment.
If seat cover removal and installation is
required, see an authorized dealer.
Folding the Seat Cushion

Super Cab
E247999
E247641
E131743
1. Place the passenger side seat buckles
behind the elastic strap on the seat
backrest.
2. Place the driver side seat buckle behind
the elastic strap on the seat backrest.
3. Pull the tether strap.
4. Raise the seat cushion.
5. Use the strap to tether the cushion to
the seat backrest.
104
Seats
Unfolding the Seat Cushion Note: Do not unlatch and fold the seat
backrest when the seat cushion is folded
Double Cab up.
WARNING
Make sure that the seats and the
seat backrests are secure and fully
locked in their catches.
1
E131744
E247640
1. Push the seat cushion down. 1. Pull the release strap up.
2. Remove the seatbelt buckles from 2. Push the seat backrest forward.
behind the elastic strap on the seat
backrest. Unfolding the Seat Backrest
Note: You must stow the cushion tether Double cab
strap in the pocket provided.
WARNING
Folding the Seat Backrest
Make sure that the seats and the
Double Cab seat backrests are secure and fully
locked in their catches.
WARNING
When folding the seat backrest Note: When folding the seat backrest up,
down, take care not to get your make sure that the seatbelts are visible to
fingers caught in the mechanism. an occupant and not caught behind the
seat.
Note: When folding the cushion up, make
sure that the seatbelt buckles are visible to
an occupant and are not under the seat.
Note: Do not use the rear surface of the rear
seat backrest as a load floor.
105
12 Volt DC Power Point Location

WARNING Power points may be in the following
locations:
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect • On the front of the center console.
use of the power points can cause • Inside the center console.
damage not covered by the vehicle • On the rear of the center console.
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury. • Inside the luggage compartment.
230 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt WARNING
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps. Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
If the power supply does not work after you the device is not in use. Do not use
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition any extension cord with the 230 volt AC
on. power point, since it will defeat the safety
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the protection design. Doing so may cause the
accessory plug. power point to overload due to powering
Note: Do not use the power point over the multiple devices that can reach beyond
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or the 150 watt load limit and could result in
a fuse may blow. fire or serious injury.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use. Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
Do not insert objects other than an voltage drops below 11 volts.
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow You can use the power point for electric
the fuse. devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
E206133
106
When the indicator light on the power point

is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
107
Storage Compartments
CUP HOLDERS GLOVE BOX

WARNING The glove box is on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Use only soft cups in the cup holders.
Hard objects can injure you in a crash. Open the glove box using the latch handle.
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as

items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Type One
E223956
Glove Box with Lock (If Equipped)

E132722
Lock the glove box using the ignition key.
To lock, close the glove box and insert the
Type Two ignition key into the glove box lock and
rotate it clockwise. Remove the key.
To unlock the glove box, insert the ignition
key into the glove box lock and rotate it
counter clockwise.
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
• Cup Holders.
• Auxiliary Power Points.
• Coin storage.
E132723 • Media Hub.
• Cool box.
108
Storage Compartments
REAR SEAT ARMREST
1
E227772
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped) E131745
1. Push the armrest into the seatback to

store it.
2. Pull the strap to open the armrest.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE

Super Cab
E224352
Press near the rear edge of the door to 2

open it. 1
E188672
109
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH

WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of E247596
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If Note: Make sure the key is clean before
you smell exhaust fumes inside your inserting it into any lock cylinder.
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell Note: Do not leave the key in the ignition
exhaust fumes. for an extended period of time when the
engine is not running. This is to prevent the
vehicle battery from losing charge.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving Switching the Ignition Off
characteristics for approximately 10 km
after you reconnect it. This is because the Turn the key to position 0.
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard Switching the Ignition to
any unusual driving characteristics during Accessory Mode
this period.
Turn the key to position I. Electrical
When you start the engine, do not press accessories, for example the radio, operate
the accelerator pedal before and during without the engine running.
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the Switching the Ignition On
engine.
Turn the key to position II. All electrical
circuits and accessories are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
110
Starting the Engine Note: You can only attempt to start the
engine for a limited amount of time before
Turn the key to position III. Release the the starting system temporarily disables. If
key when the engine starts. you exceed the starting time limit, a
message may appear and you cannot
STEERING WHEEL LOCK attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes.
WARNING Cold or Hot Engine
Always check that the steering wheel
lock is deactivated before Vehicles with Manual Transmission
attempting to move your vehicle. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Failure to deactivate the steering wheel
lock could result in a crash. Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during
engine starting stops the engine from
cranking.
To lock the steering wheel:
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch. 2. Start the engine.
2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly to Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
engage the lock.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel 1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission 2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Switch the ignition on or press the brake 3. Start the engine.
pedal.
All Vehicles
Vehicles With Manual Transmission If the engine does not start within 10
Switch the ignition on. seconds, wait for a short period and try
again.
STARTING A GASOLINE If the engine does not start after three

attempts, wait ten seconds and follow the
ENGINE flooded engine procedure.
Before starting the engine, check the If you have difficulty starting the engine
following: when the temperature is below -25°C,
press the accelerator pedal to the mid-way
• Make sure all occupants have fastened point of its travel and try again.
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and Fuel Flooded Engine
electrical accessories are off.
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Shift into park (P) or neutral. 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
111
3. Start the engine. Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
Note: After a limited number of attempts
1. Fully depress the brake pedal. to start your engine, the system will not
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). allow you to try again until a period of time
has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there. Switch the ignition on and wait
until the glow plug indicator goes
4. Start the engine. off.
All Vehicles
Vehicles With Manual Transmission
If the engine does not start, repeat the cold
or hot engine procedure. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the
Engine Idle Speed after Starting engine is starting stops the engine from
The speed at which the engine idles cranking and returns to the ignition on
immediately after starting minimizes position.
vehicle emissions and maximizes cabin 1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
comfort and fuel economy.
2. Start the engine.
The idle speed varies depending on certain
factors. These include vehicle component Vehicles With Automatic Transmission
and ambient temperatures as well as
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
electrical and climate system demands.
Note: Releasing the brake pedal while the
Failure to Start engine is starting stops the engine from
cranking and returns to the ignition on
Vehicles with Manual Transmission position.
If the engine does not crank when you full 1. Move the transmission selector lever
depress the clutch pedal with the ignition to position park (P) or neutral (N).
key in position III, follow this procedure:
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
1. Fully depress both the clutch and brake 3. Start the engine.
pedals.
2. Turn the key to position III until the Failure to Start
engine has started.
Vehicles With Manual Transmission
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE Note: Remove all other keys from the
center console.
Cold or Hot Engine If the engine does not crank when the
clutch pedal has been fully depressed and
All Vehicles the ignition key is turned to position III.
Note: When the temperature is below 1. Fully depress the clutch and brake
-15°C, you may need to crank the engine for pedals.
up to 10 seconds.
112
2. Turn the key to position III until the If your journeys meet one of the following
engine has started. conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER • You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
The filter forms part of the emissions • Your journeys contain a high level of
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters acceleration and deceleration.
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas. You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
Regeneration regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
WARNING conditions, which you will find at higher
Do not park or idle your vehicle over vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
dry leaves, dry grass or other main road or freeway for a minimum
combustible materials. The of 20 minutes. This drive may include
regeneration process creates very high short stops that will not affect the
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust regeneration process.
will radiate a considerable amount of heat • Avoid prolonged idling and always
during and after regeneration and after you observe speed limits and road
have switched the engine off. This is a conditions.
potential fire hazard.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
maintain engine speed between 1500
Note: During regeneration at low speed or and 3000 RPM.
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to the high temperatures SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Vehicles With a Turbocharger
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration WARNING
process.
Do not switch the engine off when it
Note: Under certain conditions, the engine is running at high speed. If you do, the
cooling fan may continue to run for several turbocharger will continue running
minutes after you switch your vehicle off. after the engine oil pressure has dropped
This could happen in low ambient to zero. This will lead to premature
temperatures and independent of the turbocharger bearing wear.
engine coolant temperature, for example
short journeys or low coolant temperature.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle the engine has reached idle speed and then
requires periodic regeneration to maintain switch it off.
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.
113
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel

vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
WARNINGS
excessive or prolonged breathing of
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
pressure in an overfilled tank may permanent injury.
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire. • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
The fuel system may be under remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound with water for 15 minutes and seek
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel medical attention. Failure to seek
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may proper medical attention could lead to
spray out, which could cause serious permanent injury.
personal injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
Fuels can cause serious injury or through the skin. If you splash fuel on
death if misused or mishandled. your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
Fuel may contain benzene, which is thoroughly wash your skin with soap
a cancer-causing agent. and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
When refueling always shut the contact causes skin irritation.
engine off and never allow sparks or • Be particularly careful if you are taking
open flames near the fuel tank filler Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone for the treatment of alcoholism.
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid adverse reaction, serious personal
inhaling excess fumes. injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
Follow these guidelines when refueling: reactions.
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before WARNINGS
refueling. Do not mix gasoline with oil, diesel
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or or other liquids. This could cause a
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic chemical reaction.
and if swallowed can cause death or Do not use leaded gasoline or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed gasoline with additives containing
immediately call a physician, even if no other metallic compounds (e.g.
symptoms are immediately apparent. manganese-based). They could damage
The toxic effects of fuel may not be the emission system.
apparent for hours.
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel.
114
Fuel and Refueling
Note: We do not recommend the use of Biodiesel Usage

additional additives or other engine
treatments for normal vehicle use. Your vehicle is suitable for use with
biodiesel blends up to 10% (B10). You can
Use minimum 91 octane unleaded gasoline achieve acceptable engine performance
that meets the specification defined by EN and durability using B10 by adhering to
228 or the equivalent national below guidelines.
specification.
Note: Use biodiesel that meets the
Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol specification defined by EN 590 or the
blends up to 20% (E20). relevant national specification, from a
trusted fuel supplier.
Long-Term Storage
Note: The B10 fuel used should be
Most gasoline contains ethanol. We dispensed from a service station pump
recommend that you fill the fuel tank with labelled in accordance with the
fuel that does not contain ethanol if you requirements of national regulations.
intend to store your vehicle for more than
two months. Alternatively, we recommend Note: If your vehicle experiences low
that you seek advice from an authorized temperature fuel waxing issues, consider
dealer. using different diesel brands or diesel with
lower biodiesel content.
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Long-Term Storage

Note: Do not leave vehicles filled with B10
WARNINGS fuel parked for more than one month. Diesel
Do not mix gasoline with oil, diesel fuels containing biodiesel can degrade
or other liquids. This could cause a quickly when stored for long periods of time,
chemical reaction. especially when exposed to warm and
Do not mix kerosene, paraffin, oil, humid conditions.
gasoline or other liquids with diesel. It is recommended to fill the tank with
This may cause a chemical reaction purely mineral diesel (where available).
and engine damage not covered by the Alternatively, we recommend that you seek
vehicle Warranty. advice from your dealer.
Note: We recommend that you use only FUEL FILLER FUNNEL

high quality fuel.
LOCATION
Note: We do not recommend the use of
additional additives or other engine The fuel filler funnel is in the glove
treatments for normal vehicle use. compartment.
Note: We do not recommend the use of
additional additives to prevent fuel waxing.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL -
GASOLINE
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
115
Fuel and Refueling
If your vehicle runs out of fuel: WARNINGS

• Add a minimum of 5 L of fuel to restart Do not try to pry open or push open
the engine. the capless fuel system with foreign
• You may need to switch the ignition objects. This could damage the fuel
from off to on several times after system and its seal and cause injury to you
refueling to allow the fuel system to or others.
pump the fuel from the tank to the Do not dispose of fuel in the
engine. When restarting, cranking time household refuse or the public
takes a few seconds longer than sewage system. Use an authorized
normal. waste disposal facility.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
Filling a Portable Fuel Container included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 115).
WARNING
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump they may not work with the capless fuel
nozzle can produce static electricity. system and can damage it.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
Use the following guidelines to avoid 1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
electrostatic charge build-up, which can 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
produce a spark, when filling an fuel filler inlet.
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel

Container
E157452
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel container.
into the fuel filler neck. This may 4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. 5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
116
Fuel and Refueling
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it Reset the fuel run dry protection feature
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose by following the below steps:
of it. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn to
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from position II (Ignition).
an authorized dealer if you choose to 2. Hold the key in the position for 20
dispose of the funnel. seconds and turn back to 0 (Off).
3. Repeat the steps three times to
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL - complete the reset procedure.
DIESEL Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Avoid running out of fuel. This may have Use the following guidelines to avoid
an adverse effect on powertrain electrostatic charge build-up when filling
components. an ungrounded fuel container:
If you have run out of fuel: • Only use an approved fuel container to
• You may need to cycle the ignition from transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
off to on several times after refueling container on the ground when filling.
to allow the fuel system to pump the • Do not fill a fuel container while it is
fuel from the tank to the engine. On inside your vehicle (including the cargo
restarting, cranking time will take a few area).
seconds longer than normal. Crank • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
time will be longer than usual. with the fuel container while filling.
• Normally, adding 5 L of fuel is enough • Do not use a device that holds the fuel
to restart the engine. If the vehicle is pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
out of fuel and on a steep grade, more
than 5 L may be required.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel run dry WARNING
protection system to prevent engine Do not park or idle your vehicle over
damage. dry leaves, dry grass or other
The vehicle will enter an engine misfire combustible materials. The exhaust
mode and shutdown at a pre-determined will radiate a considerable amount of heat
distance after the Distance to Empty during use, and after you have switched
becomes zero. the engine off. This is a potential fire
hazard.
Refill the fuel tank with a minimum of 5 L
diesel before resetting the feature.
Driving with a Catalytic Converter
WARNINGS
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not crank the engine for long

periods.
117
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap

Do not run the engine when a spark
plug lead is disconnected.
Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See
Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
183).
Do not switch the ignition off when
driving.
REFUELING
E136220
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to start the engine if 1. Press the flap to open it.
you have filled the fuel tank with the
incorrect fuel. This could damage the
engine. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Do not use any kind of flames or heat
near the fuel system. The fuel system
is under pressure. There is a risk of
injury if the fuel system is leaking.
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel
filler flap briefly from a distance not
E131286
less than 200 mm.
We recommend that you wait at 2. Open the flap fully until it engages.
least 10 seconds before removing the
fuel nozzle to allow any residual fuel 3. Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise.
to drain into the fuel tank.
A
Stop refueling after the fuel nozzle
stops the second time. Additional
fuel will fill the expansion space in
the fuel tank which could lead to fuel
overflowing. Fuel spillage could be
hazardous to other road users.
Do not remove the fuel nozzle from
its fully inserted position during the
refueling process.
B
E139203
Note: Central locking also locks and
unlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 36).
118
Fuel and Refueling
4. Hold the fuel nozzle in position B during capacity and the empty reserve combined.
refueling. Holding the fuel nozzle in Indicated capacity is the difference in the
position A can affect the flow of fuel amount of fuel in the fuel tank and when
and shut off the fuel nozzle before the the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty
fuel tank is full. reserve is the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range. When refueling
your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates
empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity due
to the empty reserve still present in the fuel
E119081 tank.
5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove Filling the Fuel Tank
it.
For consistent results when refueling:
6. Install the fuel cap by rotating it
clockwise until it clicks. • Switch the ignition off.
7. Close and push the fuel filler flap to • Allow no more than two automatic
lock it. shut-offs when refueling.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, Note: Results are most accurate when the
replace only with the cap designed for your refueling method is consistent.
vehicle. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel Calculating Fuel Economy
system if the correct genuine Ford fuel filler Do not measure fuel economy during the
cap is not used. first 1,600 km of driving (this is the engine
break-in period). A more accurate
FUEL CONSUMPTION measurement is obtained after 4,000 km.
Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or
We derive CO2 and fuel consumption fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways
figures in laboratory tests according to to measure fuel economy.
Regulation (EC) 715/2007 or CR (EC) • Fill the fuel tank completely and record
692/2008 or ECE R 101 and subsequent the initial odometer reading.
amendments where applicable. They are
• Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
intended as a comparison between makes
the amount of fuel added.
and models of vehicles. They are not
intended to represent the real world fuel • After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
consumption you may get from your tank and record the current odometer
vehicle. Real world fuel consumption is reading.
governed by many factors, for example
driving style, high speed driving, stop-start
driving, air conditioning usage, the
accessories fitted, payload and towing.
The advertised capacity is the indicated
119
Fuel and Refueling
• Subtract your initial odometer reading

from the current odometer reading.
• Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled). Keep a
record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or
freeway). This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions.
Additionally, keeping records during
summer and winter show how temperature
impacts fuel economy. In general, your
vehicle will use more fuel in cold
temperatures.
120
Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.

This will increase the tendency for your
Selecting Reverse Gear vehicle to creep when you have selected a
drive gear.
Do not engage reverse gear when your
vehicle is moving. This can cause damage Selector lever positions
to the transmission.
P
R
N
D S+
E132720 -
E184729
Raise the collar when you select reverse P Park

gear. R Reverse
N Neutral
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION D Drive
WARNINGS S Sport mode and manual shifting

Always apply the parking brake fully S- Manual shift down
and make sure you shift into park (P). S+ Manual shift up
Switch the ignition off and remove
the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Press the button on the selector lever to
Do not apply the brake pedal and select reverse (R) or park (P). The current
accelerator pedal simultaneously. gear is shown in the display screen.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
Park (P)
for more than a few seconds will limit
engine performance, which may result in WARNING
difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and
could lead to serious injury. Move the transmission selector lever
to park (P) only when your vehicle is
stationary.
121
Transmission
Note: To move the selector lever from park The transmission shifts to the appropriate
(P), apply the footbrake with ignition key in gear for optimum performance based on
position II. ambient temperature, road gradient,
vehicle load and your input.
Note: An audible warning will sound if you
open the driver's door and you have not Sport Mode (S)
moved the selector lever to park (P). The
battery saver will deactivate the audible Switch on sport mode by shifting the
warning after a period of time. gearshift lever to sport (S). In sport mode
the transmission selects the optimum gear
In this position, power is not transmitted
for best performance. This gear selection
to the driven wheels and the transmission
is typically lower than that of drive (D) and
is locked. You can start the engine with the
the shifts are faster.
transmission selector lever in this position.
Reverse (R) SelectShift™ Automatic

Transmission
WARNING
This feature gives you the ability to change
Move the transmission selector lever gears up or down as desired.
to reverse (R) only when your vehicle
As long as the engine speed does not
is stationary and the engine is at idle
exceed the maximum allowable limit,
speed.
downshifts are allowed. SelectShift
automatically downshifts at low engine
Shift the selector lever to reverse (R) to speeds in order to prevent engine stalls.
allow your vehicle to move backward.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
Neutral (N) maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
WARNING SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
In neutral (N) your vehicle has the even if the engine is approaching the RPM
ability to roll freely. If you intend to limit, unless the accelerator pedal is at full
leave your vehicle, make sure you travel.
apply the parking brake. With the selector lever in the sport (S)
position:
In this position, power is not transmitted • Move the lever forward (-) to
to the driven wheels but the transmission downshift.
is not locked. You can start the engine with
the gearshift lever in this position. • Move the lever backward (+) to upshift.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy and smoothness.
Shift the selector lever to drive (D) to allow
your vehicle to move forward and shift
automatically through the forward gears.
122
Transmission
Note: For some markets this feature is

disabled.
Your vehicle has a brake-shift interlock
feature that prevents moving the gearshift
lever from park (P) when the ignition is on
P and you do not press the brake pedal.
The system requires service if you cannot
R move the gearshift lever out of park (P)
with the ignition on and the brake pedal
N pressed. It is possible that a fuse has blown
- or your vehicle’s brake lamps are not
D S operating properly. See Fuse
+ Specification Chart (page 188).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the selector
lever from park (P):
E136209
Note: Apply the parking brake and switch
To exit SelectShift mode, return the the ignition off before performing this
selector lever to drive (D). procedure.
When your vehicle is stationary, only the
1st and 2nd gears can be selected. Manual
shifting is sequential, therefore gears
cannot be skipped.
Emergency Park Position Release

Lever
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can E132721
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking 1. Lift up the cover in the center console
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use next to the transmission selector lever
wheels chocks if appropriate. with a suitable tool.
If the parking brake is fully released, 2. Push down the locking button in the
but the brake warning lamp remains slot and simultaneously move the
illuminated, the brakes may not be selector lever out of park (P) and into
working properly. Have your vehicle another gear.
checked as soon as possible.
123
Transmission
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as

possible if this procedure is used.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive

Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
124
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Use for off-road driving.

We recommend that you frequently
The four-wheel drive system in your vehicle inspect your vehicle's chassis components
is a part-time system activated using the if your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
rotary switch mounted in the centre
console. In normal rear-wheel drive Note: The four-wheel drive indicator lamp
operation (2H) drive torque is directed to will come on when the transfer shift switch
the rear axle. When the switch is moved to is in the 4H position. See Warning Lamps
4H or 4L, drive torque is directed to both and Indicators (page 62).
the front and rear axles, providing
four-wheel drive operation.
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range - 4L
Depending on your vehicle, further Note: Do not use four-wheel drive 4L for
four-wheel drive options may be available normal road driving.
on the switch panel located on the centre Use for more extreme off-road conditions,
console. such as steep ascents and descents.
Also use when low speed maneuvering is
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE necessary, such as negotiating a
boulder-strewn river bed.
Note: A clicking sound from the drive line
We recommend that you frequently
may be heard while shifting between ranges,
inspect your vehicle's chassis components
which is normal.
if your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
Note: The four-wheel drive low range 4L
and four-wheel drive indicator lamps will
come on when the transfer shift switch is in
the 4L position. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 62).
Shifting Between 2H and 4H

Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the
stability control (ESP) functions.
Shift between 2H and 4H can be done with
the vehicle moving up to 110 km/h, but only
with the accelerator pedal released in a
straight line. During the shift the indicator
lamp will flash.
E132692
Shifting Between 2H and 4L

Two-Wheel Drive, High Range - 2H
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate Engine
Use for all normal road driving and also for Traction Control and Trailer Stability Control
off-road driving across dry, level terrain. but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist
and Brake Traction Control remain active.
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range - 4H
Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the
Note: Do not use four-wheel drive 4H for stability control (ESP) functions.
normal road driving.
125
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do When driving at slow speeds off road under
so. high load conditions, use a low gear when
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal for possible. Low gear operation will maximize
manual transmission. the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
3. Move the transmission selector lever
to neutral (N) for automatic Basic Operating Principles
transmission.
When driving your vehicle on surfaces
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 2H made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel,
to 4L or 4L to 2H. snow or ice proceed with care.
During the shift the indicator lamp will
flash. If it continues to flash, check meeting Sand
the above conditions. When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Shifting Between 4H and 4L Shift to a lower gear and drive steadily
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate Engine through the terrain. Apply the accelerator
Traction Control and Trailer Stability Control slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip.
but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
and Brake Traction Control remain active. an extended period of time. This will cause
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do the system to overheat.
so. To resume operation, switch the ignition
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal for off and allow the system to cool down for
manual transmission. a minimum of 15 minutes.
3. Move the transmission selector lever When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
to neutral (N) for automatic under high outside temperatures, use a low
transmission. gear when possible. Low gear operation
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 4H will maximize the engine and transmission
to 4L or 4L to 4H. cooling capability.
During the shift the indicator lamp will Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
flash. If it continues to flash, check meeting causes vehicle momentum to work against
the above conditions. you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
Driving in Special Conditions With required from another vehicle. Remember,
Four-Wheel Drive you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for
driving on sand, snow, mud and rough Mud and Water
roads and have operating characteristics
that are somewhat different from Mud
conventional vehicles, both on and off the Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
freeway. speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
126
After driving through mud, clean off residue If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
stuck to rotating drive shafts and tires. around because this could cause vehicle
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
drive shafts can cause an imbalance that safe location.
could damage drive components.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
Water climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
If you must drive through high water, drive resulting in loss of vehicle control.
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may E143949
damage the transmission. If the front or rear

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
axle is submerged in water, the axle
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
brake application and brake overheating.
should be checked and changed if
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
necessary.
overdrive or move the transmission
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
Although natural obstacles may make it braking as you could lose control. The front
necessary to travel diagonally up or down wheels have to be turning in order to steer
a hill or steep incline, you should always your vehicle.
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping brake pedal.
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
127
Driving on Snow and Ice If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow
WARNING
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
If you are driving in slippery it may be rocked out by shifting between
conditions that require tire chains or forward and reverse gears, stopping
cables, then it is critical that you drive between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead is not at normal operating temperature,
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of damage to the transmission may occur.
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
the direction of the slide until you regain than a minute, damage to the transmission
control of your vehicle. and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage. Maintenance and Modifications
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages The suspension and steering systems on
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and your vehicle have been designed and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle. tested to provide predictable performance
Should you start to slide while driving on whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel we strongly recommend that you do not
in the direction of the slide until you regain make modifications such as adding or
control. removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
Avoid sudden applications of power and
equivalent to the original factory
quick changes of direction on snow and
equipment.
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop. We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not control.
become overconfident as to road
conditions. Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
Make sure you allow sufficient distance cost, reduce vehicle performance and
between you and other vehicles for operational capabilities and adversely
stopping. Drive slower than usual and affect you and your passenger's safety. We
consider using one of the lower gears. In recommend you frequently inspect your
emergency stopping situations, apply the vehicle's chassis components when your
brake steadily. As your vehicle has a four vehicle is subject to off road usage.
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump
the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 131).
128
Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The system will:

• Automatically disengage when a speed
This axle provides added traction on of 40 km/h is exceeded.
slippery surfaces, particularly when one
• Automatically re-engage when the
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
speed drops below 30 km/h.
normal conditions, the limited slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle • Automatically disengage when the
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in ignition is turned off.
tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is Note: The system activates when the
normal behavior and indicates the axle is vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h and
working. accelerator pedal released.
Note: The system can be used in any drive
ELECTRONIC LOCKING mode (2H, 4H or 4L).
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped) If the system is selected when driving
above 40 km/h, the request is stored and
Note: Do not operate the system on sealed will be engaged when the vehicle speed
roads. Doing so may lead to excessive tire reduces to 30 km/h. The electronic
noise and wear. Use the system only in differential lock indicator lamp will flash
consistently slippery or loose surface. until either the vehicle speed reduces and
The system locks the left and right portions the differential lock is engaged or the driver
of the rear axle together to form a solid deselects the electronic differential lock
driving axle, resulting in increased rear button.
wheel traction in certain conditions. Note: When the system is engaged, the
Press the electronic differential lock button Electronic Stability Program (ESP) functions
to activate the system. such as Stability Control, Traction Control,
Hill Descent Control, Emergency stop signal,
Hill Start Assist and Trailer Sway Control
will be deactivated, the ESP Off indicator
illuminates, and the HDC on indicator turns
off.
Note: When the anti-lock braking system
is operating, the system will be disengaged.
E214414
The electronic differential lock will lock

and unlock when the internal gears are
aligned and no torque load is placed on
the differential. To aid alignment, drive the
vehicle in a straight line with the
accelerator pedal released. Alternatively,
drive slowly forward and backward while
moving the steering wheel from side to side
to allow the electronic differential lock to
lock.
129
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION 3. Select park (P) (automatic

transmission only).
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If 4. Apply the parking brake.
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
continuous squeal sound is present, the
interferences. If none are found and the
brake linings may be worn-out. If the vehicle
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
has continuous vibration or shudder in the
to a dealer.
steering wheel while braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Brake Inspection
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving Disc brake pads should be checked to
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the confirm that each disc brake pad lining has
brakes wear. See Cleaning the Exterior a suitable amount of friction material for
(page 241). safe use.
Disc Brakes Inspection and Verification
Wet brake discs result in reduced braking Note: Disc brake pads must be replaced as
efficiency. Dab the brake pedal when an "axle set". Do not replace an individual
driving from a car wash to remove the film disc brake pad or disc brake pads on one
of water. brake assembly only.
1. Using a suitable tool, such as an
Anti-Lock Brake System (If Equipped) inspection mirror, look into the
inspection hole on the back of each
WARNING disc brake caliper.
The system is designed to aid the 2. Inspect the inner and outer disc brake
driver. It is not intended to replace pads to confirm each disc brake pad
your attention and judgment. You are lining measures 1.5 mm thick or more.
still responsible to drive with due care and Note: See your authorised dealer if any disc
attention. brake pad lining is under 1.5 mm thickness.
Inspect each brake caliper and anchor
This system helps you maintain steering
bracket for corrosion, wear, or damage.
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking. Wear Adjustment
Brake Override Automatic adjustment of disc brake
friction material during brake application
In the event the accelerator pedal occurs as follows:
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to • The piston slides within its bore to a
slow your vehicle and reduce engine power. new position, taking up the brake pad
wear.
If you experience this condition:
• The brake caliper moves on its guide
1. Apply the brakes and bring your vehicle pins, taking up the brake pad wear.
to a safe stop.
2. Turn the engine off.
130
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH 3. Press the release button and push the
parking brake lever downward.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES (If Equipped)
The anti-lock braking system does not HILL START ASSIST
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in WARNINGS
front of you. The system does not replace the
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning. parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
• You take corners too fast. brake and move the transmission selector
• The road surface is poor. lever into park (P).
Note: If the system activates, the brake You must remain in your vehicle once
pedal may pulse and may travel further. you have turned the system on.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This The system is active unless ESC
is normal. warning lamp is turned off. During all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
PARKING BRAKE system and intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively or
WARNING if a malfunction is detected, the
Always fully apply the parking brake system will turn off and ESC warning
and make sure you shift into park (P). lamp will turn on.
Switch the ignition off and remove There is a short delay in the system
the key whenever you leave your vehicle. activation of up to two seconds after
shifting the lever to drive (D) or
To apply the parking brake: reverse (R) in vehicles with automatic
transmission.
1. Firmly press the brake pedal.
2. Pull the parking brake lever upward to The system makes it easier to pull away
its fullest extent. when your vehicle is on a slope without the
Note: Do not press the release button when need to use the parking brake.
pulling the parking brake lever upward.
When the system is active, your vehicle will
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and remain stationary on the slope for two to
facing uphill, shift into park (P) and turn the three seconds after you release the brake
steering wheel away from the curb. pedal. This allows you time to move your
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and foot from the brake to the accelerator
facing downhill, shift into park (P) and turn pedal. The brakes are released
the steering wheel toward the curb. automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
To release the parking brake: vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
1. Firmly press the brake pedal. is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope (for example from a car park ramp,
2. Slightly pull the parking brake lever traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
upward. a parking space).
131
Brakes
The system will turn on automatically on • Apply the parking brake.

any slope which can result in significant • Open any door.
vehicle rollback.
• Drive off uphill without re-applying the
Note: Hill start assist is available in vehicles brake.
equipped with electronic stability control
• Wait for one to two seconds after you
(ESC).
remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Using Hill Start Assist • If the system is active in a forward gear,
select reverse gear.
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep • If the system is active in neutral,
the brake pedal pressed. release the clutch pedal (Manual
transmission).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will be • If the system is active in reverse gear,
activated automatically. select neutral.
3. When you remove your foot from the Switching the System On and Off
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for Note: You can only switch the system on
approximately two or three seconds. and off if your vehicle has a manual
This hold time will automatically be transmission.
extended if you are in the process of Note: The system will remain on or off
driving off. depending on how it was last set.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The Your vehicle comes with this feature
brakes will be released automatically. already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
Enable and Disable the System display. See General Information (page
You can enable the system only if the 68).
following conditions are met:
• The engine is running.
• All doors are fully closed.
• The parking brake is fully disengaged.
• No failure mode is present.
• Accelerator pedal is not depressed.
• Vehicle is completely stopped.
• Uphill: Gear shift lever should be in
drive (D) for Automatic transmission
and in any position other than reverse
(R) for manual transmission.
• Downhill: Gear shift lever should be in
reverse (R).
To disable the system, perform one of the
following:
132
Traction Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL

Traction control forms part of the stability
control system.
Note: The system automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
Note: On 4WD vehicles only, shifting to 4L
deactivates the engine traction control but
brake traction control remains active.
In some situations for example if your
vehicle is stuck in snow or mud, turning the
system off may be beneficial as this allows
the wheels to spin with full engine power.
Traction control is an enhanced feature of
stability control system and automatically
detects the wheel spin when you
accelerate. If this situation occurs, the
system applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and if necessary, reduces
engine power.
To switch off the traction control, See
Using Stability Control (page 134).
Stability control will remain on even when
you have switched the traction control off.
133
Stability Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The system also provides an enhanced

traction control function by reducing
Electronic Stability Control engine torque if the wheels spin when you
accelerate. This improves your ability to
WARNING pull away on slippery roads or loose
surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting
The system does not relieve you of wheel spin in hairpin bends.
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. Failure to do so Stability Control Warning Lamp
could result in loss of vehicle control,
personal injury or death. While driving, it flashes when the system
is operating. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 62).
USING STABILITY CONTROL

B Note: The system will be switched on
automatically every time you switch the
ignition on.
B
A
A B A
E207884
The system can be deactivated using the

E72903 switch in the center console.
Note: On 4WD vehicles only, when the
A Without ESC.
system is deactivated with the transfer
B With ESC. switch in 2H position, the ESC off indicator
will flash twice to indicate that the system
The system supports stability when your is completely turned off and remains
vehicle starts to slide away from your illuminated. Press the switch again to
intended path. The system performs this enable the system.
by braking individual wheels and reducing
engine torque as required. Note: On 4WD vehicles only, ESC is
switched off when the transfer switch is in
4L position or the Electronic Locking
Differential is operating.
134
Stability Control (If Equipped)
2-wheel drive vehicles

Press and hold the switch for one second
to deactivate Engine Traction Control and
Trailer Sway Control. Hill Start Assist
remains active.
Press and hold the switch for five seconds
to deactivate Engine Traction Control and
Trailer Sway Control and Brake Traction
Control. Hill Start Assist remains active.
4-wheel drive vehicles

Note: All the stability control (ESC)
functions are reactivated when 2H position
is selected.
Transfer shift switch in 4H position:
• Press and hold the switch for one
second to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and ESC.
Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist
and Brake Traction Control remain
active.
Transfer shift switch in 4H or 4L position:
• Press and hold the switch for five
seconds to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and Brake
Traction Control. Hill Descent Control
and Hill Start Assist remain active.
Transfer shift switch in 2H position:
• Press and hold the switch for one
second to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and ESC.
Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist
and Brake Traction Control remain
active.
• Press and hold the switch for five
seconds to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Sway Control and Brake
Traction Control. Hill Descent Control
and Hill Start Assist remain active.
135
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: HDC will be active at speeds less

than 35 km/h and deactivated above
40 km/h but will not turn off until vehicle
WARNING
exceeds 60 km/h.
Before driving off-road it is
Note: HDC will turn off when you switch
absolutely essential that
the ignition off.
in-experienced drivers become fully
familiar with the vehicle's controls. In The HDC switch will illuminate
particular, Sport (S) mode and Hill Descent continuously to indicate that
Control (HDC). HDC is fully active.
HDC will temporarily deactivate during the

Hill descent control (HDC) operates in
following conditions:
conjunction with stability control (ESC) to
provide greater control when off-road, • The brake is hot. Operation resumes
particularly when descending steep slopes. once the brakes cool down.
HDC operation is fully automatic when • Stability control indicator on warning
engaged. lamp is illuminated and operating.
Engine braking controls the speed of the
descent during an off-road hill descent. If HDC Operation
engine braking alone is insufficient to
control the vehicle's speed, HDC will slow
the vehicle using the braking system.
Note: Use HDC only in first or reverse (R)
gear in manual transmission vehicles.
Note: Use HDC only in drive (D), reverse
(R) or sport (S) mode in automatic
transmission vehicles. When in drive (D),
the vehicle will select the most appropriate
gear.
USING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL
E206132
Note: HDC deactivates when the electronic
locking differential is operating. Cruise control switches on the steering
wheel allows you to control your speed of
Selecting HDC descent. SET + increases the speed and
To select HDC, press the hill SET - decreases the speed.
descent control switch on the
E163171 centre console.
Select HDC at speeds less than 60 km/h.
136
Changing the Set Speed

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 km/h increments.
Pressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal will increase or decrease the speed
respectively.
Note: Each gear has a pre-determined
minimum speed.
Note: Descent speed will only increase on
a slope steep enough to provide additional
momentum. Therefore, use of the SET+
switch on a gentle slope may not increase
the speed.
Note: Brake overrides the HDC if the brake
pedal is pressed and the system resumes
on the release of the brake pedal.
Note: HDC assistance will fade out
gradually if you switch the system off. This
is to prevent the loss of control if you press
the HDC switch unintentionally. If assistance
is still required, you can switch back the HDC
on. The control will resume at a speed the
vehicle is travelling when the pedal is
released.
Note: You may hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
Note: When HDC is operating, ESC on
warning lamp will flash.
HDC operates only if the vehicle speed is
within the specified range even if the
system is on permanently during off-road
driving.
137
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

The parking aid system may not
WARNINGS prevent contact with small or moving
To help avoid personal injury, please objects that are close to the ground.
read and understand the limitations The parking aid system gives an audible
of the system as contained in this warning when it detects a large object
section. Sensing is only an aid for some helping to avoid damage to your vehicle.
(generally large and fixed) objects when To help avoid personal injury you must take
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds. care when using the parking aid system.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's Note: Take particular care when reversing
parking aid systems, traffic control with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement accessory. For example, a bicycle carrier.
weather, air brakes, and external motors The rear parking aid will only indicate the
and fans may also affect the function of approximate distance from the rear bumper
the sensing system. This may include to an object.
reduced performance or a false activation.
Note: If you use a high pressure spray to
The system is designed to aid the wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors
driver. It is not intended to replace briefly from a distance not less than 20 cm.
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the
attention. system is turned off automatically when
trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are
Only use the Ford approved trailer connected to the 13-pin socket through a
wiring kit (including the trailer wiring Ford approved trailer tow module.
module) when towing with your
vehicle. Using generic trailer wiring kits may Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
prevent the correct operation of the rear or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
parking sensors (where fitted) and could Note: The system may emit false alerts if
damage the electrical systems of your it detects a signal using the same frequency
vehicle. as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully
The sensors may not detect objects loaded.
in heavy rain or other conditions that Note: The outer sensors may detect the
cause interference. side walls of a garage. If the distance
The system does not detect cyclists, between the outer sensors and the side wall
animals, pedestrians at night or remains constant for three seconds, the
vehicles that are driving in a different alert will turn off. As you continue the inner
direction. Failure to take care may result in sensors will detect objects directly behind
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious your vehicle.
personal injury or death. To avoid exposure to an electromagnetic
field, stay at least 20 cm away from the
parking aid sensors.
138
Parking Aids
This radiocommunication equipment is in Note: The parking aid system sensors must
compliance with the regulations of the be kept clean and free from snow or ice to
National Broadcasting avoid reduced performance or false
Telecommunications Commission. This activation. Do not clean the sensors with
radiocommunication equipment has the sharp objects.
electromagnetic field strength in Note: If the parking aid sensors are
compliance with the Safety Standard for misaligned due to vehicle bumper damage
the Use of Radiocommunication it will cause reduced performance or false
Equipment on Human Health announced activation.
by the National Broadcasting
Telecommunications Commission. The rear parking aid sensors turn on
automatically when you move the
transmission selector lever to reverse (R)
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped) and your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 5 km/h. Moving your vehicle
WARNINGS closer to a large object will increase the
Sensing is only an aid to detect some audible warning repeat rate. When the
objects when moving forward or object is less than 30 cm from the center
backward at low speeds. Traffic of your vehicle’s rear bumper the audible
control systems, inclement weather or an warning will sound continuously.
external motor and fan can affect the
sensors; this may include reduced
performance or false activation. To help
avoid personal injury you must read and
understand the limitations of the system
detailed in this section.
prevent contact with small or moving
objects that are close to the ground.
The parking aid system gives an audible
warning when it detects a large object
helping to avoid damage to your vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury you must take
care when using the parking aid system.
Rear Sensing System

When the parking aid system produces an
audible warning, the audio system may
reduce the set volume to a predetermined
level.
E205544
Note: Some add-on equipment can cause
reduced performance or false activation.
A. Sensor coverage area is up to 180 cm
For example, large trailer hitches, bike or
from the rear bumper.
surfboard racks.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
139
Parking Aids
The system detects large objects when Front Sensing System

you move the transmission selector lever
to reverse (R): The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low park (P).
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary. Note: Keep the sensors located on the
bumper or fascia free from snow, ice and
Shift the transmission from reverse (R) or large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
press the parking aid button or a soft are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
button in the cluster menu to switch the affected. Do not clean the sensors with
system off. If a fault is present in the sharp objects.
system, a warning message appears in the
information display and does not allow you Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
to switch the system on. See Information the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
Messages (page 77). or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false beeps.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped) When the parking aid system produces an
audible warning, the audio system may
WARNINGS reduce the set volume to a predetermined
The parking aid system can only level.
assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking aid
system.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
prevent contact with small or moving
objects that are close to the ground.
The parking aid system gives an audible
warning when it detects a large object
helping to avoid damage to your vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury you must take E205545
care when using the parking aid system. A. Sensor coverage area is up to 70 cm
Traffic control systems, inclement from the front bumper and 15–35 cm
weather, air brakes, external motors to the side of the front bumper.
and fans may affect the correct When your vehicle approaches an object,
operation of the sensing system.This may a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
cause reduced performance or false alerts. moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 30 cm or less from the front bumper.
140
Parking Aids
The system automatically turns off when If the gearshift is in drive (D) or any other
your vehicle speed reaches 12 km/h. forward gear, the front sensing system
provides audio warnings when the vehicle
The system detects objects when:
is moving below 12 km/h and an obstacle
• Your vehicle is moving forward at low is located inside the detection area.
speed.
• Your vehicle is at a standstill.
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
Press the parking aid button to switch (if
equipped) to turn the system off. If a fault WARNINGS
is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information The operation of the camera may
display and does not allow you to switch vary depending on the ambient
the system on. See Information temperature, vehicle and road
Messages (page 77). conditions.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the The distances shown in the display
front sensing system provides audio may differ from the actual distance.
warnings when the detected obstacle is Do not place objects in front of the
moving towards your vehicle. camera.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped) The camera is located on the tailgate
below the badge.
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
Vehicles with automatic transmission E133364
If the gearshift is in neutral (N), the system

provides obstacle distance indication Switching the Rear View Camera
through the information display. If your On
vehicle moves the front sensing system
provides an audible warning when the WARNING
vehicle is moving at 12 km/h or below and The camera may not detect objects
an obstacle is located inside the detection that are very close to your vehicle.
area.
Switch the ignition and the audio unit on.
141
Parking Aids
Move the transmission selector lever to

reverse. E
The image is displayed on the rear view
D
mirror screen.
The camera may not operate correctly in C
the following conditions:
• Dark areas.
• Intense light. B
• If the ambient temperature increases
or decreases rapidly.
• If the camera is wet, for example in rain
or high humidity.
• If the camera's view is obstructed, for
example by mud.
Using the Display

WARNING
Objects above the camera may not
be visible. Check the area behind
your vehicle when necessary.
Note: Marks are for general guidance only,

and are calculated for vehicles in maximum
load conditions on an even road surface.
The lines show the distance from the outer
edge of the front tire plus two inches (51
millimeters) and the rear bumper. A A
E133365
A Exterior mirror clearance - 4

inches (0.1 meter).
B Red - up to 12 inches (0.45
meter).
C Amber - 39 inches (1.0 meter).
142
Parking Aids
D Green - 79 inches (1.8 meter).

E Black - center line of the
projected vehicle path.
Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lines
on the screen are not shown. The camera
will show your vehicle direction and not the
trailer.
Switching the Rear View Camera

Off
Note: Move the transmission selector lever
from reverse gear. The display will switch
off after a short period.
Note: The system will automatically switch
off once your vehicle speed has reached
approximately 15 km/h.
143
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching Cruise Control On

Press the cruise control button.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the The indicator appears in the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise information display.
control when your vehicle speed is greater E71340
than 30 km/h.
Setting the Cruise Speed
USING CRUISE CONTROL 1. Drive to desired speed.

2. Press SET+ or SET-.
WARNINGS 3. Take your foot off the accelerator
Do not use cruise control on winding pedal.
roads, in heavy traffic or when the Note: The indicator changes color.
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious Changing the Set Speed
injury or death.
• Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
When you are going downhill, your speed in small increments.
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not • Press the accelerator or brake pedal
apply the brakes. until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h the control when you reach the desired
below the set speed when driving uphill. speed.
To help the system to maintain the set Canceling the Set Speed
speed when going downhill, downshift to
a lower gear. Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed

Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off

Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press the cruise control button when the
system is in standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
E201284
The cruise controls are on the steering

wheel.
144
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE WARNINGS

CONTROL Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
changing road conditions when using drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
adaptive cruise control. The system at all times.
does not replace attentive driving. Failing The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
to pay attention to the road may result in maintain the set gap between you and the
a crash, serious injury or death. vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise You can select four gap settings.
control when entering or leaving a The system uses a radar sensor that
highway, on roads with intersections projects a beam directly in front of your
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or vehicle.
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarket trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
E248386
which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those The adaptive cruise controls are on the
recommended because this can steering wheel.
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
of vehicle control, which could result in On
serious injury. Press CAN/OFF.
Adaptive cruise control may not The indicator, current gap setting
detect stationary or slow moving and set speed appear in the
vehicles below 10 km/h. E144529
information display.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
145
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
E164805 intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed crash, serious injury or death.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is Adaptive cruise control only warns
active, the speedometer may vary slightly of vehicles detected by the radar
from the set speed displayed in the sensor. In some cases there may be
information display. no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
1. Drive to desired speed. necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
2. Press SET-. crash, serious injury or death.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in Note: When you are following a vehicle and
the information display. you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
4. Take your foot off the accelerator temporary acceleration to help you pass.
pedal.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
E164805 Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you. • The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below
20 km/h.
• You set a new gap distance.
146
The system applies the brakes to slow your

vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
E248383
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: The gap setting is time dependent A Gap decrease.
and therefore the distance adjusts with your B Gap increase.
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the

information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

Set speed Graphic display, bars Time gap, seconds Gap
indicated between
km/h vehicles m
100 1 0.8 28
100 2 1.2 39
100 3 1.6 50
100 4 2.1 61
Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting.
147
Overriding the Set Speed Press RES+. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
WARNING The set speed displays continuously in the
If you override the system by pressing information display when the system is
the accelerator pedal, it does not active.
automatically apply the brakes to
Automatic Cancellation
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
When you press the accelerator pedal, you audible warning sounds and a message
override the set speed and gap distance. appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.
When you override the system,
the green indicator light The system does not operate below
E144529
illuminates and the vehicle 20 km/h.
image does not appear in the information Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
display.
• The tires lose traction.
The system resumes operation when you
• The engine speed is too low.
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a • You apply the parking brake.
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Hilly Condition Usage
Changing the Set Speed Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
• Press RES+ or SET- to change the set an extended period of time. This allows the
speed in small increments. brakes to cool. The system functions
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal normally again after the brakes cool.
until you reach the desired speed. Press
Select a lower gear when the system is
and release RES+ or SET-.
active in situations such as prolonged
• Press and hold RES+ or SET- to downhill driving on steep grades, for
change the set speed in large example in mountainous areas. The
increments. Release the control when system needs additional engine braking in
you reach the desired speed. these situations to reduce the load on the
The system may apply the brakes to slow vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set it from overheating.
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
active. Off
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
Canceling the Set Speed setting when you switch the system off.
Press CAN/OFF or tap the brake pedal. Press CAN/OFF when the system is in
The set speed does not erase. standby mode, or switch the ignition off.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
148
Detection Issues
WARNINGS
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.

It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:

A When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
B With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
C There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases, the system may brake late

or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
149
System Not Available Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is

behind a fascia panel.
The system may not turn on if there is:
A message displays if something obstructs
• A blocked sensor. the radar signals from the sensor. The
• High brake temperature. sensor is in the lower grille. The system
• A failure in the system or a related cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
system. not function when something blocks the
sensor.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

Cause Action
The surface of the radar is dirty or Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
obstructed. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is clean but the Wait a short time. It may take several
message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the Do not use the system in these conditions
road may interfere with the radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
150
Switching to Normal Cruise

Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise

control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340 control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
151
Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER (If Equipped) D Set speed decrease.

E Set speed increase.
Principle of Operation
WARNING Switching the System On and Off
When you are going downhill, your Press switch B. The information display
vehicle speed may increase above prompts you to set a speed.
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays. Setting the Speed Limiter
Failure to follow this warning could result
Use the cruise control switches to adjust
in serious personal injury or death.
the maximum speed setting.
The system allows you to set a speed to Press switch E or D to select your desired
which your vehicle becomes limited. The speed limit. The set speed is stored and
set speed sets the effective maximum appears in the information display.
speed of your vehicle. You can temporarily Press switch C to cancel the limiter and
exceed the set speed if required, for place it in standby mode. The information
example to overtake. display confirms the system is in standby
mode by displaying the set speed limit as
Using the System crossed out.
Note: If you briefly press the accelerator, Press switch A to resume the limiter. The
for example when overtaking another information display confirms this has been
vehicle, the system temporarily turns off. turned on by showing the set speed again.
The system is operated by the controls Intentionally Exceeding the Speed
mounted on the steering wheel. Limiter Set Speed
Depress the accelerator fully to temporarily
turn the system off. The speed limiter set
speed resumes when your vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit.
A E System Warnings
B If you unintentionally exceed the set speed,
a warning appears in the information
display and a tone sounds.
C D If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
E200786 a warning appears in the information
display.
A Resume.
B On and off.
C Cancel.
152
Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped) Note: The system assists you when driving
on fast main roads and freeways.
Principle of Operation Note: The system calculates an alertness
level at vehicle speeds above approximately
WARNINGS 65 km/h.
The system is designed to aid the The system automatically monitors your
driver. It is not intended to replace driving behavior.
still responsible to drive with due care and The system is designed to alert you if it
attention. detects that you are becoming drowsy or
if your driving deteriorates.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising Using Driver Alert
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in Switching the System On and Off
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death. Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
The system may not function if the 68).
sensor is blocked.
Note: The system remains on or off
Take regular rest breaks if you feel depending on how it was last set.
tired. Do not wait for the system to
The system calculates your alertness level
warn you.
based upon your driving behavior in relation
Certain driving styles may result in to the lane markings and other factors.
the system warning you even if you
are not feeling tired. System Warnings
In cold and severe weather Note: The system does not warn you if the
conditions the system may not vehicle speed falls below approximately
function. Rain, snow and spray can 65 km/h.
all limit sensor performance.
The warning system has two stages:
The system will not operate if the 1. A temporary warning is issued to advise
sensor cannot track the road lane you to take a rest. This message only
markings. appears for a short time.
If damage occurs in the immediate 2. If you do not rest and the system
area surrounding the sensor, have continues to detect that your driving
your vehicle checked as soon as deteriorates, it issues a further warning.
possible. This remains in the information display
The system may not correctly until you cancel it. See Information
operate if your vehicle is fitted with Messages (page 77).
a suspension kit not approved by us. Press OK on the steering wheel control to
remove the warning.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions for example bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
153
Driving Aids
System Display Resetting the System

When active the system runs automatically You can reset the system by:
in the background and only issue warnings • Switching the ignition off and on.
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See • Stopping your vehicle and then opening
General Information (page 68). and closing the driver door.
The alertness level is shown by six steps
as a colored bar. LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
still responsible to drive with due care and
E131358
attention.
Alertness level is fine, no rest required. Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
E131359 the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
Alertness level is critical, indicating that
you should take a rest as soon as it is safe In cold and severe weather
to do so. conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can
The status bar travels from left to right as
all limit sensor performance.
the calculated alertness level decreases.
As the rest icon is approached, the color The system will not operate if the
turns from green to yellow and then finally sensor cannot track the road lane
red when a rest break must be taken. markings.
• Green: No rest required. The sensor may incorrectly track lane
• Yellow: First (temporary) warning. markings as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or
• Red: Second warning. missed warning.
Your alertness level will be shown in gray Large contrasts in outside lighting
if: can limit sensor performance.
• The sensor cannot track the road lane
markings. The system may not operate
properly if the sensor is blocked.
• The vehicle speed falls below Keep the windshield free from
approximately 65 km/h. obstruction.
154
Driving Aids
WARNINGS System Settings

If damage occurs in the immediate The system has optional setting menus
area surrounding the sensor, have available. The system stores the
your vehicle checked as soon as last-known selection for each of these
possible. settings. You do not need to readjust your
settings each time you turn on the system.
The sensor is located near the rear view Mode: This setting allows you to select
mirror. which of the system features you can
Note: The system works above 64 km/h. enable.
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
E165515
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
instrument cluster display when the front vibration when the system detects an
camera detects an unintentional drift out unintended lane departure.
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of E165516
the system.
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
Press the button on the steering torque input toward the lane center when
wheel stalk to switch the system the system detects an unintended lane
E144813
on or off. departure.
155
Driving Aids
System Display
E165517
E151660
A Alert
B Aid When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance markings will display in the information
steering torque input toward the lane display. If you select aid mode when you
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out switch on the system, a separate white
of the lane, the system provides a steering icon will also appear or in some vehicles
wheel vibration. arrows will display with the lane markings.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate When you switch off the system, the lane
general zone coverage. They do not provide marking graphics will not display.
exact zone parameters. While the system is on, the color of the
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity lane markings will change to indicate the
of the steering wheel vibration used for the system status.
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting Gray: Indicates that the system is
does not affect the aid mode. temporarily unable to provide a warning
• Low or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• Normal
• High • Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
156
Driving Aids
• The road has no or poor lane markings Yellow: Indicates that the system is
in the camera field-of-view. providing or has just provided a lane
• The camera is obscured or unable to keeping aid intervention.
detect the lane markings due to Red: Indicates that the system is providing
environmental conditions (significant or has just provided a lane keeping alert
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain warning.
or fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or The system can be temporarily suppressed
shadowing the lane), or vehicle at any time by the following:
conditions (poor headlamp • Quick braking.
illumination). • Fast acceleration.
See Troubleshooting for additional • Using the turn signal indicator.
information.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
157
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Lane width too narrow or too wide

Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds

Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
• Low power steering fluid may cause

STEERING heavy or uneven steering efforts. Check
to see if your power steering fluid level
Hydraulic Power Steering is low before seeking service by your
dealer.
To help prevent damage to the power • Do not fill the power steering pump
steering system: reservoir above the MAX mark on the
• Never hold the steering wheel at its reservoir, as this may result in leaks
furthest turning points (until it stops) from the reservoir.
for more than three to five seconds If the power steering system breaks down
when the engine is running. (or if the engine is turned off), you can
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
power steering pump fluid level (below more effort.
the MIN mark on the reservoir).
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Some noise is normal during operation.
• An improperly inflated tire.
If excessive, check to see if your power
steering fluid level is low. • Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
158
Driving Aids
If you service or replace any steering Extreme continuous steering may increase
components, install new fasteners (you the effort required for you to steer your
may not re-use fasteners coated with vehicle. This increased effort prevents
thread adhesive or have prevailing torque overheating and permanent damage to
features). Never re-use a bolt or nut. the steering system. You do not lose the
Torque fasteners to specifications. ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
allow the system to cool and return to
may also make the steering seem to
normal operation.
wander or pull.
Steering Tips
Electric Power Steering (If Equipped)
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
WARNINGS
• Correct tire pressures.
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that • Uneven tire wear.
continuously monitor the system. If • Loose or worn suspension
a fault is detected, a message displays in components.
the information display. Stop your vehicle • Loose or worn steering components.
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
• Improper vehicle alignment.
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the Note: A high crown in the road or high
information display for a steering system crosswinds may also make the steering
warning message. If a steering system seem to wander or pull.
warning message returns, have the system
checked as soon as possible. Adaptive Learning
If the system detects an error, you The electronic power steering system
may not feel a difference in the adaptive learning helps correct road
steering, however a serious condition irregularities and improves overall handling
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as and steering feel. It communicates with
soon as possible, failure to do so may the brake system to help operate
result in loss of steering control. advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
Your vehicle has an electric power steering the battery is disconnected or a new
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No battery installed, you must drive your
maintenance is required. vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
If your vehicle loses electrical power while systems.
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
159
Driving Aids
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If When your vehicle rapidly approaches

another vehicle, a red light bar flashes in
Equipped) the windscreen (refer to image), a warning
lamp with the words "Pre-collision Assist"
WARNINGS is displayed in the instrument cluster and
This system is an extra driving aid. It a tone sounds.
does not replace your attention and The brake support system assists you in
judgment, or the need to apply the reducing any collision speed by
brakes. This system does NOT pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail collision continues to increase after the
to press the brake pedal when necessary, audio-visual warning, the brake support
you may collide with another vehicle. prepares the brake system for rapid
The Pre-Collision Assist system with braking. The system does not
brake support cannot help prevent automatically activate the brakes, but can
all collisions. Do not rely on this provide supplementary braking power if
system to replace your judgment and the the brake pedal is pressed even lightly.
need to maintain correct distance and
speed. Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
Note: The system does not detect, warn or WARNING
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
The pre-collision assist system's
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
brake support reduces collision
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system is speed only if you brake your vehicle
active at speeds above approximately before any collision. You must press your
5 km/h. brake pedal as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Note: When possible, the manufacturer

E156130
recommends using the highest sensitivity
The system alerts you of certain collision setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
risks. The system's sensor detects your reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles sensitivity causes fewer and later system
traveling in the same direction as your warnings. See General Information (page
vehicle. 68).
You can adjust the warning system's
sensitivity through your information
display. See General Information (page
68).
E156131
160
Driving Aids
Distance Alert Distance Indication

If the system detects that your vehicle is Distance indication is a function that
too close to the vehicle in front based on provides a graphical indication of the time
the current sensitivity setting (see gap to other vehicles traveling in the same
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings direction.
section below) the center section of the
red light bar in the windscreen will
illuminate (refer to image).
E190004
Note: Distance Alert and Distance

Indication deactivates when adaptive cruise
control is active. The distance indication
graphics do not display in the information
display unless adaptive cruise control is OFF.
E184570
Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap

100 km/h Normal Grey >25m >0.9sec
between
between 17m and
100 km/h Normal Yellow 0.6sec and
25m
0.9sec
100 km/h Normal Red <17m <0.6sec
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings

You can adjust the Pre-Collision Assist and
Distance Alert sensitivity to one of three
possible settings by using the information
display control. See General Information
(page 68).
You can switch the distance alert and
indication function off using the
information display controls. See General
Information (page 68).
161
Driving Aids
Blocked Sensors If a blocked sensor message appears in the

information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the pre-collision assist
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.
E223376
Cause Action
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
or obstructed obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is Wait a short time. The radar may take
clean but the message remains in the several minutes to reset after you remove
display the obstruction
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
interferes with the radar signals arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
surface interferes with the radar signals arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

System Limitations
• Severe weather conditions (see
Due to the nature of radar technology, blocked sensor section).
there may be certain instances where
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
headlamps (see blocked sensor
These include:
section).
• Stationary vehicles or slow moving • Small distance to vehicle ahead.
vehicles.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway. movements (very active driving style).
162
Driving Aids
Damage to the front end of your vehicle

may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
163
Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

To service the roller shutter, see an
WARNINGS authorized dealer.
Use load securing straps to an
approved standard, e.g. DIN. Note: You must secure the loads carried in
Make sure that you secure all loose the loadspace.
items properly. Note: Use the pull strap to close the roller
shutter.
Place luggage and other loads as low
and as far forward as possible within Note: Make sure that the roller shutter is
the luggage or loadspace. free of any obstruction before you open or
close it. For example; snow or ice.
Do not exceed the maximum front
and rear axle loads for your vehicle. Note: Water and dust may enter the
loadspace with the roller shutter closed.
Do not exceed the maximum gross
vehicle weight. See Vehicle Operation
Identification Plate (page 275).
The roller shutter has four locking
Do not place solid objects outside positions:
the loadspace area for example
timber and sheet material. 1. Fully closed.
2. 1/3 open.
Note: The center of the payload should be 3. 2/3 open.
located within the wheelbase of the vehicle.
4. Fully open.
Note: Avoid one sided load distribution. Note: The locking mechanism does not lock
Note: Uneven load distribution could result automatically as it passes each locking
in unacceptable handling and braking position.
characteristics.
Locking and unlocking into
position
LUGGAGE COVERS (If Equipped)
Note: You will hear a click as the roller
WARNINGS shutter passes each locking position.
Do not move your vehicle with Note: Use the pull strap to control the roller
people or animals in the loadspace. shutter movement while opening.
Do not use the roller shutter pull Lock the roller shutter at the required
strap to secure loads. locking position by pulling the pull strap to
the left.
Do not sit, stand or place anything
on the roller shutter.
164
Load Carrying
E154609
Unlock the roller shutter by pulling the pull

strap to the right or by pressing the lock
buttons.
165
Load Carrying
E154610
WARNINGS
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD Do not exceed the maximum
CARRIERS (If Equipped) permissible roof rail load of 80 kg,
including the roof rack.
WARNINGS
If you use a roof rack, the fuel Check the security of the roof rack load:
consumption of your vehicle will be • Before starting.
higher and you may experience
• After driving 50 km.
different driving characteristics.
• At 1,000 km intervals.
Read and follow the manufacturers
instructions when you are fitting a
roof rack.
166
Load Carrying
A B C
E131684
WARNINGS
A Roof Rail.
B Sports bar. Each tie down point has a maximum
load rating. Exceeding this may lead
C Box rail. to serious injury and vehicle damage.
Always inspect the tie down points
Note: Do not sit or stand on items B or C.
before use.
Note: Do not use item C to secure loads.
Note: To reduce fuel consumption, roof Note: The number of tie down points may
rack cross bars and accessories should be vary depending on your vehicle model.
removed when not in use.
Type 1
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES (If WARNING
Equipped) Do not exceed the load rating for the
tie down points.
Tie Down Points
WARNINGS
Use the tie down points only for
restraining the loads within the
loadspace. Using tie down points for
any other purpose may lead to serious
injury or vehicle damage. Do not use the
tie down points for towing.
167
Load Carrying
E131643 E133896
Load Rating of Type 1 Tie Down Points:

300 kg. A
Type 2
WARNING
Do not exceed the load rating for the B
tie down points.
C
D
E134098
A Cleat.
B Bezel.
C Spring.
E133894
D Pin.
Load Rating of Type 2 Tie Down Points: Do not use the tie down points under the
200 kg. following conditions:
Type 3 • Any sign of wear or damage.
• Rail channels supporting the tie down
WARNING
points show any sign of wear, damage
Do not exceed the load rating for the or distortion.
tie down points.
168
Load Carrying
• Locking bezel is damaged or broken or 1. Engage the base of the tie down point
will not lock into place. into the rail channel while holding the
• Not seated correctly within the support cleat vertically.
rail. 2. Slide along the rail until the pin on the
Load Rating of Type 3 Tie Down Points base of the tie down engages in a
(Rope Hook): 250 kg. desired hole on the rail.
3. Push the tie down in and rotate a
Fitting the Type 3 Tie Down Points quarter turn clockwise until the tie
down cleat is horizontal and the locking
WARNING bezel “snaps” into place.
Bezel must be fully engage into the
rail to secure the tie down point for Removing the Type 3 Tie Down Points
safe use. The word ‘Not Locked’ will 1. Grasp the locking bezel between the
be visible in the incorrectly installed tie thumb and fingers using the finger
downs. recess.
2. Pull the bezel away from the rail until
the base of the tie down point is fully
disengaged from the rail channel.
3. Turn the tie down point a quarter turn
anticlockwise until it snaps out of the
2 rail.
Load Rest
WARNINGS
1 A loaded load rest alters the vehicle's
center of gravity and aerodynamics.
Take care when cornering, driving in
crosswinds and at high speeds.
Do not exceed the permissible gross
weight. See Vehicle Identification
Plate (page 275).
E134099
169
Load Carrying
3
E131682 E135868
Note: Secure luggage or cargo placed on 1. Raise the tailgate slightly.

the load rest with the load rest stoppers. 2. Pull the support cable rearwards.
3. Release the support cable from
TAILGATE tailgate.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to pull out the
WARNINGS support cable on the other side.
Do not exceed the maximum Note: Lower the tailgate for better ingress
permissible tailgate load of 220 kg. or egress of the loads.
Vehicles fitted with a tow bar or rear
bumper should not have the tailgate
lowered without the support cables
in place.
Make sure that you keep a firm grip
of the tailgate to prevent it from
dropping down.
Lowering the Tailgate

WARNINGS
Do not lower the tailgate if a load
bed extension is fitted.
Maximum permissible load for a
tailgate with load bed extension is
50 kg.
170
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER • Reduce the stipulated maximum

permitted gross combination mass by
WARNINGS 10% for every additional 1,000 m in
high altitude regions above 1,000 m.
Do not exceed 100 km/h. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in • Use a low gear when descending a
the loss of control of your vehicle, steep downhill gradient.
personal injury or death. The stability of your vehicle to trailer
Do not exceed the maximum gross combination is very much dependent on
combination mass stated on the the quality of the trailer.
vehicle identification plate. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
personal injury.
Equipped)
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible nose weight, e.g. vertical
Note: The system automatically turns on
weight on the tow ball. Failure to
every time you switch the ignition on.
adhere to this warning could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury Note: Switching off the stability control will
or death. turn off the system.
Do not exceed the maximum front Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
and rear axle loads for your vehicle. sway, but reduces it once it begins.
The anti-lock brake system does not Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
control the trailer brakes. from swaying.
Trailer sway control is an enhanced feature
Note: Vehicles equipped with electronic of stability control system and
stability program (ESP) have trailer stability automatically detects when an attached
control included. trailer starts to sway. This feature applies
your vehicle brakes at individual wheels
When towing a trailer: and if necessary, reduces engine power. If
• Obey country specific regulations for the trailer begins to sway, slow your vehicle
towing a trailer. down, pull safely to the side of the road
and check for correct load distribution.
• Do not exceed 100 km/h even if a See Towing a Trailer (page 171).
country allows higher speeds under
certain conditions. Note: Shifting to 4x4 Low will deactivate
trailer sway control.
• Place loads as low as possible and
central to the axle of your trailer. For Note: Switching on the electronic locking
best stability of the trailer in an unladen differential will turn off the system.
vehicle, place the load in the trailer Note: To switch off the trailer sway control
towards the nose within the maximum as required, See Stability Control (page
nose load as this gives the best 134).
stability. See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 171).
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
171
Towing
Towing Capacities - For Base Series

WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds
the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Variant Drive Transmis- Without Trailer With Trailer Max. Gross

sion Brake Brake Train Weight
2.5L 4X2 Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,425 kg

Gasoline
4x2
* Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,525 kg
Drive ratio
5.3
4x2
* Manual 750 kg 1,100 kg 4,125 kg
Drive ratio
4.7
4x4 Manual 750 kg 1,100 kg 4,125 kg
2.2L Diesel 4X2 Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,425 kg
88kW
4x4 Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,525 kg
2.2L Diesel 4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,525 kg
92kW 4x4
2.2L Diesel 4x2 Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,425 kg
110kW
118kW 4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,700 kg
4x4
3.2L Diesel 4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 1,500 kg 4,700 kg
4x4
172
Towing
Towing capacities- For all other series

2.5L 4X2 Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 5,125 kg

Gasoline
4x2
* Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 4,900 kg
Drive ratio
5.3 FDR
4x2
* Manual 750 kg 2,000 kg 4,300 kg
Drive ratio
4.7 FDR
4x4 Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 4,300 kg
2.2L Diesel 4X2 Manual 750 kg 2,000 kg 5,125 kg
88kW &
92kW 4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 4,800 kg
4x4
2.2L Diesel 4x2 Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 5,425 kg
110kW
4x2
* Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 5,000 kg
Drive ratio
3.31/3.15
4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 3,500 kg 6,000 kg
4x4
Drive ratio
3.55
4x2 and
* Auto 750 kg 3,500 kg 6,000 kg
4x4
3.2L Diesel 4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 2,500 kg 5,000 kg
4x4
Drive ratio
3.31/3.15
4x2 and
* Manual 750 kg 3,500 kg 6,000 kg
4x4
Drive ratio
3.55
173
Towing

4x2 and
* Auto 750 kg 3,500 kg 6,000 kg
4x4
2.2L Diesel SWB All No Towing No Towing No Towing
/ 3.2L Chassis
Diesel Cab
*
Vehicles with increased ride height
Trailer Nose Weight

WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight, e.g. vertical weight on the
tow ball. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in loss of vehicle control,
Drive Minimum Nose Weight Maximum Nose Weight
4x2 6% of the towed weight 165 kg

*
4x2 and 4x4 225 kg
*
174
Towing
TOW BALL Removing the tow ball arm
WARNINGS
Always place the tow ball arm in a
secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile in a
crash. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the 2
trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer
hitch could reduce the hitch rating. 3
E137326
1
Note: Take special care when fitting the
tow ball arm as the safety of the vehicle and 1. Push the lever towards the centre of
trailer depends on this. the vehicle.
Note: Do not disassemble or repair the tow 2. Turn the lever anti-clockwise to unlock
ball arm. the tow ball arm.
3. Remove the tow ball arm.
Type 1
Inserting the tow ball arm Type 2
E137325
E139242
Note: Make sure that the tow ball arm is 1. Tighten the bolts to 218 Nm
fully engaged in the seat.
Note: A trailer socket and the tow ball arm
seat are provided underneath the rear
bumper.
1. Insert the tow ball arm in to the seat.
2. Turn the trailer socket down through
90 degrees until it engages in the
correct position.
175
Towing
Type 3
2
1
E222101
E207959 Remove the tow coupling anti-rattle pinch

bolt (1) by loosening the pinch bolt lock
1. Insert the tow ball arm into the tow bar. nut (2).
2. Insert the pin.
Driving without a trailer
3. Secure the pin in place with the clip.
Note: Remove the tow ball arm from the
Driving with a trailer vehicle when not in use.
Note: If any of the below conditions cannot Note: Remove adapters from the tow bar
be met, do not use the tow bar and have it electrical socket when not in use, failure to
checked by an authorized dealer. do so may result in corrosion of the socket.
Note: Never unlock the tow ball arm with 1. Remove the tow ball arm from the
the trailer attached. vehicle and keep it securely fastened
inside the luggage compartment.
Before starting your journey
• Confirm that the tow ball arm is Maintenance
correctly engaged and locked in place.
Keep the system clean.
• Install the plug (if equipped) into its
seat. Clean the tow bar electrical socket
regularly.
Anti-rattle pinch bolt removal (If Periodically lubricate the tow ball
equipped) mechanism with resin-free grease or oil
Note: Tow coupling anti-rattle pinch bolt and the lock with graphite.
should be removed from tow bar when
towing. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
Note: When not towing, the anti-rattle FOUR WHEELS
pinch bolt should be replaced, and lock nut
tightened. Tightening torque must not All Vehicles
exceed 47 Nm.
WARNINGS
Switch the ignition on when towing
the vehicle.
176
Towing
WARNINGS WARNINGS
The brake and steering assistance Do not tow your vehicle if the
will not operate unless the engine is ambient temperature is below 0°C.
running. Press the brake pedal harder
and allow for increased stopping distances
and heavier steering.
Too much tension in the tow rope
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
Do not use a rigid tow bar on the
front towing eye.
When towing your vehicle you must
select neutral.
Do not tow the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground while in 4WD
mode. Tow your vehicle with all
wheels off the ground or all wheels on the
ground while the vehicle is in 2WD mode
in an event of a breakdown or mechanical
failure of the transmission.
Drive off slowly and smoothly without

jerking the vehicle you are towing.
Vehicles With Automatic

Transmission
WARNINGS
If a speed of 20 km/h and a distance
of 20 km is to be exceeded the drive
wheels must be lifted clear of the
ground.
It is recommended not to tow with
the drive wheels on the ground.
However, if it is required to move your
vehicle from a dangerous location, do not
tow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h or
further than 20 km.
Do not tow your vehicle backward.
In the event of a mechanical failure

of the transmission the drive wheels
must be lifted clear of the ground.
177
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN If the needle in the engine coolant

temperature gauge moves to the upper
Tires limit position, the engine is overheating.
See Gauges (page 60).
New tires need to be run-in for If the engine temperature continues to rise,
approximately 500 km. During this time, the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.
you may experience different driving The air conditioning will also turn off and
characteristics. the engine cooling fan will operate.
Brakes and Clutch When this happens, immediately:
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch • Stop your vehicle as soon as possible.
if possible for the first 150 km in town and • Turn off the engine to prevent severe
for the first 1,500 km on freeways. engine damage.
Engine • Wait for the engine to cool down.
• Check the coolant level. See Engine
Avoid driving too fast during the first Coolant Check (page 229).
1,500 km. Vary your speed frequently and
• Have the vehicle checked by an
change up through the gears early. Do not
authorized dealer.
labor the engine.
Vehicles With a Diesel Engine COLD WEATHER

During the first 3,000 km, you may notice PRECAUTIONS
a ticking sound when your vehicle slows
down. This is due to adjustments of your The functional operation of some
new diesel engine and is normal. components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -25°C.
REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING WARNINGS
Drive through water in an emergency
Continued operation of an
only and not as part of normal
overheating engine will increase the
driving.
temperature further, and cause the
engine to shut down completely. Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Drive the overheating engine only for a brief
amount of time to prevent permanent Note: For Chassis Cab vehicles or where a
damage. The engine will continue to 3rd party tray has been fitted, confirm the
operate with limited power. The distance installation is in line with the Ford Body
you can travel depends on ambient Builders Guide. This ensures fuel tank
temperature, vehicle load, and terrain. breathers and drive line breathers are
located above the specified water wading
lines.
178
Driving Hints
In an emergency, you can drive your vehicle • Depress the brake pedal lightly to
through water to a maximum depth as check that the brakes are functioning
shown and at a maximum speed of 7 km/h. correctly.
You must take extra care when driving • Check that the horn works.
through flowing water.
• Check that your vehicle's lamps are
4x2 fully operational.
• Check the power assistance of the
steering system.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
X
Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
E137140 loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
X 600mm (23.6 inches) Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
4x2 (Vehicles with Increased Ride increase the risk of serious personal
Height) and 4x4 injury.
Secure the floor mat to both
retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
Y vehicle, personal injury or death.
Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
E137139 this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
Y 800mm (31.5 inches) death.
Always make sure that objects
When driving in water, maintain a low cannot fall into the driver foot well
speed and do not stop your vehicle. After while your vehicle is moving. Objects
driving through water and as soon as it is that are loose can become trapped under
safe to do so: the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
179
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor

mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
180
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHERS Note: Make sure you regularly check the

expiration date on the fire extinguisher.
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is WARNING TRIANGLE (If Equipped)
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
Single cab
restart your vehicle. You can secure the warning triangle behind
The flasher control is on the the passenger seat.
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
In accordance with CONTRAN Resolution
556 of September 17th, 2015 a fire
extinguisher is optional equipment. If you
choose to have a fire extinguisher fitted, it
must be installed by an Authorized Dealer
below the instrument panel, in front of the
E131837
passenger seat. If you want to use the fire
extinguisher, you must monthly inspect it
visually to make sure its gauge and 1. Fold the seatback forward.
structure are not damaged, the trigger is Super cab
in good operating condition and that there
is no obstruction at the nozzle. You can secure the warning triangle in the
The operating instructions are on the fire tool bin below the rear seats.
extinguisher. Maintenance of the fire
extinguisher is the responsibility of the
owner. Therefore the owner should carry
out the maintenance according to the
manufacturer instructions printed on the
equipment.
Before you use the fire extinguisher, make
sure you remove the transparent plastic
packaging used for the transportation of
the fire extinguisher to prevent obstruction.
181
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the fuel system checked.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle

after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
E131838
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
2. Remove the cover (if equipped).
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
Double cab fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
E131839
system:
1. Fold the rear seatback forward. 1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
182
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
by pressing the brake pedal and of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
START/STOP, or press START/STOP two vehicles do not touch.
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
Connecting the Jumper Cables
steps 1 through 4. WARNINGS
Do not connect the end of the
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
WARNINGS A spark may cause an explosion of the
Batteries normally produce explosive gases that surround the battery.
gases which can cause personal Do not use fuel lines, engine valve
injury. Therefore, do not allow covers, windshield wiper arms, the
flames, sparks or lighted substances to intake manifold, or hood latch as
come near the battery. When working near ground points.
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
1
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
3 4
Preparing Your Vehicle
2
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
E142664
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system. Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
183
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
to the positive (+) terminal of the started, run both vehicle engines for an
discharged battery. additional three minutes before
2. Connect the other end of the positive disconnecting the jumper cables.
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
Removing the Jumper Cables
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
negative (-) terminal of the booster order that they were connected.
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine, 4
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
1
2
3
E205764
E142665
Note: You can use the optional connection
point location shown above to ground your 1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
vehicle. from the disabled vehicle.
Jump Starting 2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle vehicle battery.
and rev the engine moderately, or press 3. Remove the jumper cable from the
the accelerator gently to keep your positive (+) terminal of the booster
engine speed between 2000 and 3000 vehicle battery.
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
184
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one We produce a towing manual for all
minute. authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE your vehicle.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Note: Depending on your vehicle, some
towing points may be optional.
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a

professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and E271922
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your

vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do A Front towing eye.
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure. B Rear towing eye.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
185
Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Pre-fuse Box (If Equipped)
Left-Hand Drive
A B C E
E206154
D
E206156
Right-Hand Drive
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box located in
A B C E the engine compartment attached to the
positive battery post. This box contains
several high current fuses. If replacement
of these high current fuses is required, see
an authorized dealer.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box

(Vehicles with Hydraulic Power
E206153
D Assist Steering)
A Pre-fuse box (if equipped).

B Engine compartment fuse box
(vehicles with Hydraulic Power
Assist Steering) / Engine
compartment fuse box
(vehicles with Electronic Power
Assist Steering).
C Passenger compartment fuse
box.
D High current fuse box (below E133079
the engine compartment fuse
box) (if equipped). WARNING
E Auxiliary fuse box (if equipped). To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
186
Fuses
Open the fuse box cover to access the High Current Fuse Box
fuses.
Engine Compartment Fuse

(Vehicles with Electronic Power
Assist Steering)
E206158
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box located in

the engine compartment below the engine
compartment fuse box. This box contains
E206157 several high current fuses. If replacement
of these high current fuses is required, see
WARNINGS an authorized dealer.
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
To reduce risk of electrical shock,

reservoirs.
The engine compartment fuse box has

high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
When you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 231).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
E206167
The fuse box is located behind the access

cover on the outboard side of the steering
column.
187
Fuses
Auxiliary Fuse Box Release the catches and remove the cover.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

- VEHICLES WITH: HYDRAULIC
POWER ASSIST STEERING
(HPAS)
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
E174325
reservoirs.

high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads. When you disconnect and
reconnect the battery, you will need to
reset some features. See Changing the
E173837 12V Battery (page 231). Lift the release
levers at the rear of the cover to remove it.
188
Fuses
E133601
Fuse Fuse Amp Protected Components

Rating
1 2 Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery).

60A
2 2 Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery).
60A
3 (Petrol) 2 Engine cooling fan.
50A
3 (Diesel) 2 Glow plug control module.
60A
4 2 Anti-lock brake system module.
40A
5 2 Power windows (front and rear).
30A
6 - Not used.
189
Fuses

Rating
7 - Not used.
8 - Not used.
9 2 Power seats.
20A
10 2 Auxiliary power socket instrument panel, console top.
20A
11 2 Blower motor.
30A
12 2 Four wheel drive (4WD) motor power.
25A
13 2 Starter solenoid.
20A
14 2 Heated rear window.
20A
15 (Petrol) 1 Flex-fuel pump.
10A
15 (Diesel) 1 Vaporizer glow plug.
15A
16 1 Air conditioning clutch.
10A
17 2 Power windows (front).
25A
18 1 Windscreen wiper motor.
25A
19 - Not used.
20 1 Cigar lighter.
20A
21 1 Horn.
15A
22 1 Fuel injectors, flex-fuel valve.
10A
23 1 Differential lock solenoid.
10A
24 - Not used.
25 1 Ignition coils, temperature and mass air flow sensor, glow
15A
plug module, vacuum control valve (VCV), electronic
vacuum regulator valve (EVRV).
26 1 Electronic control module (ECM).
7.5A
190
Fuses

Rating
27 1 Transmission control module (TCM).

10A
28 1 Heated exhaust gas oxygen, universal heated exhaust gas
10A
oxygen-sensor, relay coils.
29 1 Electronic control module (ECM).
15A
30 1 Battery monitoring sensor.
5A
31 1 Auxiliary power socket (rear console).
20A
32 1 Air conditioning pressure switch.
5A
33 1 Transmission control module (TCM).
10A
34 1 Crew chief module, Spare.
5A
35 1 Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Ignition).
20A
5A
37 1 Headlamp leveling.
10A
38 - Not used.
39 1 Power mirrors.
10A
40 1 Vapourizer pump.
10A
41 1 Heated mirrors.
10A
42 1 Alarm horn.
10A
43 - Not used.
44 - Not used.
25A
46 1 Battery isolator.
20A
47 2 Trailer tow module.
40A
191
Fuses

Rating
48 - Not used.
49 - Not used.
50 1 Ignition relay, relay coils.
5A
51 2 Trailer Tow (12/13pin Batt feed / Permanent Live.
20A
1 Mini fuse.
2 J-case fuse.
Relay Number Protected Components
R1 Key interlock.
R2 Wiper on or off.
R3 Horn.
R4 Air conditioning clutch.
R5 Differential lock.
R6 Wiper Hi or Lo.
R7 Engine cooling fan low.
R8 Engine cooling fan high.
R9 Flex-fuel pump, vaporizer glow plug.
R10 Heated rear window.
R11 Not used.
R12 Not used.
R13 Electronic control module (ECM) power
hold.
R14 Ignition.
R15 4WD motor 2 (clockwise).
R16 4WD motor 1 (counter clockwise).
R17 4WD motor.
R18 Security horn.
192
Fuses
R19 Starter.
R20 Not used.
R21 Not used.
R22 Not used.
R23 Not used.
R24 Not used.
R25 Not used.
R26 Blower motor.
R27 Power seat.
193
Fuses
E133602
194
Fuses

Rating
56 1 Fuel pump.
20A
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 1 Passive anti-theft system (PATS).

5A
Interior lamp, driver's door switch pack, mood lights,
60 10A
1
puddle lights, automatic shifter, footwell lamp.
61 - Not used.
62 1 Rain sensor module.

5A
63 - Not used.
64 - Not used.
65 - Not used.
66 1 Driver's door unlock, central double locking.

20A
67 1 Stop lamp switch.

5A
68 - Not used.
Instrument cluster, integrated control module (ICP),
69 5A
1
tracking and blocking module.
70 1 Central locking.
20A
71 1 Air conditioning.
5A
72 1 Alarm horn.
7.5A
73 1 On-board diagnostics II.

5A
74 1 Main beam.
20A
75 1 Front fog lamps.

15A
76 1 Reversing lamp, rear view mirror.

10A
195
Fuses

Rating
77 1 Washer pump.
20A
78 1 Ignition switch.
5A
79 1 Audio signal DIN, FSAO audio, multi-function display.

15A
80 1 Multi-function display, Hi audio, bluetooth audio.

20A
81 1 Interior motion sensor.

5A
82 1 Washer pump ground.

20A
83 1 Central locking ground.

20A
84 1 Driver's door unlock, central double locking ground.

20A
Instrument cluster, parking aid module, rear view camera,
85 7.5A
1
manual air conditioning, rear view mirror, tracking and
blocking module.
86 1 Restraint system, passenger air-bag deactivation indicator.

10A
87 1 Tachograph.
7.5A
88 - Not used.
89 - Not used.
1 Mini fuse.
2 J-case fuse.
196
Fuses
Auxiliary Fuse Box
E174549

Rating
1 1 Driving Light.
25A
2 1 Position lamp.
15A
3 1 LED beacon.
10A
4 1 Work lights.
15A
5 1 Spare.
20A
6 1 Power point.
20A
7 1 Reversing lamp.
15A
8 1 Direction indicators, stop lamp.
15A
9 1 Crew chief.
5A
10 1 Disable fuse (isolator ground).
5A
197
Fuses

Rating
11 - Not used.
12 - Not used.
1 Mini fuse.
2 J-case fuse.
R1 Work lights.
R2 LED beacon.
R3 Spare.
R4 Position lamp.
R5 Direction indicator (left).
R6 Direction indicator (right).
R7 Stop lamp.
R8 Not used.
R9 Not used.
WARNINGS
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART To reduce risk of electrical shock,
- VEHICLES WITH: always replace the cover to the
ELECTRONIC POWER ASSIST reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
STEERING (EPAS) reservoirs.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box - The engine compartment fuse box has
(2.2L Diesel) high-current fuses that protect your
WARNINGS vehicle's main electrical systems from
Always disconnect the battery before reconnect the battery, you will need to
servicing high current fuses. reset some features. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 231). Lift the release
198
Fuses
E190797
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Components

Number Rating
1 3 Not used.
25A
2 - Starter motor solenoid relay.
3 1 Rain sensor.
15A
4 - Blower motor relay.
5 3 Auxiliary power point.
20A
(Console rear).
6 - -
7 1 Powertrain control module.
20A
20A
Volumetric control valve. EGR cooler bypass. TMAF.
199
Fuses

Number Rating
9 - Powertrain control module relay.

20A
1.
11 - Not used.
12 2 Fan.
15A
Glow plugs.
13 2 Not used.
15A
14 2 PCV Heater. (2.2L Diesel).
15A
15 - Run/Start relay.
16 3 Auxiliary power point 2.
20A
20A
Rear cargo area.
18 1 Not used.
10A
(Spare).
19 1 Electric power assist steering.
10A
20 1 Headlamp levelling.
10A
Lighting control.
21 1 Transmission control module.
15A
22 1 A/C clutch.
10A
23 1 Rear parking aid camera.
15A
Adaptive cruise control.
Head-up display (without start stop).
Voltage quality module (with start stop).
24 1 Air Conditioning pressure switch (Manual transmission
5A
vehicles only).
25 2 Anti-lock brake system.
10A
26 2 Mirror adjust switch.
10A
27 1 Heater. PTC.
5A
200
Fuses

Number Rating

10A
29 - Not used.
30 - Not used.
31 - Not used.
32 - Fuel pump relay.
33 - A/C clutch relay.
34 1 Stop lamp.
15A
Centre high mount.
15A
36 - Not used.
37 1 Heated exterior mirror.
10A
38 - Not used.
39 - Four wheel drive power relay.
40 - Center high mount stop lamp relay.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - Four wheel drive motor no. 2 relay.
43 - -
44 1 Not used.
5A
(Spare).
45 1 Not used.
5A
(Spare).
46 2 Not used.
10A
(Spare).
47 2 Brake pedal switch.
10A
48 1 Horn.
20A
49 - Not used.
50 - Not used.
201
Fuses

Number Rating
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 1 Rear differential lock.
10A
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - Four wheel drive motor -no. 1 relay.
1 Micro2 fuse.
2 Micro3 fuse.
3 M-type fuse.
1. Release the two latches located on

Power Distribution Box - Bottom
both sides of the fuse box.
There are fuses located on the bottom of 2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the the cradle.
fuse box, do the following:
A 2 3
5
1
E206174
E206171
3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side
A Towards the front side of the of the engine compartment and rotate
vehicle. as shown in the graphics.
202
Fuses
4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to 5. Release the two latches to open the
access the bottom side. fuse cover.
E190798
Fuse/Relay Number Fuse Amp Rating Protected Components
56 - Not used.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 4 Four Wheel Drive.
25A
60 4 Fuel Pump Control Module.
30A
61 3 Windshield Defrost (left) (if
30A
fitted).
62 4 Body control module 1
50A
(lighting).
203
Fuses
63 - Not used.
64 3 Trailer tow connector.
20A
65 3 Heated front seats.
20A
66 3 Windshield Defrost (right)
30A
(if fitted).
50A
(lighting).
68 3 Rear window defroster.
20A
69 3 Anti-lock brake system
30A
valves.
70 - Not used.
71 - Not used.
72 - Not used.
73 - Not used.
74 3 Driver power seat.
20A
75 - Not used.
76 - Not used.
77 - Not used.
78 - Not used.
79 4 Blower motor.
40A
80 - Not used.
81 3 Inverter.
40A
60A
83 3 Windshield wiper motor.
25A
84 3 Starter motor solenoid.
30A
204
Fuses
85 - Not used.
87 4 Trailer module.
40A
1 Micro 2 fuse.
2 Micro 3 fuse.
3 M-type fuse.
4 LPJ-type fuse.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box - high-current fuses that protect your
(3.2L Diesel) vehicle's main electrical systems from
WARNINGS reconnect the battery, you will need to
Always disconnect the battery before reset some features. See Changing the
servicing high current fuses. 12V Battery (page 231). Lift the release
reservoirs.
205
Fuses
E190797

Number Rating
1 3 Not used.
25A
2 - Starter motor solenoid relay.
3 1 Rain sensor.
15A
4 - Blower motor relay.
20A
3.
6 - Not used.
20A
20A
Volumetric control valve. EGR cooler bypass. TMAF.
206
Fuses

Number Rating
9 - Powertrain control module.

Relay.
20A
1.
11 2 Not used.
15A
Spare.
12 2 Fan drive. Glow plug control module.
15A
13 2 Not used.
15A
Spare.
14 2 Not used.
15A
Spare.
15 - Run/start relay.
16 3 Auxiliary power point 4.
20A
17 3 Auxiliary power point 4 rear cargo area..
20A
18 1 Not used.
10A
19 1 Electric power assist steering.
10A
20 1 Headlamp switch.
10A
Headlamp levelling motor.
15A
22 1 Air conditioning clutch.
10A
23 1 Rear parking aid camera.
15A
Head-up display (without start stop).
Voltage quality module (with start stop).
24 1 Air Conditioning pressure switch (Manual transmission
5A
vehicles only).
10A
26 2 Mirror adjust switch.
10A
207
Fuses

Number Rating
27 1 Auxiliary Heater.
5A
10A
29 - Not used.
30 - Not used.
31 - Not used.
32 - Fuel pump relay.
33 - A/C clutch relay.
34 1 Stop lamp.
15A
Center high mount.
15A
36 - Not used.
37 1 Heated exterior mirror.
10A
38 - Not used.
39 - Four wheel drive power relay.
40 - Stop lamp.
Center high mount.
Relay.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - Four wheel drive motor no. 2 relay.
43 - Not used.
44 1 Not used.
5A
Spare.
45 1 Not used.
5A
Spare.
46 2 Not used.
10A
Spare.
47 2 Brake pedal switch.
10A
208
Fuses

Number Rating
48 1 Horn.
20A
49 - Not used.
50 - Not used.
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 1 Rear differential lock.
10A
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - Four wheel drive motor no.1 relay.
1 Micro2 fuse.
2 Micro 3 fuse.
3 M-type fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom

There are fuses located on the bottom of
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the 1
fuse box, do the following:
A 2
E206171
A Towards the front side of the

vehicle.
209
Fuses
1. Release the two latches located on 3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side
both sides of the fuse box. of the engine compartment and rotate
2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from as shown in the graphics.
the cradle. 4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to
access the bottom side.
5. Release the two latches to open the
fuse cover.
3
5
E206174
210
Fuses
E190798
56 - Not used.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 4 Four wheel drive.
25A
60 4 Fuel pump control module.
30A
fuel
61 3 Windshield defrost (left) (if
30A
fitted).
50A
(lighting).
63 - Not used.
211
Fuses
64 3 Trailer tow connector.

20A
65 3 Heated front seats.
20A
66 3 Windshield defrost (right)
30A
(if fitted).
50A
(lighting).
68 3 Rear window defroster.
20A
30A
Valves.
70 - Not used.
71 - Not used.
72 - Not used.
73 - Not used.
74 3 Driver power seat.
20A
75 - Not used.
76 - Not used.
77 - Not used.
78 - Not used.
79 4 Blower motor.
40A
80 - Not used.
81 3 Inverter.
40A
60A
Pump.
83 3 Windshield wiper motor.
25A
84 3 Starter motor solenoid.
30A
212
Fuses
85 - Not used.
87 4 Trailer module.
40A
1 Micro 2 fuse.
2 Micro 3 fuse.
3 M-type fuse.
4 LPJ-type fuse.
Battery Mounted Fuse Link - (2.2L and

3.2L Diesel)
E200936

Rating
1 225 Alternator.
2 125 Electronic power assist steering.
213
Fuses
High Current Fuse Box - (2.2L and 3.2L

Diesel)
E206158

Rating
1 60 Glow plug module.

2 125 Body control module.
Body control module.
Rear parking aid camera.
3 50 Voltage quality module.
Head-up display.
4 - Busbar through to power distribution box.
5 100 Auxiliary heater (if equipped).

The fuse box is located below and
outboard of the steering column behind
the access cover.
214
Fuses
E145984
Fuse Fuse Amp Rating Protected Components
Automatic transmission gear shifter.

Map lamp.
1 10A
1
Grab handle.
Glove box lamp.
Sun visor.
Not used.
2 7.5A
1
(Spare).
Driver door latch / Fuel flap unlock relay. Door Double
3 20A
1
/ Aux lock relay.
Not used.
4 5A
1
(Spare).
Not used.
5 20A
1
(Spare).
Not used.
6 10A
2
(Spare).
Not used.
7 10A
2
(Spare).
8 2 Security horn.
10A
215
Fuses
Not used.
9 10A
2
(Spare).
Not used.
10 5A
2
(Spare).
11 2 Interior motion sensor.

5A
Electronic control panel.
12 7.5A
2
control
Climate control.
Instrument cluster.
13 7.5A
2
Steering column control module.
Data link connector.
Not used.
14 10A
2
(Spare).
Gateway module/smart data link connector. OBD II
15 10A
2
(RHD).
16 1 Child lock.
15A
17 2 Battery backed sounder.

5A
18 2 Ignition switch.
5A
2 Not used.
19 7.5A
(Spare).
-
Not used.
20 7.5A
2
(Spare).
21 2 Humidity and in car temperature sensor.

5A
Not used.
22 5A
2
(Spare).
Inverter. Door lock switch. Driver door window switch
23 10A
1
(one touch up/down all doors).
24 1 Central locking system.

20A
Driver door control module (power window - one
25 30A
1
touch up/down all doors).
216
Fuses
Driver door power window switch memory (with one

touch up/down driver only).
Passenger door control module (power window)
26 30A
1
(one touch up/down).
Not used.
27 30A
1
(Spare).
Not used.
28 20A
1
(Spare).
Left rear door control module (power window) (one
29 30A
1
touch up/down).
Right rear door control module (power window) (one
30 30A
1
touch up/down).
Not used.
31 15A
1
(Spare).
Radio transceiver module. SYNC. Global positioning
32 10A
1
system module. Multi function display. Door entry
remote.
33 1 Audio unit.
20A
34 1 Run start relay.

30A
35 1 Restraints control module.

5A
36 1 Auto-dimming interior mirror.

15A
Not used.
37 15A
1
(Spare).
Power windows.
38 30A
3
(without door control module)
(one touch up/down - driver only).
1 Micro2 fuse.
2 Micro3 fuse.
3 PTC fuse.
217
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
E217331
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire. If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
218
Fuses
Callout Fuse Type
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
219
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Check Monthly

• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
WARNINGS (page 228).
Switch the ignition off and apply the • Engine coolant level. See Engine
parking brake. Coolant Check (page 229).
Do not touch the electronic ignition • Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
system parts after you have switched • Air conditioning operation.
the ignition on or when the engine is
running. The system operates at high • Parking brake operation.
voltage. Failure to adhere to this warning • Horn operation.
could result in serious personal injury or • Tightness of lug nuts.
death.
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Make sure that you fit filler caps securely Opening the Hood
after carrying out maintenance checks.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. Authorized repairers are best
qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly, with a wide range of highly
specialized tools.
In addition to regular servicing, we
recommend that you carry out the
following checks.
Check Daily
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Check When Refueling 1

E206129
• Brake fluid level. See Brake and
Clutch Fluid Check (page 230).
1. Pull the hood release lever. See At a
• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid Glance (page ?).
Check (page 230).
• Tire pressures. See Technical
Specifications (page 258).
• Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires
(page 243).
220
Maintenance
E201861
E271769
2. Slightly lift the hood. 5. The hood strut automatically supports

the hood.
3. Move the catch to the left for vehicles
with left hand drive. Move the catch to Closing the Hood
the right for vehicle with right hand
drive. 1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last .
4. Open the hood.
2. If necessary, apply a downward force
on the leading edge of the hood prior
to engage with the latch, to latch the
hood fully.
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)

DIESEL
221
Maintenance
RHD
A B C D E F G
K J I H
E131930
222
Maintenance
LHD
A C D E B F G
K J I H
E131931
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. G Vehicle identificaton plate. See

See Engine Coolant Check Capacities and Specifications
(page 229). (page 260).
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir H Battery. See Maintenance
cap. See Brake and Clutch (page 220).
Fluid Check (page 230). I Power steering fluid reservoir
C Engine oil dipstick . See Engine
1 cap. See Power Steering Fluid
Check (page 230).
Oil Dipstick (page 228).
1 J Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
D Engine oil filler cap . See Engine
Washer Fluid Check (page 230).
Oil Check (page 228).
K Air cleaner.
E Fuel filter water trap. See
1
Draining the Fuel Filter Water The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
Trap (page 231). are colored for easy identification.
F Engine junction box. See Fuses
(page 186).
223
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L DURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)

- MI4
RHD
A B C D E F
J I H G
E131919
224
Maintenance
LHD
A C D B E F
J I H G
E131920
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. F Vehicle identificaton plate. See

(page 229). (page 260).
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir G Battery. See Maintenance
Fluid Check (page 230). H Power steering fluid reservoir
C Engine oil filler cap . See Engine
Check (page 230).
1 I Air cleaner.
D Engine oil dipstick . See Engine
Oil Check (page 228). J Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
E Engine junction box. See Fuses
1
(page 186). The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
are colored for easy identification.
225
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)

DIESEL
RHD
A B C D E F G
E131967
K J I H
226
Maintenance
LHD
A C D E B F G
K J I H
E131968
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. G Vehicle identificaton plate. See

(page 229). (page 260).
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir H Battery. See Maintenance
Fluid Check (page 230). I Power steering fluid reservoir
C Engine oil dipstick . See Engine
Check (page 230).
Oil Dipstick (page 228).
1 J Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
D Engine oil filler cap . See Engine
K Air cleaner.
E Fuel filter water trap. See
1
Draining the Fuel Filter Water The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick
Trap (page 231). are colored for easy identification.
F Engine junction box. See Fuses
(page 186).
227
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.2L 2. Switch off the engine and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA) pan.
DIESEL/3.2L DURATORQ-TDCI 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
(PUMA) DIESEL a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
A B If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Note: Check the oil level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
E71362
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
A MIN Note: Do not use oil additives or other
engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
B MAX
they may damage the engine.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.5L reaches its normal level after approximately
5,000 km.
DURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)
- MI4 Adding Oil
WARNINGS
A B Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down. Failure
to take care may result in personal injury.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running. Failure to take
care may result in personal injury.
E92036
1. Remove the filler cap.

A MIN
2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications.
B MAX See Capacities and Specifications
(page 276).
ENGINE OIL CHECK 3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level Note: Do not add oil further than the
ground. maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
228
Maintenance
Note: Soak up any spillage with an Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
absorbent cloth immediately. level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
WARNINGS cooling or heating systems.
Do not dispose of coolant in the Adding Coolant
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized WARNINGS
waste disposal facility. Do not remove the coolant reservoir
Do not put coolant in the windshield cap when the cooling system is hot.
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the Wait 10 minutes for the cooling
windshield, coolant could make it system to cool down. Cover the coolant
difficult to see through the windshield. reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent
the possibility of scalding and slowly
remove the cap. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
Undiluted coolant is flammable and
may ignite if spilled on a hot exhaust.
We do not recommend the use of recycled

engine coolant since a Ford-approved
recycling process is not yet available.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle.
Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze
and water or prediluted engine coolant that
meets the correct specification.
E170684
Note: Use fluids which meet the
Make sure that the coolant level is specifications or requirements defined. Use
between the MIN and MAX marks on the of other fluids may lead to damage which
coolant reservoir. If the coolant level is at is not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See
or below the minimum mark, immediately Capacities and Specifications (page 260).
add coolant.
To top up the coolant level do the
The coolant concentration should be following:
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F 1. Remove the coolant reservoir cap.
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). 2. Add coolant to the MAX mark, do not
overfill.
229
Maintenance
3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn If the fluid levels are outside of the normal
it clockwise until you feel a strong operating range, the performance of the
resistance. system could be compromised; seek
service from you authorized dealer
In case of emergency, you can add water
immediately.
without engine coolant in order to reach a
vehicle service location. Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilution
of coolant can cause damage, for example
corrosion, overheating or freezing.
POWER STEERING FLUID
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK
CHECK
WARNING
WARNINGS Do not allow the fluid to touch your
Use of any fluid other than the skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
recommended brake fluid may affected areas immediately with
reduce brake efficiency and not meet plenty of water and contact your physician.
Ford's performance standards.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your Note: Make sure that the fluid level is
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the between the MIN and the MAX marks.
affected areas immediately with If the level is at the MIN mark, top up
plenty of water and contact your doctor. immediately. See Capacities and
Clean the filler cap before removing. Specifications (page 276).
Use only fluid that meets Ford
specifications and from a sealed Adding Power Steering Fluid
container. Note: Do not add fluid further than the MAX
mark.
Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry. 1. Remove the filler cap.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in 2. Add fluid that meets Ford
brake system damage and possible failure. specifications. See Capacities and
Note: The brake and the clutch systems are
supplied from the same reservoir. 3. Replace the filler cap.
The fluid level will drop slowly as the

brakes wear, and will rise when the brake WASHER FLUID CHECK
components are replaced.
When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
lines are within the normal operating range; cold weather and improve the cleaning
there is no need to add fluid. capability. For information on fluid dilution,
refer to the product instructions. We
recommend that you only use high quality
washer fluid.
230
Maintenance
Note: The reservoir supplies the front and 5. Allow the water to drain.
rear washer systems. 6. Switch the ignition off.
7. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER strong resistance.
WATER TRAP 8. Remove the tube from the drain plug.
9. Start the engine.
WARNING
10. Check for leaks.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will
household refuse or the public
go out after approximately 2 seconds, with
sewage system. Use an authorized
the engine running.
waste disposal facility.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
specification. See Fuel Quality (page 115).
WARNINGS
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off
automatically after approximately 40 Batteries normally produce explosive
seconds. gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
A the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
E208053 hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
A Front of Vehicle. children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
For item location: See Under Hood clothing. Shield your eyes when working
Overview (page 226). near the battery to protect against possible
1. Switch the ignition off. splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
2. Attach a tube to the drain plug and immediately with water for a minimum of
place the end of the tube into a 15 minutes and get prompt medical
suitable container. attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
3. Loosen the drain plug approximately physician immediately.
1.5 turns.
4. Switch the ignition on to activate the
in-tank pump.
231
Maintenance
WARNINGS To maintain correct operation of the

Battery posts, terminals and related battery management system, if you add
accessories contain lead and lead any electrical devices to your vehicle, do
compounds. Wash hands after not connect the ground connection directly
handling. to the negative battery terminal. A
connection at the negative battery terminal
This vehicle may have more than one can cause inaccurate measurements of
battery. Removing the battery cables the battery condition and potential
from only one battery does not incorrect system operation.
disconnect your vehicle electrical system.
Make sure you disconnect the battery Note: Electrical accessories or components
cables from all batteries when added to your vehicle by you or an
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may authorized dealer, may adversely affect
cause serious personal injury or property battery performance, durability and the
damage. performance of other electrical systems on
your vehicle.
For vehicles with Auto-Start-Stop
the battery requirement is different. If a replacement battery is required, we
You must replace the battery with recommend you use a Ford replacement
one of exactly the same specification. battery that matches the electrical
requirements of your vehicle.
The battery is located in the engine If you disconnect or replace the battery
compartment. See Under Hood and your vehicle has an automatic
Overview (page 221). transmission, transmission must relearn
its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free transmission may shift firmly when first
battery. It does not require additional driven. This is normal operation while the
water during service. transmission fully updates its operation to
If your vehicle battery has a cover, make optimum shift feel.
sure you correctly install it after cleaning
or replacing the battery. Remove and Reinstall the Battery
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the To disconnect or remove the battery, do
top of the battery clean and dry and the the following:
battery cables tightly fastened to the 1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
battery terminals. If any corrosion is ignition off.
present on the battery or terminals, remove
the cables from the terminals and clean 2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the example lights and radio.
acid with a solution of baking soda and 3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
water. disconnecting the battery.
We recommend that you disconnect the Note: The engine management system has
negative battery cable terminal from the a power hold function and remains powered
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for for a period after you switch the ignition off.
an extended period. This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive
tables to be stored. Disconnecting the
battery without waiting can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
232
Maintenance
4. Disconnect the negative (-) battery CHECKING THE WIPER

cable terminal first.
BLADES
5. Disconnect the positive (+) battery
cable terminal last.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
8. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
make sure the ignition remains switched off.
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid un-intended connection
or arcing. E222238
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
are fully tightened.
the blade to check for roughness.
Note: If you disconnect or replace the
Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
battery, you must reset the clock and the
alcohol or windscreen washer concentrate.
pre-set radio stations once the battery is
reconnected.
CHANGING THE WIPER
Battery Disposal
BLADES
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an Set the windscreen wipers in the service
E107998 environmentally friendly way. position to change the wiper blades.
Seek advice from your local authority
To set the wiper in service position:
about recycling old batteries.
1. Turn the ignition key to position 0 from
position II.
2. Pull the washer lever towards the
steering wheel within three seconds.
You can use the service position in winter
to provide easier access to the wiper
blades for freeing them from snow and ice.
The windscreen wipers will return to their
normal position as soon as you switch the
ignition on, so make sure that the outside
of the windscreen is free from snow and
ice before you switch the ignition on.
To change the wiper blade:
233
Maintenance
2
5
1
E93783
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away 4

from the glass.
2. Turn the wiper blade. E93785
4. Rotate the wiper blade.

5. Move in the direction shown.
E93784
E93786
3. Release the lock.
6. Remove the wiper blade.
7. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when the ignition is turned on.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
234
Maintenance
CHANGING A BULB 2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. 4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp

Bulb
A B C
3 1
E205825
D 1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
E205822
3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
Headlamp assembly: assembly by turning it
A. Front parking lamp bulb. counterclockwise and pull it straight
1
out.
B. High beam headlamp bulb/ Daytime
running lamp bulb. 4. Release the retainer spring and remove
the bulb from the headlamp assembly
C. Low beam headlamp bulb. 2
by pulling it straight out.
D. Direction indicator lamp bulb. 1
- Projector type headlamp assembly.
Replacing the High Beam Headlamp 2
Bulb - Reflector type headlamp assembly.
Replacing the Front Parking Bulb

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
E205833
3 1
1. Carefully remove the cover.
235
Maintenance
Replacing the Direction Indicator Lamp Front Fog Lamps

Bulb
and remove it.
2. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Side Repeater
E205847
1. Remove the screws.

E133682
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
1. Slide the lens to the rear and remove bumper.
it. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Approach Lamp and Side Direction

Indicator
A
B
E133683
A Side direction indicator.

B Approach lamp.
Note: These lamps are not serviceable, see E205849
an authorized dealer if it they fail.
236
Maintenance

and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
4
5 A
Rear Lamps
Type 1
Tail, Brake, Reversing, Fog Lamp and
Direction Indicator B
C
3
2 D
E133684
A Stop and rear lamp.
E133757
B Rear direction indicator.
C Reversing lamp.
D Rear fog lamp.
1. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle

to release the tailgate.
3. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb.
237
Maintenance
Type 2 1. Use a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, to carefully remove the
Tail, Brake, Reversing Lamp and lamp.
Direction Indicator
2. Rotate the housing counterclockwise
B C to the unlock position.
A
3. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
3 2 1
1
E133685
A Rear direction indicator.

B Stop and rear lamp.
C Reversing lamp. E133687
1. Remove the screws. 1. Remove the screws.

2. Remove the lamp lens. 2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb.
License Plate Lamp Central High Mounted Brake Lamp
Type 1 Type 1
3
3
E133686
E133756
238
Maintenance
1. Remove the lamp lens. Type 2

3. Carefully prise out the lamp.
4 5 6
3 2 1
E134135
1. Remove the lamp lens.

E133755
4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Carefully prise out the lamp.
5. Turn the bulb holder 45°
counterclockwise and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb.
5
6
E134136

5. Remove the bulb holder by pulling it
straight out.
6. Remove the bulb.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
239
Maintenance
Bulb Specification Power ( Watts)

+
Headlamp low beam. H7 55
Headlamp low beam.
++ H11 55
*
Headlamp high beam. H15 55
Headlamp high beam.
** HB3 60
Daytime running lamps. H15 15

Front position lamp. W5W 5
Front fog lamp. H8 35
Front direction indicator. P21W 21
Side direction indicator. 1

-
Rear direction indicator. WY21W 21

Rear position lamp. W5W 5
Rear position/Stop lamp. W21/5W 21/5
Central high mounted brake W5W 5
lamp.
Reversing lamp. W21W 21
Rear fog lamp. W21W 21
License plate lamp. W5W 5
Roof bar lamp. W5W 5
Interior lamp. W5W 5
Reading lamp. W5W 5
+
Reflector type.
++
Projector type.
*
With Daytime running lamps.
**
Without Daytime running lamps.
1
Bulb replacement is not possible as the bulb is an integral part of the unit. The side
direction indicator lamp unit has to be replaced
240
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Cleaning the chrome trim

CAUTION
WARNING
Do not use abrasives or chemical
If you use a car wash with a waxing
solvents. Use soapy water.
cycle, make sure that you remove the
wax from the windshield.
Cleaning the alloy wheels
Note: Prior to using a car wash facility Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
check the suitability of it for your vehicle. warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Remove the aerial before using an Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
automatic car wash. cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
Note: Switch the heater blower off to combination with brush agitation to remove
prevent contamination of the fresh air filter. brake dust and dirt, could wear away the
clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Some car washes use water at high
pressure. Due to this, water droplets may Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
enter inside your vehicle and could also or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
damage certain parts of your vehicle. wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
We recommend that you wash your vehicle Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
with a sponge and lukewarm water an extended period after cleaning the
containing a car shampoo. wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
Cleaning the headlamps This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and
CAUTIONS linings.
Do not scrape the headlamp lenses Note: Some automatic car washes may
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or cause damage to the finish on your wheel
chemical solvents to clean them. rims and covers.
Do not wipe the headlamps when Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
they are dry. with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
Cleaning the rear window • Clean them weekly with the
recommended wheel and tire cleaner.
CAUTION
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
Do not scrape the inside of the rear deposits of dirt and brake dust
window or use abrasives or chemical accumulation.
solvents to clean it.
• Rinse them thoroughly with a
pressurized stream of water when you
Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp have completed the cleaning process.
chamois leather to clean the inside of the
rear window. We recommend that you use Ford service
wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read
and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
241
Vehicle Care
Using other non-recommended cleaning Rear windows

products can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage. CAUTIONS
Do not use any abrasive materials to
Body paintwork preservation clean the interior of the rear windows.
CAUTIONS Do not install stickers or labels to the
Do not polish your vehicle in strong interior of the rear windows.
sunshine.
Do not allow polish to touch plastic REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
surfaces. It could be difficult to DAMAGE
remove.
Do not apply polish to the windshield CAUTION
or rear window. This could cause the Remove apparently harmless looking
wipers to become noisy and they may substances from the paintwork
not clear the window properly. immediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree
resins, insect remains, tar spots, road salt
We recommend that you wax the and industrial fall out).
paintwork once or twice a year.
You should repair paintwork damage
CLEANING THE INTERIOR caused by stones from the road or minor
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of
Safety belts products is available from your Ford
Dealer. Read and follow the
WARNINGS manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not use abrasives, or chemical
solvents to clean them.
Do not allow moisture to penetrate
the safety belt retractor mechanism.
Clean the safety belts with interior cleaner

or water applied with a soft sponge. Let
the safety belts dry naturally, away from
artificial heat.
Instrument cluster screens, LCD

screens, radio screens
WARNING
Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
solvents or chemical solvents to
clean them.
242
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service
A decal with tire pressure data is located station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford
in the driver’s door opening or on the B recommends the use of a digital or
pillar. dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are Use the recommended cold inflation
intending to drive your vehicle and when pressure for optimum tire performance and
the tires are cold. wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to
optimize fuel economy. WARNING
Note: Use only approved wheel and tire Under-inflation is the most common
sizes. Using other sizes could damage your cause of tire failures and may result
vehicle and will make the National Type in severe tire cracking, tread
Approval invalid. separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
Note: If you change the diameter of the tires of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
from that fitted at the factory, the flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in
speedometer may not display the correct heat buildup and internal damage to the
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire
dealer to have the engine management stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
system reprogrammed. control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
TIRE CARE to be flat!
Inflating Your Tires Always inflate your tires to the Ford

recommended inflation pressure even if it
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that
is less than the maximum inflation
your tires are properly inflated. Remember
pressure information found on the tire. The
that a tire can lose up to half of its air
Ford recommended tire inflation pressure
pressure without appearing flat.
is found on the Tire Label located on door
Every day before you drive, check your tires. opening or on the B-pillar. Failure to follow
If one looks lower than the others, use a the tire pressure recommendations can
tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires cause uneven treadwear patterns and
and adjust if required. adversely affect the way your vehicle
At least once a month and before long handles.
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including spare,
if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by the Ford Motor
Company.
243
Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change Note: If you are checking tire pressure when
the ride characteristics of the vehicle. If you the tire is hot, (for example, driven more
do not maintain the inflation pressure at the than 1.6 km, never bleed or reduce air
levels specified by Ford, your vehicle may pressure. The tires are hot from driving and
experience a condition known as shimmy. it is normal for pressures to increase above
Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
in the steering wheel after the vehicle travels or below recommended cold inflation
over a bump or dip in the road that does not pressure could be significantly
dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result under-inflated.
from significant under-inflation of the tires, Note: If you have to drive a distance to get
improper tires (load range, size, or type), or air for your tire(s), check and record the tire
vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the pressure first and add the appropriate air
event that your vehicle experiences shimmy, pressure when you get to the pump. It is
you should slowly reduce speed by either normal for tires to heat up and the air
lifting off the accelerator pedal or lightly pressure inside to go up as you drive.
applying the brakes. The shimmy will cease
as the vehicle speed decreases. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire the valve and measure the pressure.
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the 3. Add enough air to reach the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. recommended air pressure.
This pressure is normally higher than the Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by
manufacturer’s recommended cold pressing on the metal stem in the center of
inflation pressure which can be found next the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
to the driver's seat on the Tire Label your tire gauge.
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation pressure 4. Replace the valve cap.
should never be set lower than the 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
recommended pressure on the Safety including the spare.
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher
inflation pressure than the other tires. For
When weather temperature changes full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the
occur, tire inflation pressures also change. Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause information for a description. Store and
a corresponding drop of 7 kPa in inflation maintain at the higher of the front and rear
pressure. Check your tire pressures inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
frequently and adjust them to the proper Label.
pressure which can be found on the Tire
Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
To check the pressure in your tire(s): embedded that could poke a hole in the
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning tire and cause an air leak.
they are not hot from driving even a mile. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
244
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Damage

Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
Periodically inspect the tire treads for sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
uneven or excessive wear and remove the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread
objects such as stones, nails or glass that groove and separation in the tread or
may be wedged in the tread grooves. sidewall). If damage is observed or
Check the tire and valve stems for holes, suspected have the tire inspected by a tire
cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage professional. Tires can be damaged during
and repair or replace the tire and replace off-road use, so inspection after off-road
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls use is also recommended.
for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs
of damage or excessive wear. If internal Age
damage to the tire is suspected, have the
tire demounted and inspected in case it WARNING
needs to be repaired or replaced. For your Tires degrade over time depending
safety, tires that are damaged or show on many factors such as weather,
signs of excessive wear should not be used storage conditions, and conditions
because they are more likely to blow out of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
or fail. tires experience throughout their lives.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
In general, tires should be replaced after
maintenance can cause tires to wear
six years regardless of tread wear.
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including
However, heat caused by hot climates or
the spare, frequently, and replace them if
frequent high loading conditions can
one or more of the following conditions
accelerate the aging process and may
exist:
require tires to be replaced more
Tire Wear frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when

you replace the road tires or after six years
due to aging even if it has not been used.
Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
E142546 wheels that are the same size, load
Tire wear indicators are moulded in to the index, speed rating and type (such
bottom of the tread grooves to aid in as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
determining when to replace the tire. Tires versus all-terrain) as those originally
should be replaced before the tread wears provided by Ford. The recommended tire
down to the same height as the wear and wheel size may be found on either the
indicators. Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
245
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS Safety Practices

door-latch post, or the door edge that WARNINGS
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires;
the driver's door. If this information is not spinning the tires can tear the tire
found on these labels, then you should and cause an explosion. A tire can explode
contact your authorized dealer as soon as in as little as three to five seconds.
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not Do not spin the wheels at over
recommended by Ford can affect the 55 km/h. The tires may fail and injure
safety and performance of your vehicle, a passenger or bystander.
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, Driving habits have a great deal to do
personal injury and death. with your tire mileage and safety.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires *Observe posted speed limits
and wheels, you should not exceed *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
the maximum pressure indicated on the
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If the *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
beads do not seat at the maximum against a curb when parking
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try
again. Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s
Important: Remember to replace the always the possibility that you may
wheel valve stems when the road tires are eventually have a flat tire on the highway.
replaced on your vehicle. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of
The two front tires or two rear tires should traffic. This may further damage the flat
generally be replaced as a pair. tire, but your safety is more important.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
wheels are not designed to be used in disturbance while driving, or you suspect
aftermarket wheels. your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive with
The use of wheels or tires not caution until you can safely pull off the
recommended by Ford Motor Company road. Stop and inspect the tires for
may affect the operation of your tire damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
pressure monitoring system. damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
If the tire pressure monitoring system replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
indicator is flashing, the system is If you cannot detect a cause, have the
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility
might be incompatible with your tire or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
246
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
can cause the front end of your vehicle to is defined as a spare wheel and tire
become misaligned or cause damage to assembly that is different in brand, size or
your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to appearance from the road tires and wheels.
one side when you’re driving, the wheels If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
may be out of alignment. Have an assembly it is intended for temporary use
authorized dealer check the wheel only and should not be used in a tire
alignment periodically. rotation.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear Note: After having your tires rotated,
can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of inflation pressure must be checked and
your tires and should be corrected by an adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive
vehicles and those with an independent Rotating your tires at the recommended
rear suspension may require alignment of interval of between 5,000 km to
all four wheels. 10,000 km will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
The tires should also be balanced and longer tire life.
periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel
assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires at left of
Tire Rotation diagram)
WARNING
If the tire label shows different tire
pressures for the front and rear tires
and the vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you need to
update the settings for the system sensors.
Always perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If you do not
reset the system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary.
E142548
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask
an authorized dealer to check for and correct Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or corrected by rotating the tires.
mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation. WARNING
Do not scrub the sidewalls of the
tires when you are parking.
If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly

and approach it with the wheels at
right-angles to the curb.
247
Wheels and Tires
Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
objects and uneven wear of the tread.
Uneven wear could mean that the wheel SYSTEM (If Equipped)
alignment is outside specification.
WARNING
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) when cold, every two weeks. The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
USING WINTER TIRES periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
If winter tires are used you must inflate maintain tire pressures could increase the
them to the same tire pressures as those risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
listed in the tire pressure table. See rollover and personal injury.
Technical Specifications (page 258).
You must check the tire
USING SNOW CHAINS pressures (including the spare
tire where applicable) every two
WARNINGS weeks when the tires are cold.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in You must inflate the tires to the correct
the loss of control of your vehicle, pressure. See Wheels and Tires (page
personal injury or death. 243). The tire pressures are also on the tire
inflation pressure label (located on the
Do not use snow chains on snow-free edge of driver door or the B-Pillar).
roads.
As a driver assistance feature, your vehicle
Only fit snow chains to specified has a tire pressure monitoring system. A
tires. warning lamp will illuminate when one or
more of the tires are significantly
If your vehicle is fitted with wheel under-inflated. If the low tire pressure
trims, remove them before fitting warning lamp illuminates, you should stop
snow chains. your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so,
check the tires and inflate them to the
Only use snow chains of 10 mm or smaller. correct pressure.
Only use snow chains on the rear axle. For Driving on under-inflated tires can:
more information on snow chains usage. • Cause them to overheat.
See Technical Specifications (page ?).
• Lead to tire failure.
Note: The anti-lock brake system will • Reduce fuel efficiency.
continue to operate normally.
• Reduce tire life.
Vehicles with Stability Control • Affect vehicle handling or stopping
ability.
When stability control is on, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving The system is not a substitute for correct
characteristics. To reduce this, switch tire maintenance.
traction control off. See Using Traction
Control (page 133).
248
Wheels and Tires
You must maintain the correct tire Changing Tires With a Tire
pressures, even if low tire pressure has not Pressure Monitoring System
illuminated the warning lamp.
The tire pressure monitoring system has a
system malfunction indicator to warn you
when the system is not operating correctly.
The malfunction indicator and low tire
pressure warning lamp have a combined
function. When the system detects a
malfunction, the warning lamp will flash
for approximately one minute and then
remain illuminated. This sequence will
occur every time you switch the ignition on
while the malfunction remains. The
system has detected a fault that requires E142549
service.
You should always have tires serviced by
When the malfunction indicator is an authorized dealer.
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressures. A Note: Each road wheel and tire is fitted with
malfunction may occur for a variety of a tire pressure sensor located inside the
reasons, including the installation of a wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
replacement tire or wheel that prevents sensor attaches to the valve stem. The tire
the system from functioning correctly. covers the pressure sensor and it is not
Always check the tire pressure monitoring visible unless the tire is removed. Take care
system malfunction warning after when changing the tire to avoid damaging
replacing one or more tires or wheels on the sensor.
your vehicle. Make sure the replacement Understanding the Tire Pressure
tires or wheels allow the system to
Monitoring System
continue to function correctly. See When
the Temporary Spare Tire is Installed You must maintain the correct tire
in this section. pressures, even if low tire pressure has not
illuminated the warning lamp.
How Temperature Affects the Tire
Pressures The system measures the pressure in the
road tires and displays a warning lamp in
Under normal driving conditions tire the instrument cluster when a low pressure
pressures may increase by up to 0.3 bar is detected. See Warning Lamps and
from a cold start situation. Indicators (page 62).
If the vehicle is stationary overnight and The system detects this lower pressure as
the temperature is significantly lower than being significantly below the correct
the daytime temperature, tire pressures inflation pressure and the warning lamp
may decrease by up to 0.2 bar when there illuminates.
is a drop in the ambient temperature of
17°C or more. The system detects this
pressure decrease as being significantly
below the correct inflation pressure and
the warning lamp illuminates.
249
Wheels and Tires
When the Temporary Spare Tire is When You Believe the System is Not
Installed Operating Correctly
If you need to replace a road wheel and The main function of the system is to warn
tire with the temporary spare wheel, the you when the tire pressures are low. It can
system will continue to identify a defect. also warn you in the event the system is
This is to remind you to repair the damaged no longer capable of operating correctly.
road wheel and tire and refit the repaired See the following chart for information
road wheel and tire assembly to your concerning the system:
vehicle. To restore the correct operation
of the system, you must have the repaired When Inflating the Tires
road wheel and tire assembly refitted to
When inflating the tires the system may
your vehicle.
not respond immediately to the air added
to the tires.
250
Wheels and Tires
System Warning Lamps
Warning lamp Description Action
Solid warning lamp Tire(s) under-inflated 1. Make sure tires are at the correct
pressure. See Wheels and Tires
(page 243). The tire pressures are also
on the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door
or the B-Pillar).
2. After inflating the tires to the correct
pressure you must carry out the tire
pressure monitoring system reset
procedure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Reset
Procedure in this chapter.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
assembly to your vehicle to restore the
correct operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
Solid warning lamp Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
initially followed by and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
a flashing warning assembly to your vehicle to restore the
lamp correct operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
If the Warning Lamp is On: Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Reset Procedure
1. Check each tire to verify that none are
flat. Overview
2. If one or more tires are flat, repair as You must carry out the system reset
necessary. procedure after each tire replacement or
3. Check the tire pressures and inflate all adjustment of the tire pressures.
the tires to the correct pressure.
4. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring
system reset procedure.
251
Wheels and Tires
To maintain your vehicle load carrying Type Approvals

capability, your vehicle requires different
tire pressures in the front tires compared For Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Radio
to the rear tires. Frequency Compliance details, See Type
Approvals (page 426).
The system illuminates the warning lamp
at different pressures for the front and rear
tires. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
The tires need to be periodically rotated Lug Nuts
to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the system needs to You can obtain replacement locking lug
know when the tires have been rotated to nuts or a locking lug nut key using the
determine which set of tires are on the reference number certificate.
front and rear axles. With this information,
the system can detect and correctly warn Vehicle Jack
of low tire pressures.
WARNINGS
Carrying Out the System Reset Do not use the vehicle jack other
Procedure than when you are changing a wheel
1. Check the tire pressures and inflate all in an emergency.
the tires to the correct pressure. Check that the vehicle jack is not
damaged or deformed and the
thread is lubricated and clean.
Never place anything between the
vehicle jack and the ground.
Never place anything between the
vehicle jack and your vehicle.
Use a workshop type hydraulic jack for

changing between summer and winter
tires.
E238926 Note: Use a jack with a minimum lifting
capacity of 1,800 kg and a lifting plate with
2. Press and hold the tire pressure
a minimum diameter of 80 mm.
monitor reset switch for 3 seconds. The
warning indicator blinks 3 times to The jack, wheel brace, and jack handle are
acknowledge the reset procedure was located in the cab.
successful. Note: Not all cab configurations are
If a flat tire is still present after you perform available in all markets.
the tire pressure monitor reset procedure,
the warning indicator remains illuminated
in the instrument cluster. Make sure all of
your tires are inflated to the correct
pressure before performing the reset
procedure.
252
Wheels and Tires
Single Cab 1. Fold the right-hand side seatback

forward.
2. Loosen the jack, remove the bolt and
remove the jack.
Super Cab
E133591
1. Fold the left-hand side seatback E134701

forward.
2. Remove the locking strap and remove 1. Pull the release strap.
the tools. 2. Remove the rear seats.
E131838
3. Remove the cover.

E135841
253
Wheels and Tires
2. Lower the seatback.

3. Remove the locking strap.
4. Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the jack.
Spare Wheel
4
Note: If the spare wheel is not the same
type and size as your vehicle road wheel,
drive the shortest distance possible.
5 Note: Do not fit more than one spare wheel
on your vehicle at any one time.
Note: The spare wheel has a label showing
the maximum driving speed. Drive with
caution and at no more than the permitted
maximum speed.
Note: The usage of a dissimilar spare wheel
or tire at any one wheel location can lead
to impairment of the handling, stability and
E133592
braking performance, comfort and noise.
Note: The spare wheel is located
4. Remove the bolt. underneath the rear of the vehicle.
5. Remove the jack.
6. Remove the tools.
Double Cab
1
E79153
2
1. Assemble the handle.
E133593
1. Lift the release strap.
254
Wheels and Tires
3. All other vehicles: Insert the jack

handle into the guide hole. Turn
counter-clockwise until the wheel rests
on the ground, and there is slack in the
cable.
E225716
2. Vehicles with Selective Catalytic

Reduction System (AdBlue™):
Insert the jack handle into the guide
hole. Turn counter-clockwise until the E133590
wheel rests on the ground, and there is
slack in the cable. 4. Pass the bracket and cable through the
wheel opening.
Jacking and Lifting Points

WARNING
You must use the specified jacking
points.
E232928
255
Wheels and Tires
E133594
A Emergency use only. Removing a Road Wheel

B Maintenance. WARNINGS
Park your vehicle so that you do not
obstruct the flow of traffic or place
yourself in any danger and set up a
warning triangle.
Make sure that your vehicle is on firm
and level ground with the front
wheels pointing straight ahead.
Switch the ignition off and apply the
parking brake.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift into first or reverse
gear. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P).
Make sure all passengers are out of
E134692 your vehicle.
Secure the diagonally opposite
wheel with an appropriate block or
wheel chock.
256
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Do not work on your vehicle when
the jack is the only support. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Make sure that the vehicle jack is
vertical to the jacking point and the
base is flat on the ground.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face

down on the ground.
E134693
4. Remove the lug nuts and the road

wheel.
Installing a Road Wheel

WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tire
E79153 sizes. Using other sizes could
1. Assemble the jack handle. damage your vehicle.
Note: Assemble the three handles to jack Do not fit run flat tires on vehicles
the rear of the vehicle. that were not originally fitted with
them. See an authorized dealer for
2. Loosen the lug nuts. more details about compatibility.
3. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clear Make sure there is no grease or oil on
of the ground. the threads or the surface between
the wheel lugs and nuts. This can
cause the lug nuts to loosen while driving.
Do not install alloy wheels using lug
nuts designed for use with steel
wheels.
Have the lug nuts checked for
tightness and the tire pressure
checked as soon as possible.
Note: Alloy wheel lug nuts are suitable for

use on a steel spare wheel for a short time
(maximum two weeks).
257
Wheels and Tires
Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact 5. Lower your vehicle and remove the
surfaces are free from foreign matter. vehicle jack.
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug 6. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the
nuts are against the wheel. sequence shown. See Technical
1. Install the wheel.
7. Position the projection of the cap and
2. Install the lug nuts and finger tight. the projection of the hub correctly.
3. Install the locking lug nut key. Note: If the spare wheel is different in size
or construction to the road wheels, have this
replaced as soon as possible.
Stowing the Flat Tire

1. Place the wheel flat on the ground,
with the outer face of the wheel facing
up.
2. Tilt the bracket, and pass it through the
center of the wheel.
3. Fully insert the jack handle into the
guide hole and turn clockwise.
E79156
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
4. Install all of the lug nuts and partially
tighten them in the sequence shown.
Wheel Nut Torque

Vehicle Type Nm
All 135 Nm
Tire Pressures (Cold Tires)

Note: See the tire decal for applicable tire pressures and sizes.
258
Wheels and Tires
Tire Size Normal Load 2 Full Load

ECO
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
265 / 65 2.4 bar 2.4 bar N/A N/A 2.4 bar 3 bar
R17 112T
(SWB
1
Ute)
215/70 2.4 bar 2.4 bar 2.6 bar 2.6 bar 2.6 bar 3.8 bar
R16C 108/
1
106 S
255/70 2.1 bar 2.1 bar 3 3 2.6 bar 3 bar
1
2.6 bar 2.6 bar
R16 111T
265/65 2.1 bar 2.1 bar 3 3 2.6 bar 3 bar
1
2.6 bar 2.6 bar
R17 112T
265/60 2.1 bar 2.1 bar 3 3 2.6 bar 3 bar
1
2.6 bar 2.6 bar
R18 110T
1 Onlyfit snow chains to specified tires.
2 ECO tire inflation pressures are recommended for optimal fuel consumption.
3 ECO tire pressure is not applicable for all vehicles with diesel engines, refer to the tire
decal to see if it’s applicable.
259
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (88KW/

120PS) - PUMA
Engine type 2.2L TDCi
Capacity 2,198 cm³

Power output 88 kW (120 PS) @ 3700 rpm
Max.torque 285 Nm @ 1500 - 2700 rpm
Continuous engine speed 4500 rpm
Max.Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Idle speed 800 ± 150 rpm
Induction system Turbocharged intercooled
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Ignition system Compression Ignition
260
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (92KW/125PS)

- PUMA
Engine 2.2L TDCi
Engine capacity. 2,198 cm³

Power output. 92 kW (125 PS) @ 3700 rpm
Maximum torque. 320 Nm @ 1600 - 1700 rpm
Continuous engine speed. 4500 rpm
Maximum engine speed. 4900 rpm
Idle speed. 800 ± 150 rpm
Induction system. Turbocharged intercooled.
Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Compression Ignition
261

150PS) - PUMA
Capacity 2,198 cm³

Maximum torque 375 Nm @ 1500 - 2500 rpm
Maximum Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
262

160PS) - PUMA
Capacity 2,198 cm³

Max. torque 385 Nm @ 1600 - 2500 rpm
Max. Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
263
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L DURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)

- MI4
Engine type 2.5L Duratec
Capacity 2,488 cm³

Max. torque 225 Nm @ 4500 rpm
Continuous engine speed 6000 rpm (5600 - Value Variants)
Max. Intermittent engine speed 6500 rpm (5600 - Value Variants)
Induction system Atmospheric
Ignition system Spark Ignition
264

200PS) - PUMA
Capacity 3,198 cm³

Power output 147kW (200 PS) @ 3000 rpm
Maximum torque 470 Nm @ 1750 - 2500 rpm
Maximum intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Firing order 1-2-4-5-3
265
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - DOUBLE CAB/SINGLE CAB/SUPER CAB
Single cab
E
B
D
A
E249959
Item Dimension Description Dimension Item Dimension Description Dimension

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
A 5362 B Overall width -

Maximum length 1860
(211.1) excluding exterior
(73.2)
mirrors
A Maximum length - with 5434
bull bars (214.0) C 1703
Overall height (4x2)
(67.0)
266

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
*
C Overall height (4x2 or 1800-1806 E Track - front and rear 1590
4x4) (70.9-71.1) (4x2) (62.6)
D 3220 E Track - front and rear 1560

Wheelbase *
(4x2 or 4x4) (61.4)
(126.8)
*
Super cab
E207866
267

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
A 5362 D 3220
Maximum length Wheelbase
(211.1) (126.8)
B Overall width - E Track - front and rear 1590
1860
excluding exterior (4x2) (62.6)
(73.2)
mirrors
E Track - front and rear 1560
*
C 1706 (4x2 or 4x4) (61.4)
Overall height (4x2)
(67.2) 1
*
Depending on tyre size
C Overall height (4x2 or 1804-1810 *
(71.0-71.4) Vehicles with increased ride height
1
4x4)
268
Double cab
E249960

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
A 5362 C Overall height (4x2) 1716 (67.5)

Maximum length
(211.1) C Overall height (4x2 or
*
1815-1821
1
A Maximum length - with 5434 4x4) (71.4-72.8)
bull bars (214.0)
D 3220
Wheelbase
B Overall width - (126.8)
1860
excluding exterior
(73.2)
mirrors
269

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
*
E Track - front and rear 1590 (4x2 or 4x4) (61.4)
(4x2) (62.6) 1
Depending on tyre size
E Track - front and rear 1560 *
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - SHORT WHEELBASE, CHASSIS CAB
Dimensions - Chassis Cab
E212055
270

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
A Overall width including 2180 C Rear track 1564 (61.5)

exterior mirrors (85.8)
D 2850
Wheelbase
B Overall height 1837 (72.3) (112.2)
C 1560 E 5160
Front track Overall length
(61.4) (203.1)
TOWBAR DIMENSIONS
271
4x2 vehicles
C
J
H
B
G
F
E
D
E214213
272

in mm in mm
(inches) (inches)
A Attachment point - 124 ± 5 F Centre of tow ball -

542 ± 5
centre of tow ball (4x2) (4.8 ± 0.2) centre of 3rd
(21.3 ± 0.2)
attachment point (4x2)
B Centre of tow ball - side
598 (23.5)
member (outside) G Center of tow ball - 785 ± 5
centre of 4th (30.9 ±
C Outside of side member 1195 (47) attachment point (4x2) 0.2)
D Centre of tow ball - 419 ± 5 H Center of tow ball - 429 ± 5
centre of 1st (16.5 ± centre of 5th (16.8 ±
attachment point (4x2) 0.2) attachment point (4x2) 0.2)
E Centre of tow ball - J Center of tow ball - 504 ± 5
442 ± 5
centre of 2nd centre of 6th (19.8 ±
(17.4 ± 0.2)
attachment point (4x2) attachment point (4x2) 0.2)
273
4x2 (vehicles with increased ride height) and 4x4 vehicles
J
H
B
G
F
E
D
E214214
274
Item Dimension Description Dimension VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

in mm PLATE
(inches)
A Attachment point - 221.5 ± 5 A B

centre of tow ball (8.7 ± 0.2)
B Centre of tow ball - side
598 (23.5)
member (outside)
C Outside of side member 1195 (47)
D Centre of tow ball - 363 ± 5
centre of 1st (14.3 ±
attachment point 0.2)
E Centre of tow ball - 386 ± 5
centre of 2nd (15.2 ±
attachment point 0.2) E D C
E85610
F Centre of tow ball -
486 ± 5
centre of 3rd A Vehicle identification number.
(19.1 ± 0.2)
attachment point
B Gross vehicle weight.
G Center of tow ball - 728 ± 5
C Gross train weight.
centre of 4th (28.7 ±
attachment point 0.2) D Maximum front axle weight.
H Center of tow ball - E
Maximum rear axle weight.
373 ± 5
centre of 5th
(14.7 ± 0.2) The vehicle identification plate with your
attachment point
vehicle identification number and
J Center of tow ball - 448 ± 5 maximum weights is located on the
centre of 6th (17.6 ± bottom of the lock side of the passenger
attachment point 0.2) door aperture.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
275
The vehicle identification number is also

stamped beneath the front door on the
chassis, on the right-hand side.
A
E133363
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle fluids
Part Recommended fluid Specification
Engine oil - Duratec 2.5L 5W-30 GF4 WSS−M2C946−A

WSS-M2C913-D
1 SAE 5W-30 WSS-M2C913-C
Engine oil - Diesel
WSS-M2C913-D
2 SAE 5W-30 WSS-M2C921-A
Engine oil - Diesel
WSS-M2C913-D
3 SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C950-A
Engine oil - Diesel
Transmission oil - Manual Motorcraft® Dual Clutch WSS-M2C200-D2
Transmission Fluid
Transmission oil - Auto- Motorcraft MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-A
matic
Brake and clutch fluid Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High WSS-M6C65-A2
Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
276
Part Recommended fluid Specification
Power assisted steering fluid Motorcraft MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-A

(Vehicles fitted with
hydraulic power assisted
steering - HPAS)
Coolant Motorcraft® Orange Anti- WSS-M97B44-D
freeze/Coolant
Front axle oil Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Rear axle oil Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Rear axle oil (LSD) Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Rear axle friction modifier Motorcraft® Additive Fric- EST-M2C118-A
tion Modifier
Transfer case oil Motorcraft® MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-A
Air conditioning refrigerant R134A WSH-M17B19-A
Air conditioning Compressor Motorcraft® PAG Refri- WSH-M1C231-B
lubricant gerant Compressor Oil
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Diesel Exhaust Fluid WSS-M99C130-A
(AdBlue®) (AdBlue®)
1 Formarkets with low sulphur content (less than 350 ppm)
2 For markets with high sulphur content (more than 350 ppm)
3 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND Stage 5 emissions
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with

Your engine has been designed to be used
low sulphur content less than 350
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
economy benefit whilst maintaining the
meets the specification, you must use SAE
durability of your engine.
5W-30 that meets the specification
Topping up the oil: defined by ACEA A5/B5.
277
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with defined by API CH-4.

high sulphur content greater than 350
Using topping up oils other than the one
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
specified can result in longer engine
meets the specification defined in the
cranking periods, reduced engine
vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE
performance, reduced fuel economy and
10W-30 that meets the specification
increased emission levels.
Capacities
Variant Item Capacity
2.5L Duratec Engine oil with filter 6.7 L

2.5L Duratec Engine oil without filter 6.4 L
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine oil with filter 8.55 L
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine oil without filter 8.15 L
3.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine oil with filter 9.75 L
3.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine oil without filter 9.35 L
Manual transmission Clutch fluid Between the MIN line
and the MAX line
Manual transmission Manual transmission oil 2.7 L
Automatic transmission (dry) Automatic transmission oil 10.5 L
Automatic transmission (wet) Automatic transmission oil 9L
Air conditioning Air conditioning 200 ml
compressor lubricant
Air conditioning Air conditioning system
0.565 ± 0.025 kg
refrigerant
All Brake fluid Between the MIN line
and the MAX line
2.5 Duratec Engine coolant 11.5 L
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (MT82) Engine coolant 11.5 L
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (AT) Engine coolant 11.9 L
3.2L Duratorq-TDCi Engine coolant 13.5 L
All Windshield washer fluid 5.5 L
278
Variant Item Capacity
Vehicles fitted with hydraulic power Power assisted steering 1.2 L

assisted steering - HPAS fluid
All Fuel tank 80 L
Vehicles fitted with Selective Diesel Exhaust Fluid 20 L
Catalytic Reduction System (AdBlue )
®
®
(AdBlue )
279
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: Listening to loud audio for long

periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Radio reception factors
Distance and Strength The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger
signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-
ence in the audio system.
CD and CD Player Information MP3 and WMA Track and Folder

Structure
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
12 cm audio compact discs only. Due to Audio systems capable of recognizing and
technical incompatibility, certain recordable playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and re-recordable compact discs may not and folder structures work as follows:
function correctly when used in Ford CD • There are two different modes for MP3
players. and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade MP3 and WMA folder mode.
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
become jammed. You should use a folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
permanent felt tip marker rather than disc. The player numbers each MP3
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. and WMA track on the disc (noted by
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
authorized dealer for more information. T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped WMA files may be less depending on
discs or discs with a scratch protection film the structure of the CD and exact
attached. model of radio present.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
280
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers AM/FM/AUX IN/USB/
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc BLUETOOTH
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing WARNING
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255. Driving while distracted can result in
• Creating discs with only one level of injury. We strongly recommend that
folders helps with navigation through you use extreme caution when using any
the disc files. device that may take your focus off the
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
discs, it is important to understand how operation of your vehicle. We recommend
the system reads the structures you create. against the use of any hand-held device
While various files may be present, (files while driving and encourage the use of
with extensions other than MP3 and voice-operated systems when possible.
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA Make sure you are aware of all applicable
extension are played; other files are local laws that may affect the use of
ignored by the system. This enables you to electronic devices while driving.
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer, Note: Depending on your vehicle option
home computer and your in-vehicle package, your system may look different
system. from what you see here.
In track mode, the system displays and Note: Some features may not be available
plays the structure as if it were only one in your location. Check with an authorized
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, dealer.
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
281
Audio System
E209952
A Radio. Display Screen

B Display screen. Shows audio information.
C Number block. Number Block
D Clock.
In radio mode, store and recall your favorite
E Function buttons. radio stations. To store a radio station, tune
F Tune to the station, then press and hold a preset
button until sound returns. In phone mode,
G Seek, fast forward and reverse. enter a phone number.
H OK and cursor arrows.
Clock
I Volume and power.
Press to access the clock setting. Use the
J Mute or TA. center arrow controls to change the hours
K Sound. and minutes. You can also set the clock by
pressing MENU and scrolling to Clock
L Menu. Settings. If not in phone mode, press to
M Phone. display the clock.
N Media. Function Buttons
Radio Select different functions of the audio
system depending on which mode you are
Press this to switch between listening to a in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
CD and the media menu. Press the function
buttons below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.
282
Audio System
Tune Menu
Turn to search the frequency band in Press this button to access different audio
individual increments. system features.
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse Phone

Select a frequency band and press either Press this to access the phone features of
button. The system stops at the first the system.
station it finds in that direction.
Media
OK and Cursor Arrows
Press to open the media source menu. You
Press the up and down arrow buttons to can press this multiple times to change to
select the various settings. When you make a media device or scroll through the media
your selection, press the left and right sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK
arrow buttons to change the settings. to select a source.
Press OK to set, or press MENU to exit.
Volume and Power AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch
the system on and off.
WARNING
Mute (If Equipped) Driving while distracted can result in
Press to mute the playing audio. injury. We strongly recommend that
TA (If Equipped)
Press to switch the traffic announcements road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
on or off and cancel any active operation of your vehicle. We recommend
announcements. against the use of any hand-held device
Note: Traffic announcements may not be voice-operated systems when possible.
available in all areas. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
Sound electronic devices while driving.
Press to access settings for Treble,
Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your
selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit. Sound
settings can be set for each audio source
independently.
283
Audio System
E248382
A CD eject. N Menu back.

B Volume and menu. O CD or AUX.
C CD slot.
Volume and Menu
D Seek, fast forward and reverse.
Turn to adjust the volume, or scroll through
E Display. on-screen choices.
F Power.
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
G AM/FM.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
H Scan/AS.
press either button. The system stops at
I Shuffle. the first station it finds in that direction. In
J Repeat. CD mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to move
K Next folder. quickly forward or backward through the
L Previous folder. current track.
M Scroll display.
284
Audio System
Display Station Tuning Control

Displays the current time or date and RDS Seek Tuning
information.
Select a waveband and briefly press one
Power of the seek buttons. The unit stops at the
first station it finds in the direction you
Press to switch the system on and off. choose.
AM/FM Manual Tuning
Press to select the source to radio and 1. Select RADIO mode and then TUNE.
radio waveband. 2. Use the left and right arrow buttons to
Scan/AS tune up or down the waveband in small
increments or press and hold scan
Press to scan and auto store the radio quickly, until you find a station.
stations.
Scan Tuning
Note: For memory presets 1-6, to store a
favorite station, press and hold until the Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds
sound returns. of each station detected.
1. Select RADIO mode.
Shuffle
2. Short press SCAN/AS, the radio
Press to shuffle the tracks in CD. automatically scans up the selected
waveband.
Repeat
3. Short press SCAN/AS again to
Press to repeat the current track. continue listening to a station.
Next Folder Station Preset Buttons

Press to go to the next folder in CD. This feature allows you to store your
favorite stations, you can recall them by
Previous Folder selecting the appropriate waveband and
pressing one of the preset buttons.
Press to go to the previous folder in CD.
1. Select a waveband.
Scroll Display 2. Tune to the station required.
Press to scroll the items in the LCD display. 3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons until you hear a beep. When
Menu Back you store a station, the preset number
along with the station name or
Press to return to previous screen in the
frequency is displays for confirmation.
display.
Note: You can repeat this on each
CD or AUX waveband and for each preset button.
Press to listen to a CD, or toggle between
the source CD and AUX.
285
Audio System
Note: When you drive to another part of the AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
country, stations that broadcast on
alternative frequencies and store on the AM/FM/CD/SYNC
preset buttons, may update with the correct
frequency and station name for that area. WARNING
Autostore Control loss of vehicle control, crash and
This stores up to a maximum of the six injury. We strongly recommend that
strongest signals available, either from the you use extreme caution when using any
AM or the FM waveband and overwrites device that may take your focus off the
the previously stored stations. You can also road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
store stations manually in the same way operation of your vehicle. We recommend
as other wavebands. against the use of any hand-held device
1. Select RADIO mode. voice-operated systems when possible.
2. Long press SCAN/AS. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
3. When the search is complete, sound
restores and the strongest signals store
on the autostore presets.
Note: An integrated multi-function display,
above the audio system shows important
information about your audio system
controls.
286
Audio System
E247756
A Function buttons. M Cd eject.

B Seek, fast forward and reverse. N CD.
C Volume and power. O CD slot.
D OK and cursor arrows.
E Number block.
F TA.
G Info.
H Sound.
I Menu.
J Phone.
K Aux.
L Radio.
287
Audio System
Function Buttons OK and Cursor Arrows

Use the up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When you make
your selection, press the left and right
arrow buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
Number Block
In radio mode, store your favorite stations
for later access. When tuned to any station,
press and hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, press a button to
select a track. In phone mode, press the
buttons to enter a phone number.
1 2 3 4 TA
Press to switch traffic announcements on
or off. This also cancels announcements
during an active announcement.
E104157 A Note: Traffic announcements may not be
available in all areas.
Select different functions of the audio
system depending on which mode you are Info
in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
Press to access radio, CD, USB and device
Note: Function buttons 1 to 4 are context information.
dependent, and change according to the
current unit mode. The description for the Sound
function displays in the screen.
Press to access settings for Treble,
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to select the
In radio mode, select a frequency band and various settings. When you make your
press either button. The system stops at selection, press the left and right arrow
the first station it finds in that direction. In buttons to change the settings. Press OK
CD mode, press to select the next or to set or press MENU to exit. Sound
previous track. Press and hold to move settings can be set for each audio source
quickly forward or backward through the independently.
current track.
Menu
Volume and Power
Press this button to access different audio
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch system features.
the system on and off.
288
Audio System
Phone Waveband Button

Press this to access the phone features of Press RADIO to select from the
the SYNC system. See your SYNC wavebands available.
information You can use the selector to return to radio
Aux reception if you are listening to another
source.
Press to access the AUX and SYNC Alternatively, press the left arrow to display
features, it also cancels the menu or list the available wavebands. Scroll to the
browsing. required waveband and press OK.
Radio Station Tuning Control
Press to listen to the radio or change radio
Seek Tuning
stations. Press the function buttons below
the radio screen to select different radio Select a waveband and briefly press one
functions. of the seek buttons. The unit stops at the
first station it finds in that direction.
CD
Manual Tuning
Press to listen to a CD. Press the function
buttons below the radio screen to select 1. Press function button 2.
on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle. 2. Use the left and right arrow to tune up
or down the waveband in small
On, Off Control increments, or press and hold to scroll
Press the On, Off control. This also quickly.
operates the unit for up to one hour after 3. Press OK to continue listening to a
you switch the ignition off. station.
The radio automatically turns off after one
Scan Tuning
hour.
Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds
Sound Button of each station detected.
This allows you to adjust the sound 1. Press function button 3.
settings (for example bass, middle and 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or
treble). down the selected waveband.
1. Press SOUND. 3. Press function button 3 again, or OK
2. Use the up and down arrow to select to continue listening to a station.
the required setting.
Station Preset Buttons
3. Use the left and right arrow to make
the necessary adjustment. The display Note: When you drive to another part of the
indicates the level. country, stations that broadcast on
4. Press OK to confirm the new settings. alternative frequencies and are stored on
preset buttons, may update to the correct
frequency and station name for that area.
289
Audio System
This feature allows you to store your Before you can receive traffic
favorite stations, you can also recall them announcements, you must press either TA
by selecting the appropriate waveband or TRAFFIC. A TA display appears to show
and pressing one of the preset buttons. the feature is on.
1. Select a waveband. If you are listening to a station that
2. Tune to a station. broadcasts traffic information, TP also
displays. Otherwise, the unit searches for
3. Press and hold one of the preset a traffic program.
buttons until you hear a beep. The
preset number along with the station Traffic information broadcasts
name or frequency displays after you automatically interrupt normal radio or CD
store the station. playback and appear in the display.
You can repeat this on each waveband and If you select a non-traffic station using a
for each preset button. preset button, the audio unit remains on
that station unless you switch TA or
Autostore Control TRAFFIC off, then on again.
This stores up to a maximum of the six Traffic Announcement Volume

strongest signals available, either from the
AM or the FM waveband and overwrite the Traffic announcements interrupt normal
previously stored stations. You can also broadcasts at a preset minimum level that
store stations manually in the same way is usually louder than normal listening
as other wavebands. volumes.
1. Press and hold function button 1 or To adjust the preset volume:

RADIO. • Use the volume control to make the
2. When the search is complete, sound necessary adjustment during an
returns and the strongest signals are incoming traffic announcement
stored on the autostore presets. broadcast. The display shows the level.
Ending Traffic Announcements

Traffic Information Control
Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any
Many stations that broadcast on the FM
other time it turns all announcements off.
waveband have a TP code to signify that
they carry traffic program information. The audio unit returns to normal operation
at the end of each traffic announcement.
Turning Traffic Announcements On and To end the announcement prematurely,
Off press TA or TRAFFIC during the
announcement.
Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or
manual tune to a non-TA station, you do Automatic Volume Control
not hear a traffic announcement.
Note: When you are listening to a When available, automatic volume control
non-traffic announcement station and (AVC) adjusts the volume level to
switch traffic announcement on and off compensate for engine noise and road
again, a TP seek occurs. speed noise.
1. Press MENU and select Audio or Audio
settings.
290
Audio System
2. Select AVC LEVEL or Adaptive 1. Press MENU.

volume. 2. Select Audio or Audio settings.
3. Use the left or right arrow to adjust the 3. Scroll to News and press OK.
setting.
4. Press MENU to return.
4. Press OK to confirm your selection.
5. Press MENU to return. Alternative Frequencies
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) The majority of programs that broadcast
on the FM waveband have a program
DSP Occupancy identification code. Audio units can
recognize that broadcast.
This feature takes into account the
differences in distance from the various When your vehicle moves from one
speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Select transmission area to another with the
the sitting position to set the best audio alternative frequencies tuning switched
enhancement. on, this function searches for the strongest
station signal.
DSP Equalizer Under certain conditions, alternative
Select the music category that most suits frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt
your listening preference. The audio output normal reception.
changes to enhance the particular style of When selected, the unit continually
music chosen. evaluates signal strength and, if a better
signal becomes available, the unit switches
Changing the DSP Settings to that alternative. It mutes while it checks
1. Press MENU. a list of alternative frequencies and if
necessary, it searches once across the
2. Select Audio or Audio settings. selected waveband for a genuine
3. Scroll to the required DSP function. alternative frequency.
4. Use the up and down arrow to select It restores radio reception when it finds one
the required setting. or, if it cannot find one, the unit returns to
5. Press OK to confirm your selection. the original stored frequency.
6. Press MENU to return. When selected, AF shows in the display.
1. Press MENU.
News Broadcasts
2. Select Audio or Audio settings.
Your audio unit may interrupt normal 3. Scroll to Alt. frequency and press OK.
reception to broadcast news bulletins from
stations on the FM waveband, radio data 4. Press MENU to return.
system (RDS) or other enhanced network
linked stations. Regional Mode
The display indicates there is an incoming Regional mode controls the behavior of
announcement, during news broadcasts. alternative frequencies switching between
When the audio unit interrupts for a news regionally related networks of a parent
broadcast, the preset volume level is the broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a large
same as traffic announcements. network across a large part of the country.
At various times of the day, this large
291
Audio System
network may be broken down into a AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

number of smaller regional networks,
typically centered on major towns or cities. AM/FM/CD/SYNC
The whole network carries the same
programming when not split into regional WARNING
variants. Driving while distracted can result in
Regional mode ON: This prevents random loss of vehicle control, crash and
alternative frequency switches when injury. We strongly recommend that
neighboring regional networks are not you use extreme caution when using any
carrying the same programming. device that may take your focus off the
Regional mode OFF: This allows larger operation of your vehicle. We recommend
coverage areas if neighboring regional against the use of any hand-held device
networks are carrying the same while driving and encourage the use of
programming, but can cause random voice-operated systems when possible.
alternative frequency switches if they are Make sure you are aware of all applicable
not. local laws that may affect the use of
1. Press MENU. electronic devices while driving.
2. Select Audio or Audio settings.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
3. Scroll to RDS regional and press OK.
package, your system may look different
4. Press MENU to return. from what you see here.
Note: Some features may not be available
in your location.
292
Audio System
E247757
A CD. M CD slot.
B Sound. N Play/pause.
C Mute or TA. O Answer or make phone call.
D Clock. P Volume and power.
E Display screen. Q Menu.
F Number block. R Phone.
G Function buttons. S Media.
H Seek, fast forward and reverse. T Radio.
I Tune.
CD
J End phone call.
Press to listen to a CD. Press the function
K OK and cursor arrows. buttons below the radio screen to select
L CD eject. on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
293
Audio System
Sound Function Buttons

Press to access settings for Treble, Select different functions of the audio
Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the system depending on which mode you are
up and down arrow buttons to select the in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
various settings. When you make your
selection, press the left and right arrow Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
buttons to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit. Sound In radio mode, select a frequency band and
settings can be set for each audio source press either button. The system stops at
independently. the first station it finds in that direction. In
CD mode, press to select the next or
Mute (If Equipped) previous track. Press and hold to move
quickly forward or backward through the
Press to mute the playing audio. current track.
TA (If Equipped) Tune

Press to switch traffic announcements on Turn to search through the radio frequency
or off. This also cancels announcements band. The system stops at the first station
during an active announcement. it finds in that direction.
Note: Traffic announcements may not be End Phone Call
available in all areas.
Press to end a phone call.
Clock
OK and Cursor Arrows
Press to access the clock setting. Use the
center arrow controls to change the hours Use the up and down arrow buttons to
and minutes. You can also set the clock by select the various settings. When you make
pressing MENU and scrolling to Clock your selection, press the left and right
Settings. If not in phone mode, press to arrow buttons to change the settings.
display the clock. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
Display Screen CD Eject

Shows audio and SYNC information. Press to eject a CD.
Number Block CD Slot

In radio mode, store your favorite stations Insert a CD.
for later access. When tuned to any station,
press and hold a preset button until sound Play/Pause
returns. In CD mode, press a button to Press to either play or pause a track when
select a track. In phone mode, press the listening to a CD.
buttons to enter a phone number.
Answer or Make a Phone Call
Press to either answer or make a phone
call.
294
Audio System
Volume and Power AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch AM/FM/CD/SYNC/
the system on and off. TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY
Menu
WARNING
Press this button to access different audio Driving while distracted can result in
system features. loss of vehicle control, crash and
Phone you use extreme caution when using any
Press this to access the phone features of device that may take your focus off the
the SYNC system. See your SYNC road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
information. operation of your vehicle. We recommend
Media while driving and encourage the use of
Press to access or switch between your Make sure you are aware of all applicable
auxiliary media devices. local laws that may affect the use of
Radio
Press to listen to the radio or change radio
stations. Press the function buttons below
the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
295
Audio System
E248373
A Volume and power. Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse

B CD slot. In radio mode, select a radio station and
press either button. The system stops at
C Tune the first station it finds in that direction. In
D Seek, fast forward and reverse. CD mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to move
E CD eject.
quickly forward or backward through the
current track.
Volume and Power
CD Eject
Press to switch the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot
Insert a CD.
Tune
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
296
Audio System
RADIO You can temporarily remove the mast by

unscrewing it from the base.
Antenna
The antenna is at the front edge of the COMPACT DISC PLAYER
cabin roof. The antenna consists of an
adjustable angle mast and an amplified Compact Disc Playback
base. You can temporarily fold the mast Note: During playback, the display indicates
flat to avoid damage when carrying loads the disc, track and time that have elapsed
over the cabin. You can also adjust the since the start of the track.
mast to a more vertical position for better
radio reception performance. During radio reception, press CD once to
start CD playback.
After loading a disc, playback starts
immediately.
Track Selection
• Press the seek up once to move to the
next track or press it repeatedly to
access later tracks.
• Press the seek down once to replay the
current track. When pressing within two
E226264
seconds of the start of a track, the
previous track plays.
Note: Radio reception quality is significantly • Press the seek down repeatedly to
reduced if you fold the antenna flat. It is not select previous tracks.
recommended to leave antenna in this
position. • Press the up or down arrow to select
the required track, then press OK.
Select a track by using the numeric keypad.
Dial the track number until complete (for
example, 1 then 2 for track 12), or dial the
number and directly press OK.
Fast Forward and Reverse

Press and hold the seek up or down to
search forward or backward through the
tracks.
E226265 Shuffle and Random

Note: Remove the antenna mast before Random track playback, also known as
entering a car wash. Make sure you firmly shuffle, plays all tracks on the CD in
screw in the mast when reattaching it to random order.
maintain optimum radio reception.
297
Audio System
Type One Press function button 1.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the Compact Disc Track Scanning
system can shuffle tracks for the whole CD,
or within the current folder. The scan function allows you to preview
each track for approximately 8 seconds.
Press shuffle in CD MODE.
Type One
Type Two
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
system can scan tracks on the CD or within
the current folder.
or within the current folder.
Press CD/AUX to select CD MODE.
Press MENU and select CD MODE.
Lightly press SCAN/AS to scan CD.
Select shuffle to switch the function on or
off. Type Two
Type Three Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
system can scan tracks on the CD or within
the current folder. Press OK to toggle these
options.
or within the current folder.
Various scan modes are possible,
Press function button 2.
according to the type of CD currently
Use the seek up or down button to select playing.
the next track to shuffle, if required.
Press MENU and select CD MODE.
Repeat Compact Disc Tracks Select SCAN to switch the function on or
off.
Type One
Type Three
system can repeat the current track or all Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the
tracks within the current folder. system can scan tracks on the CD or within
Press REPEAT in CD MODE. the current folder.
Press function button 3.
Type Two
MP3 File Playback
system can repeat the current track or all MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) is a standard
tracks within the current folder. technology and format for compressing
Press MENU and select CD MODE. audio data. This allows a more efficient
use of the media.
Select REPEAT to switch the function on
or off. The track replays after it ends. The system can play MP3 files recorded
on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW formats.
Type Three The disc must be in the ISO 9660 level 1
or level 2 format, or Joliet or Romeo in the
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, the expansion format. It also uses a disc
system can repeat the current track or all recorded in multi session.
tracks within the current folder.
298
Audio System
ISO 9660 Format Putting the extension MP3 to a file other

than MP3, the unit cannot recognize the
This is the most common international file correctly and generates random noise
standard for the logical format of files and that could damage your speakers.
folders on a CD-ROM.
The following discs take a longer time to
There are several specification levels. In start playback:
Level 1, file names must be in the 8.3
format (no more than eight characters in • A disc recorded with complicated tree
the name, no more than three characters structure.
in the extension MP3 and WMA) and in • A disc recorded in multi session.
capital letters. • A non-finalized disc, where you can add
Folder names can be no longer than eight more data.
characters. There can be no more than
eight folder levels (trees). Level 2 Playing a Multi Session Disc
specifications allow file names up to 31 When the first track of the first session is
characters long. audio CD data only, the audio CD data of
Each folder can have up to eight trees. the first session plays. Non-audio CD data,
MP3 file information (such as track number
For Joliet or Romeo in the expansion and time) displays with no sound.
format, consider these restrictions when
configuring your CD writing software. When the first track of the first session is
not audio CD data:
Multi Session • If an MP3 file is on the disc, the system
This recording method enables adding of skips these file and other data. Audio
data using the track-at-once method. CD data is not recognized.
Conventional CDs begin at a CD control • If no MP3 file is in the disc, nothing
area called the lead-in and end at an area plays. Audio CD data is not recognized.
called lead-out. A multi session CD is a CD MP3 Files Playback Order
having multiple sessions, with each
segment from lead-in to lead-out regarded Note: The system skips any folder that does
as a single session. not include an MP3 file.
CD-Extra: The format that records audio To specify a desired playback order before
(audio CD data) as tracks on session 1, and the folder or file name, input the order by
records data as tracks on session 2. number (for example, 01 or 02) then record
Mixed CD: In this format, data records as the contents onto a disc. The order differs
track 1 and audio (audio CD data) records depending on the writing software.
as track 2. The playback order of the folders and files
are as shown.
File Formats
With formats other than ISO 9660 level 1
and level 2, folder names or file names may
not display correctly.
When naming, be sure to add the file
extension MP3 to the file name.
299
Audio System
MP3 Navigation
You can record MP3 tracks on the CD in
several ways. You can place them in the
root directory like a conventional audio CD,
or in folders that may represent categories,
such as album, artist, or genre.
The normal playing sequence on CDs with
multiple folders is:
• Play the tracks within the root (top
level) first.
• Then the tracks in any folder(s) within
the root.
• Then move onto the second folder, and
so forth.
To navigate to a track:
1. Press the up or down arrow buttons to
enter the track list.
2. Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow
buttons to select another folder or
E104206 track (file).
3. Press OK to select a highlighted track.
ID3 Tag Version 2
MP3 Display Options
The following occurs when an MP3 file
containing a tag plays: When an MP3 disc is playing, limited
• When skipping a portion of a tag (at information encoded in each track
the beginning of the track) there is no displays. Such information normally
sound output. Skip time changes includes:
depending on the tag capacity. • The file name.
Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2
seconds (with RealJukebox). • The folder name.
• The displayed elapsed playing time • ID3 information (album or artist name).
when skipping a portion of the tag is The unit normally shows the file name that
inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rate is playing. To select one of the other items
other than 128 kbps, time does not of information, press INFO repeatedly until
display accurately during playback. the required item appears in the display.
• When an MP3 file is created with MP3
conversion software (such as CD Text Display Options
RealJukebox - a registered trademark Note: You can select these display options
of RealNetworks Inc.), the tag in the same way as MP3 displays.
generates.
300
Audio System
When an audio disc with CD text is playing,

limited information encoded in each track
displays. Such information normally
includes:
• The disc name.
• The artist name.
• The track name.
Ending Compact Disc Playback

To restore radio reception on all units,
press RADIO. E149149
Note: The CD does not eject. The disc The auxiliary input jack allows you to
pauses at the point where radio reception connect and play music from your portable
returned. music player through your vehicle speakers.
To resume CD playback, press CD again. You can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. Your
audio extension cable must have male
AUDIO INPUT JACK connectors at each end.
1. Make sure your vehicle is stationary
WARNINGS with the audio unit and the portable
Driving while distracted can result in music player switched off.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
device into the audio input jack.
device that may take your focus off the 3. Switch on the radio and select either a
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe tuned FM station or a CD.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend 4. Adjust the volume as desired.
while driving and encourage the use of 5. Switch on your device and adjust the
voice-operated systems when possible. volume to half the maximum level.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable 6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN
local laws that may affect the use of appears in the display. You should hear
electronic devices while driving. music from your device even if it is low.
Always place your device in a secure 7. Adjust the volume on your device until
location in your vehicle so it does not it reaches the volume level of the FM
become a projectile in a sudden stop station or CD. Do this by switching back
or crash. Failure to follow this instruction and forth between the AUX and FM or
could result in personal injury. CD controls.
Use the vehicle audio unit buttons to
restore playback from the vehicle audio
unit, while your device remains connected.
Note: The audio extension cable must be
long enough for you to safely store the
device when your vehicle is moving.
301
Audio System
Note: For optimum performance when Type Two

using any auxiliary device set the volume on
the device high. This reduces audio
interference when charging the device using
A B
the vehicle power supply.
Note: For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your device while
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)

Type One E217516
A A LINE IN.
B USB ports.
Type Three
E217515
A LINE IN.
E211463
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
302
Audio System
Audio unit display Rectification
Please check CD General error message for CD fault conditions, such as

cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure
the disc is loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or
replace disc with known music disc. If error persists
contact your dealer.
CD drive malfunction General error message for CD fault conditions such as
possible mechanism fault.
CD drive high temp. Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until
it has cooled down.
IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE General error message for iPod fault conditions, such
as cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted
correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.
303
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING

E198355
This allows you to:

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your • Make and receive calls
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and • Access and play music from your
portable media player. media player
304
• Use Emergency Assistance and When using SYNC:

*
applications, via SYNC Applink • Do not operate playing devices if the
• Access phonebook contacts and music power cords or cables are broken, split
using voice commands or damaged. Carefully place cords and
cables where you cannot step on them
• Stream music from your connected cell
or they do not interfere with the
phone
operation of pedals, seats,
• Select pre-defined text messages (if compartments or safe driving abilities.
your device supports this)
• Do not leave playing devices in your
• Use the advanced voice recognition vehicle during extreme conditions as it
system could cause them damage. Refer to
• Charge your USB device (if your device your device's manual for further
supports this) information.
*
These features are not available in all • Do not attempt to service or repair the
markets and may require activation. system. See an authorized dealer.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Privacy Information
Make sure that you review your device's When a cell phone is connected to SYNC,
manual before using it with SYNC. the system creates a profile that is linked
to that cell phone. The system creates the
Support profile to offer you more mobile features
and to operate more efficiently. Among
For further support, see an authorized other things, this profile may contain data
dealer. For more information, visit the about your phonebook, text messages
regional Ford website. (read and unread) and call history. This
will include the history of calls when your
Safety Information cell phone was not connected to the
system. If you connect a media player, the
WARNING system creates and retains an index of
Driving while distracted can result in supported media content. The system also
loss of vehicle control, crash and records a short development log of
injury. We strongly recommend that approximately 10 minutes of all recent
you use extreme caution when using any system activity. The log profile and other
device that may take your focus off the system data may be used to improve the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe system and help diagnose any problems
operation of your vehicle. We recommend that may occur.
against the use of any hand-held device The cell phone profile, media player index
while driving and encourage the use of and development log will remain in the
voice-operated systems when possible. system unless deleted. They are generally
Make sure you are aware of all applicable accessible in your vehicle only when you
local laws that may affect the use of connect your cell phone or media player.
electronic devices while driving. If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you complete
a master reset to erase all stored
information. See SYNC™ (page ?).
305
Special equipment is required to access USING VOICE RECOGNITION

system data. Access to your vehicle's
SYNC module is also required. We will not This system helps you control many
access the system data for any purpose features using voice commands. This
other than as described without consent. allows you to keep your hands on the
Examples where system data can be steering wheel and focus on what is in front
accessed are for a court order, where of you.
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third Initiating a Voice Session
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information Press the voice button. A list of
independently of us. Further privacy available voice commands
information is available. See SYNC™ E142599 appears in the display.
Applications and Services (page 319).
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
(cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You

can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
(main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses

Helpful Hints
between words.
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is • You can interrupt the system at any
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from time while it is speaking by pressing the
open windows and road vibrations may voice button. You can cancel a voice
prevent the system from correctly session by pressing and holding the
recognizing spoken commands. voice button.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
306
System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of

interaction in order to help you learn to use
The system provides feedback through the system. You can change these settings
audible tones, prompts, questions and at any time.
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less Press the voice button. When
instruction and feedback. prompted, say:
E142599
Voice Command Action and Description
voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting, press the voice button and when prompted say:
voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations, the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
307
To adjust this setting, press the voice button and when prompted say:
voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on When switched on, this feature prompts
you to confirm any voice initiated call
command prior to placing the call.
phone confirmation off The system makes a best guess; you may
still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
• Redialing.
Changing the Voice Settings
• Call waiting notification.
In addition to using voice commands to
• Caller identification.
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display. Other features such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
To change the voice settings press the download are cell phone dependent
Menu button then select: features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, refer to your device's manual
Menu Item or visit the regional Ford website.
SYNC-Settings
Pairing a Cell Phone For the First
Voice settings Time
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the
system allows you to make and receive
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR hands-free calls.
PHONE
Note: You must switch the ignition and
Hands-free calling is one of the main radio on.
features of SYNC. While the system Note: To scroll through the menus, press
supports a variety of features, many are the up or down arrows on your audio system.
dependent on your cell phone's
1. Make sure you switch on the Bluetooth
functionality.
feature on your cell phone before
At a minimum, most cell phones with starting the search. Refer to your
Bluetooth wireless technology support the device's manual if necessary.
following functions: 2. Press the PHONE button. When the
• Answering an incoming call. audio display indicates that no phones
• Ending a call. are paired, select the option to add.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
308
3. When a message to begin pairing

appears in the audio display, search for Press the voice button and when
SYNC on your cell phone to start the prompted say:
pairing process.
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
4. Select SYNC on your cell phone. tion
5. Wait until the PIN appears on the
phone display. Compare the PIN on the (pair ([Bluetooth] Follow the instruc-
phone with the PIN shown in the audio device | phone | tions on the audio
display and accept the request on the Bluetooth audio) | display.
phone and the vehicle display. The add phone)
display indicates when the pairing is Words in square brackets [ ] are optional
successful. and do not have to be spoken for the
Note: In some cases, the phone will request system to understand the command.
to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN
provided by the system in the audio display. Depending on your phone's capability and
The display indicates when the pairing is your market, the system may prompt you
successful. with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
Depending on your cell phone's capability
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
and your market, the system may prompt
first upon vehicle start-up) and
you with questions such as setting the
downloading your phonebook.
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone the system Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
automatically tries to connect with first
when you switch the ignition on) or Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the
downloading your phonebook. system allows you to make and receive
The information display may hands-free calls.
show your cell phone's battery Note: You must switch the ignition and
charge level and signal strength. radio on.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
Using Voice Commands the up or down arrows on your audio system.
Make sure to switch on your 1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on
phone's Bluetooth feature your cell phone is switched on before
E142599 before starting the search. See starting the search. Refer to your
your device's manual if necessary. device's manual if necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device to start the
pairing process.
309
7. Select SYNC on your cell phone. Voice Command

8. Wait until the PIN appears on the
phone display. Compare the PIN on the dial [[a] number] 1
phone with the PIN shown in the audio

display and accept the request on the ([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to 2
phone and the vehicle display. The phone | handsfree off)

display indicates when the pairing is
(hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2
successful.
Note: In some cases, the phone will request join (calls | call) 2
to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN

provided by the system in the audio display. mute call [on] 2
The display indicates when the pairing is
successful. (mute call off | un-mute call) 2
The system may prompt you with

questions such as setting the current cell (turn ringer on | silent mode off)
phone as the primary cell phone or
downloading your phonebook. (turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
[text] (messages | message) 3
Cell Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when help
prompted say:
E142599 ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
Voice Command group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone) 1
See Dial table below.
Then say any of the following: 2
These commands are only valid while in
call (___) a phone call.
3
See the text message table below.
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work) Dial Commands
call ___ on (cell | mobile) Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
call ___ on other
Pound This will add a # symbol to the number or name.

Number 0 (zero) to 9 (nine)
Asterisk or Star This will add a * symbol to the number or name.
clear Deletes all entered digits
310
(delete | correct) Deletes the last set of entered digits.

Plus This will add a + symbol to the number or name.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or any button on the audio unit.
To end the call, press the end call button

Phonebook Hints on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display and press OK.
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name, browse phonebook, select a contact Receiving a Call
and press:
When receiving a call, you can:
Menu Item • Answer the call by pressing the accept
call button on the steering wheel or by
Hear it selecting the accept call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
Making a Call button.
Press the voice button and when prompted • Reject the call by pressing the reject
say either: call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the reject call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
Voice
Action and Description button.
Command
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
call [[a] SYNC prompts you to say
name] the name you wish to dial. Cell Phone Options During an
Active Call
dial [[a] SYNC prompts you to say
number] the numbers that you wish During an active call, you have extra menu
to dial. After you say the features which become available, for
numbers, the system example putting a call on hold.
confirms it. To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
When the system has stated the audio display or select the option for more.
number, you say any of the following:
Voice
Action and Description
Command
(dial | This initiates the call.

send)
(delete | To erase the last spoken
correct) digit.
clear To erase all spoken digits.
311
Menu Item Action and Description
Mic. off Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone
on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your
cell phone for a more private conversation. When selected,
the audio display will indicate the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
will indicate the call is on hold.
Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system numeric keypad, for
example numbers for passwords.
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of
three callers on a multi-party or conference call.
1. Select the option for more.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the option for more.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.

2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call history Access your call history log.

2. Scroll to the option until call history appears. Press the
OK button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
312
Accessing Features Through the The system attempts to automatically

Cell Phone Menu re-download your phonebook and call
history each time your cell phone connects
You can access your call history, to the system. You must turn on the auto
phonebook, sent text messages as well as download feature if your cell phone
access cell phone and system settings. supports it.
You can also access advanced features
such as emergency assistance. Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
cell phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
Dial a number Dial a number using the audio system numeric keypad.
Redial Redial the last number called (if available). Press the OK
button to select.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to quickly access
an alphabetical category. You can also use the letters on
the keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
Call history Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.

1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select either incoming calls, outgoing calls or
missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection.
Speed Dial Select one of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and press and hold one of the numbers
on the audio system numeric keypad.
Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.
BT Devices Access the following option for Bluetooth device menu list-
ings:
Add
313
Delete
Conn.
Discon.
Master
Phone settings View various settings and features on your cell phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature

Text Messaging and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 5 km/h or less.
The system allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The When a new message arrives, an audible
system can also read incoming text tone sounds and the audio display
messages to you so that you do not have indicates you have a new message.
to take your eyes off the road.
To hear the message you can say:
Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature. Voice command Action and Descrip-
tion
Receiving a Text Message
(listen to | read) Select this option
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. ([text] message) to have the system
Your phone must support downloading text read the message
messages using Bluetooth to receive to you.
incoming text messages.
Using the screen, you also have the following options:

Menu Action and Description
Item
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
314
Menu Action and Description

Item
Reply to Press the OK button to access, and then scroll

sender through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward Press the OK button to forward the message to
msg. anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and

Sending, Downloading and Deleting then press the OK button.
Your Text Messages
Choose from the following:
New When you select the option to send a text message, a list of
pre-defined messages appear in the audio display. Allows
you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set
of 15 messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and in addition provides
the option to have the message read out to you by the system.
To go to the next message select the more option. This allows
you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the
message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system
(not your cell phone). The audio display indicates when all
your text messages have been deleted.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or to manually trigger a
download of all unread messages from your cell phone.
2. Select the confirmation option when

Sending a Text Message the contact appears and press the OK
1. Select the send option when the button again to confirm when the
desired selection is highlighted in the system asks if you would like to send
audio display. the message. Each text message is
sent with a pre-defined signature.
315
Note: You can send text messages two Accessing Your Cell Phone
ways. You can chose a contact from your Settings
phonebook, call history or by entering a
phone number and selecting the text option These are cell phone dependent features.
from the audio display. You can also reply Your cell phone settings allow you to
to a received message in the inbox. access and adjust features such as your
ringtone, text message notification, modify
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text your phonebook and set up automatic
message. download.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
Set as master If this option is checked, the system will use this cell phone
as the master when there is more than one cell phone paired
to the system. This option can be changed for all paired cell
phones (not only for the active one) using the Bluetooth
devices menu.
Phone status See the cell phone name, provider name, cell phone number,
signal level and battery level. When done, press the left arrow
button to return to the cell phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's or your cell phone's). If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone's ringtone sounds
when you choose the cell phone ringtone option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when
a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn the
audible tone on or off.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook, such as add, delete,
or download. Press the OK button to select and scroll
between the options in the table below.
To modify the phone book preferences,

choose from the following:
316
Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current
phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to
the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook
to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is switched on, any changes,
additions or deletions saved in the system since your last
download are deleted.
When automatic download is switched off, your phonebook
will not be downloaded when your cell phone connects to
the system.
Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be
accessed when your paired cell phone is connected to the
system.
Check or uncheck this option to automatically download your
phonebook each time your cell phone connects to the system.
Downloading times are cell phone dependent and quantity
dependent.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options

Bluetooth Devices
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth devices. Use the arrow buttons 2. Scroll until the Bluetooth device option
to scroll through the menu options. It appears, then press the OK button.
allows you to add, connect and delete 3. Scroll to select from the following
devices and set a cell phone as primary. options:
Add Pair additional cell phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual if necessary.
3. Select SYNC on your cell phone.
317
4. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare

the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio
display and accept the request on the phones and the
vehicles display. The display indicates when the pairing
*
is successful.
5. When the option to set the cell phone as the primary cell
phone appears, select either yes or no.
6. Depending on the functionality of your cell phone, the
system may ask you extra questions (for example, if you
would like to download your phonebook). Select either
yes or no to confirm your response.
Delete After deleting a cell phone from the list, the cell phone can
only be connected again by repeating the full pairing process.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks
to delete the selected device.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cell phone
every time you switch the ignition on. When a cell phone is
selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked
with an asterisk.
Set a previously paired cell phone as your primary cell phone.
Select the master option to confirm the primary cell phone.
Conn. Connect a previously paired cell phone. You can only have
one cell phone connected at a time to use the cell phone
functionality. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous cell phone will be disconnected from the telephone
services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth
devices for the cell phone functionality and the Bluetooth
audio music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cell phone. Select this option and
confirm when asked to. After disconnecting a cell phone, it
can be connected again without repeating the full pairing
process.
*
In some cases, the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by
the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and

System Settings then press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button. 3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
318
Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to turn the Bluetooth interface

of the system on or off. Select this option then press the OK
button to change the option's status.
Set defaults This selection does not erase your indexed information
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices).
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. Return to the factory default settings.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored on the system
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices)
and return to the factory default settings.
display. The display indicates when complete and the system
takes you back to the previous menu.
Install on SYNC Install applications or software updates you have down-
loaded.
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB thumb drive in order to finish an
installation successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number.
Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page ?).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up or down arrows
to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right
arrows to enter and leave a folder. Media content can be
directly selected for playback from this menu.
Press the MENU button to enter the

system menu.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
A list of available applications appears.
Each application may have its own specific
settings.
319
Message Description and Action
SYNC-Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK.
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the

SYNC Emergency Assistance (If fuel pump shut off, the system may
Equipped) contact emergency services through a
paired and connected cell phone. For more
WARNINGS information about the system and
For this feature to work, your mobile Emergency Assistance, visit the regional
phone must be Bluetooth-enabled Ford website.
and compatible with the system. Note: Before selecting this feature, you
Always place your phone in a secure must read the Emergency Assistance privacy
location in your vehicle so it does not notice later in this section for important
become a projectile or get damaged information.
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause Note: When you switch this feature on or
serious injury to someone or damage the off, that setting applies for all paired cell
phone which could prevent Emergency phones. If you have turned this feature off
Assistance from working properly. and a previously paired phone connects
Unless the Emergency Assistance when you switch on the ignition, either a
setting is on prior to a collision, the voice message plays, a display message or
system does not attempt to place icon is shown, or both.
an emergency call. This could delay the Note: Every cell phone operates differently.
response time, increasing the risk of serious While this feature works with most cell
injury or death. phones, some cell phones may experience
Do not wait for Emergency difficulties using this feature.
Assistance to make an emergency Note: Make sure you are familiar with the
call if you can do it yourself. Dial information about airbag deployment. See
emergency services immediately to avoid Supplementary Restraints System (page
a delayed response time. If you do not hear 25).
Emergency Assistance within five seconds
of the crash, the system or cell phone may Switching Emergency Assistance On
be damaged or non-functional. and Off
Press the MENU button then select:
Message Action
SYNC-Apps Press OK.

Emerg. assist Press OK. Select the option you require and press OK.
320
Display Options • A connected cell phone must have

adequate network coverage, battery
If you switch on this feature, a confirmation
power and signal strength.
message appears in the display.
• Your vehicle must have battery power.
If you switch off this feature, a dialog will
appear in the display, which allows you to Note: This feature only works in countries
set a voice reminder. or regions where SYNC Emergency
Assistance can call the local emergency
Off with voice reminder provides a display services. Visit the regional Ford website for
and voice reminder when your cell phone details.
connects and your vehicle starts.
Off without voice reminder provides a In the Event of a Crash
display reminder only without a voice Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or
reminder when your cell phone connects. triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may
To make sure that Emergency Assistance turn on Emergency Assistance). However,
works correctly: if Emergency Assistance is triggered the
• The system must have power and be system tries to contact the emergency
working correctly at the time of the services. If a connected cell phone sustains
crash and during feature activation and damage or loses connection to the system,
use. it searches for and tries to connect to any
available previously paired cell phone. The
• You must switch on the feature before system attempts to make an emergency
a crash. call.
• You must have a cell phone connected Before making a call:
to the system.
• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
• In certain countries, it may be makes a successful call, an
necessary to have a valid and introductory message plays for the
registered SIM card with credit in order emergency operator. After this
to place and maintain an emergency message, there is hands-free
call. communication between your vehicle's
• For India only, if you are using a cell occupants and the operator.
phone equipped with multiple SIMs, • The system provides a short time
make sure that there is a default SIM window (approximately 10 seconds)
selected in the outbound call settings to cancel the call. If you do not cancel
of your phone. If not, an emergency call the call, the system attempts to make
may not be initiated during an an emergency call.
Emergency Assistance event, without
user interaction. Refer to your cell • The system plays a message letting
phone user manual to understand you know when it attempts to make an
more about outbound call settings. emergency call. You can cancel the call
by selecting the relevant function
• A connected cell phone must have the button or by pressing the end call
ability to make and maintain an button on the steering wheel.
outgoing call at the time of the crash.
321
During a call: Note: The emergency operator may also

• Emergency Assistance uses your receive information from the cellular
vehicle GPS or cellular network network such as cell phone number, cell
information when available to phone location and cell phone carrier name
determine the most appropriate independent from SYNC Emergency
language to use. It alerts the Assistance.
emergency operator of the crash and Emergency Assistance may not work if:
delivers the introductory message. This
• Your cell phone or Emergency
may include your vehicle GPS
Assistance hardware sustains damage
coordinates.
in the crash.
• The language the system uses to
• The vehicle battery or the system has
interact with the occupants of your
no power.
vehicle may differ from the language
used to deliver information to the • A crash ejects your cell phone from
emergency operator. your vehicle.
• After the delivery of the introductory • You do not have a valid and registered
message the voice line opens so that SIM card with credit in your cell phone.
you can speak hands-free with the • You are in a country or region where
emergency operator. the SYNC Emergency Assistance
• When the line is connected, you must cannot place the call. Visit the regional
be prepared to provide your name, Ford website for details.
phone number and location
information immediately. Important Information about the
Emergency Assistance Feature
Note: While the system provides
information to the emergency operator, the Emergency Assistance does not currently
system plays a message letting you know call emergency services in some countries.
it is sending important information. It then Visit the regional Ford website for the
lets you know when the line is open to start latest details.
hands-free communication.
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice
Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,
an emergency priority screen appears which When you switch on Emergency
contains vehicle GPS coordinates when Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
available. services that your vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
Note: It is possible that GPS location
airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut
information is not available at the time of
off. This feature has the capability to
the crash; in this case, Emergency
disclose your location information to the
Assistance will still attempt to place an
emergency operator or other details about
emergency call.
your vehicle or crash to provide the most
Note: It is possible that the emergency appropriate emergency services.
services will not receive the GPS
If you do not want to disclose this
coordinates; in this case, hands-free
information, do not switch on the feature.
communication with an emergency operator
is available.
322
SYNC AppLink Note: Make sure you have an active account

for the app that you have downloaded.
The system enables voice and manual Some apps will work automatically with no
control of SYNC AppLink enabled setup. Other apps will want you to configure
smartphone apps. Once an app is running your personal settings and personalize your
through AppLink, you can control main experience by creating stations or favorites.
features of the app through voice We recommend you do this at home or
commands and manual controls. outside of your vehicle.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Note: iPhone users need to connect the Scroll through the list of available
phone to the USB port. applications and press OK to select an
app. Once an app is running through SYNC,
Note: Android users need to connect the press the right arrow button to access the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. app menu. You can access various app
Note: For information on available apps, features from here, for example thumbs
supported smartphone devices and up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford button to exit the app menu.
website. Press the MENU button then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK.
Find new Apps Select this option if the app required is not listed.
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Command Description and Action
mobile (apps | applica- Say the name of the application after the tone. The applica-
tions) tion will start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app.
The following voice commands are always

available:
323
Command Description and Action
[main menu] help Use this command to hear a list of available voice commands.
mobile (apps | applica- The system will prompt you to say the name of the app to
tions) start it.
list [mobile] (apps | The system will list all of the currently available mobile apps.
applications)
find [new] [mobile] The system will search your connected mobile device for
(apps | applications) SYNC compatible apps.
(quit | exit | close) Use this command followed by the name of the app.
You can also say the name of any SYNC Enabling and Disabling Push
compitable app to start it on SYNC. To see Notifications
a list of the available voice commands for
Some apps can send push notifications. A
an app, say the name of an app followed
push notification is an alert from an app
by help. For example you could say
running in the background and is delivered
"Spotify help".
by voice, pop up or both. This may be
particularly useful for news or location
based apps.
Press the MENU button then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
SYNC-Settings
All Apps If push notifications are supported, this setting will be listed.
Select to enable or disable the feature as required.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
To use the system you must consent to
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
send and receive app authorization
usage statistics and debugging
information and updates, using the data
information. Updates may take place
plan associated with the connected device.
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
324
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford App Status

is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider, You can view the current status of an app
when your vehicle sends or receives data in the settings menu. There are three
through the connected device. This includes possible statuses:
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Update needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization
or a general permissions update is required.
Up-to-date No update is required.
Updating... The system is trying to receive an update.
Options in the settings menu:
Request Update If an update is required and you want to manually request

the update, for example when you are in a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Disable Updates Select this option to disable automatic updates.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the

App Permissions system may ask you to grant certain
Permissions are divided by groups. You can permissions, for example:
grant these group permissions individually. • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
You can change a permission group status information to the app including, but
any time when not driving, by using the not limited to: Fuel level, fuel
settings menu. consumption, engine speed, battery
voltage, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, ambient temperature, date
and time.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information, including,
but not limited to: MyKey, seatbelt
status, engine speeds, braking events,
brake pedal switch, acceleration,
accelerator pedal position, clutch pedal
switch, trip length, trip time, trip cost,
percent engine on time, and percent of
time at speed.
325
• To allow your vehicle to provide Confirm that the USB device has been
location information, including: GPS formatted correctly and has the following
and speed. specifications:
• To allow the app to send push • USB 2.0.
notifications using the vehicle display • File format must be FAT16/32.
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Note: NTFS file format is not supported.
Note: You will only need to grant The format of the audio files on the USB
permissions the first time you use an app device must be:
with SYNC. • MP3.
Note: We are not responsible or liable for • Non DRM protected WMA.
any damages or loss of privacy relating to • WAV.
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve us to provide • AAC.
to an app.
Connecting Your Media Player to
the USB Port
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
Note: If your media player has a power
MEDIA PLAYER switch, make sure you switch on the device.
You can access and play music from your To Connect Using Voice Commands
media player through your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
menu or voice commands. You can also port.
sort and play your music by specific 2. Press the voice button and when
categories, for example artist or albums. prompted say:
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
media player including: iPod, Zune, Plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
SYNC also supports audio formats, for
example MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Voice Command Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands. Refer to the media voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player])
appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
2. Press the Media button (next to the

To Connect Using the System Menu audio display) until an initializing
message appears in the display.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
326
Menu Item Description and Action
Browse USB Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu.
Choose from the following:
Menu Item
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Exit
What's Playing? Media Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when
At any time during playback, you can press
prompted say:
the voice button and ask the system what E142599
is playing. The system reads the metadata
tags of the current track, if populated.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
327
pause Pauses device playback.

play Resumes device playback.
play [album] ___
play all Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | Plays the next track on the current media.
chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | Plays the previous track on current media.
podcast | chapter | episode]
[play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a play list of similar genre to the one
currently playing.
play [song | track | title | file]
repeat off
repeat one [on] Repeats the current track.
shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current play list in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle off
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | At any time during playback, you can press
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what the voice button and ask the system what is
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what (if populated) of the current track.
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it Examples of USB Commands

could be the name of anything, such as a
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
group, artist or song. For example you
ways to find and play a song using voice.
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
328
• Play song "Penny Lane".

• Play "Penny Lane". Voice Command
If we wanted to play the entire album, we pause
can say:
play
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour". next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Bluetooth Audio
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast
The system is also capable of playing | chapter | episode]
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth. Media Menu Features
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
MEDIA button (next to the audio display) The media menu allows you to select how
or Source button, or press the voice button to play your music, for example by artist,
and when prompted say: genre, shuffle or repeat, and to find similar
music or reset the index of your USB
devices.
Voice Command
Press AUX to select USB playback.
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
Options This will enter the media menu.
Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
329
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice

recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset SYNC USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press MEDIA button (next to the audio

Accessing Your USB Song Library display) to select USB playback.
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist and track or even to browse what
is on your USB device.
If there are no media files to access, the

display indicates there is no media. If there
are media files, you have the following
options to scroll through and select:
Play all Play all indexed media files from your playing device one at
*
a time in numerical order.
1. Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the
display.
Playlists Access your playlists from formats, ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press OK.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press OK.
330
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. Once selected, the
system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetic-
*
ally.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press OK.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by albums.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired albums, and then press OK.
Genres Sort indexed music by genre type.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press OK.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC; other saved files are not
visible.
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on your flash drive,
and then press OK.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the numeric keypad to jump
in the list.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the

Accessing Your USB Song Library audio display) to select USB playback.
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
331
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media.
If there are media files, you have the following options:

Play all Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*
in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*
or MTP).
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
*
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by album.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
332
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and

then press the OK button.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
Line In Audio
Using Voice Commands
To access the Line in audio source and
You can access and view your USB songs
when prompted say:
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB Voice Command
port.
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio
Press the voice button and when video)
prompted, say any of the following
commands: USB 2 (If Equipped)
Voice Command Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
(browse | search | show) all (album | at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
albums) the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
vehicle's center console.
artists)
You can plug in an additional USB device
(browse | search | show) all (genre | into the second USB port.
genres)
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
(browse | search | show) all (playlist | iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
playlists) one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs but does not support playback from it.
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
Bluetooth Devices and System
(browse | search | show) album ___
Settings
(browse | search | show) artist ___
You can access these menus using the
(browse | search | show) genre ___ audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 308).
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
333
Voice Commands for Audio Radio Voice Commands

Sources
If you are listening to the radio,
Your voice system allows you to press the voice button, and then
change audio sources with a E142599 say any of the commands in the
E142599 simple voice command. following table.
Press the voice button and when If you are not listening to the radio,
prompted say: press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Radio
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use. You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
[tune [to]] AM 2 autoset)
Bluetooth (audio | stereo) [tune [to]] AM 2
(disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | [tune [to]] FM
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio autoset)
video)
[tune [to]] FM 2
Radio
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | autoset) preset ___
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this | [tune [to]] FM 1
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this) [tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
help
334
Voice Command Voice Command
[tune [to]] preset ___ [play | change to] track [number] ___
Tune repeat (track | song) [on] *
help repeat folder [on]
CD Voice Commands repeat off
If you are listening to a CD, press (shuffle | random | mix) [on | *
the voice button, and then say (tracks | songs) [on]]

E142599 any of the commands in the
following table. (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
If you are not listening to a CD, press (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
the voice button and, after the tone,
say: shuffle off
*
Voice Command You need to indicate to the system which
track or folder to repeat or shuffle when
(disc | CD [player]) play using these commands.
You can then say any of the following
commands. SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
pause Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
play should questions arise, please refer to the
tables below.
[play] next track To check your cell phone's compatibility,
[play] previous track visit the regional Ford website.
Cell phone issues
Issue Possible cause Possible solution
A lot of back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC performance.
During a call, I Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
can hear the it or removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible cell phone
other person
malfunction. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
but they cannot
hear me. is not set to off.
335
Cell phone issues
This is a cell phone-

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
SYNC is not it or removing the battery, then trying again.
able to down-
load my phone- Possible cell phone Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
book. SYNC by selecting the option to add.
malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by selecting the option to add.
The system
says "Phone- If the missing contacts are stored on your
book down- SIM card, try moving them to your cell
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell phone's memory.
SYNC phone- phone's capability. Remove any pictures or special ring tones
book is empty or associated with the missing contact.
is missing
contacts. You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
dependent feature.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying again.
I am having Try deleting your device from SYNC and
trouble deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
connecting my again.
cell phone to Possible cell phone
SYNC. malfunction. Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch off the auto download setting.
Text messaging This is a cell phone-
is not working dependent feature.
on SYNC.
336
Cell phone issues
Possible cell phone Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
malfunction. it or removing the battery, then trying again.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Make sure the connection status shows
Not Connected.
• Press the blue circle to enter the next
menu.
• Turn on Show Notifications.
• Turn on Sync Contacts.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC.
Repeat these steps for every other Sync
vehicle you are connected to.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text
messages to SYNC if it is unlocked.
Replying to text messages using SYNC is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
This is a cell phone- Access the text messaging menu of SYNC
dependent feature. to see if your cell phone supports the
Audible text feature. Press the PHONE button and then
messages do scroll and select the option for text
not work on my messaging, then press OK.
cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
337
USB and media issues
Try switching off the device, resetting it or

removing the battery, then trying again.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having cable.
trouble Possible device malfunc- Make sure you correctly insert the USB
connecting my tion. cable in to the device and your vehicle's
device. USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
recognize my
This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
device when I
temperatures.
start my vehicle.
This is a device-
Bluetooth audio dependent feature.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
does not
The device is not and press play on your device.
stream.
connected.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
SYNC does not information.
recognize music
The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
that is on my
corrupted. version.
device.
The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
338
USB and media issues
When I connect From the iPhone or iPod Touch music now

my iPhone or playing screen, select the audio device
iPod Touch airplay icon at the very bottom of your
through the iPhone or iPod Touch screen.
USB and
This is a device limitation. To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
Bluetooth Audio
at the same through Bluetooth Audio, select SYNC.
time, I some- To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
times do not through USB, select Dock Connector.
hear any sound.
Voice command issues
SYNC does not Review the cell phone voice commands

understand and the media voice commands at the
what I am You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
saying. wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
You may be speaking too The microphone for the system is either in
soon or at the wrong your rear view mirror or in the headliner just
time. above the windshield.
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist exactly as the system
saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music by Prince and
SYNC does not the Revolution or Prince and the New
understand the Power Generation.
name of a song You may not be saying
or artist. the name exactly as the Make sure you are saying the complete title
system saved it. such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If the song titles are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
339
The system may not be

reading the name the Do not use special characters in the title,
same way you are saying as the system does not recognize them.
it.
Review the cell phone voice commands at
the beginning of the cell phone section.
You may be using the You can also use the cell phone and media
wrong voice commands. suggestion lists to get a list of possible
suggestions when the system cannot fully
understand you. See Using Voice Recog-
nition (page 306).
Make sure you are saying the name exactly
SYNC does not as the system saved it. For example, if the
understand or is You may not be saying contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe
calling the the name exactly as the Wilson".
wrong contact system saved it. The system works better if you list full
when I want to names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than
make a call. "Joe".
Contacts in your phone-
book may be very short Do not use special characters such as 123
and similar or they may or ICE as the system does not recognize
contain special charac- them.
ters.
Your phonebook If the contacts are in capital letters, you
contacts may be in have to spell them. JAKE requires you to
capital letters. say "Call J-A-K-E".
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
The SYNC voice contact names stored on your cell phone.
control system
You may be saying the Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
is having trouble
foreign names using the manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
recognizing
currently selected for phonebook and then contact name.
foreign names
language for SYNC. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
stored on my
cell phone. will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
340
The SYNC voice

control system
is having trouble SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
recognizing rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
foreign tracks, stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
artists, albums, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
genres and for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC.
playlist names U2) such that you can always use the
from my media English pronunciation for these artists.
player or USB
flash drive.
SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice
The system rather than pre-recorded human voice.
generates voice SYNC offers several new voice control
prompts and features for a wide range of languages.
SYNC uses text-to-
the pronunci- Dialing a contact name directly from the
speech voice prompt
ation of some phonebook without pre-recording (for
technology.
words may not example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
be accurate for track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
my language. from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
My previous
Bluetooth voice
SYNC offers significant capability beyond
control system
the previous system such as dialing a
allowed me to
The focus of SYNC is to contact name directly from the phonebook
control the
control your mobile without pre-recording (for example, “call
radio, CD, and
devices and the content John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist,
climate control
stored on them. album, genre or playlist directly from your
systems. Why
media player (for example, "play artist
can I not control
Madonna").
these systems
with SYNC?
341
General
SYNC only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and SYNC does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment the currently selected is not available, SYNC remains in the
display does not language for the instru- current active language.
match the ment cluster and inform- SYNC offers several new voice control
SYNC language ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
(phone, USB, display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
342
AppLink issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile An AppLink capable Ensure you have a compatible smartphone;

Applications: phone is not connected an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an
When I select to SYNC. iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
"Find New Additionally, ensure your phone is paired
Apps", SYNC and connected to SYNC in order to find
does not find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
any applica- iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's
tions. USB port with an Apple USB cable.
My phone is AppLink-enabled apps Ensure you have downloaded and installed
connected, but are not installed and the latest version of the app from your
I still cannot find running on your mobile phone's app store. Ensure the app is running
any apps. device. on your phone. Some apps require you to
register or login on the app on the phone
before using them with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check
the app's settings menu on the phone.
My phone is Sometime apps do not Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
connected, my properly close and re- find the application if you cannot discover
app(s) are open their connection to it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
running, but I SYNC, over ignition if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, select
still cannot find cycles, for example. that and then restart the app. If the app
any apps. does not have that option, you can also
manually "Force Close" the app by going
to the phone's settings menu, selecting
'Apps.' then finding the particular app and
choosing 'Force stop'. Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then select "Find New
Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile
App's Menu.
343
AppLink issues
My Android There is a Bluetooth bug Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by

phone is on some older versions turning it off and then turning Bluetooth
connected, my of the Android OS that back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC
app(s) are may cause apps that should be able to automatically re-connect
running, I were found on your to your phone if you press the "Phone"
restarted them, previous vehicle drive to button.
but I still cannot not be found again if you
find any apps. have not turned off
Bluetooth.
My iPhone is The USB connection to Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
connected, my SYNC may need to be a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
app is running, I reset. to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
restarted the should appear in SYNC's Mobile Apps
app but I still Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
cannot find it on and restart it.
SYNC.
I have an The Bluetooth volume on Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the
Android phone. the phone may be low. device by using the device's volume control
I found and buttons which are most often found on the
started my side of the device.
media app on
SYNC, but there
is no sound or
the sound is
very low.
I can only see Some Android devices Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
some of the have a limited number of want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford
AppLink apps Bluetooth ports apps can SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
running on my use to connect. If you app's settings menu on the phone.
phone listed in have more AppLink apps
SYNC's Mobile on your phone than the
Apps Menu. number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
344
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION Using the Touchscreen
WARNING
voice-operated systems when possible. E224960

local laws that may affect the use of A Status bar.
B Home screen. See Home
Screen (page ?).
About SYNC
C Clock. See Settings (page ?).
The system allows you to interact with the D Outside air temperature.
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle E Feature bar.
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with Status Bar
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to E224961
when your vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h.

A Left-hand side temperature.
B Heated steering wheel on.
C Right-hand side temperature.
D Cell phone microphone muted.
E Audio system muted.
F Software update installed.
G Wi-Fi connected.
345
H Wi-Fi networks available. Emergency Assistance

I Cell phone roaming. WARNINGS
J Text message received. Unless the Emergency Assistance
setting is on prior to a collision, the
K Emergency Assistance off. system does not attempt to place
L Bluetooth connection active. an emergency call. This could delay the
response time, increasing the risk of serious
M Cell phone network signal injury or death.
strength.
Do not wait for Emergency
Note: Messages also appear in the status Assistance to make an emergency
bar. Select the message to use the call if you can do it yourself. Dial
associated feature. emergency services immediately to avoid
a delayed response time. If you do not hear
Emergency Assistance within five seconds
Feature Bar
of the crash, the system or cell phone may
Select to use the radio, the CD be damaged or non-functional.
player, a USB, a media player or Always place your phone in a secure
a Bluetooth device. See location in your vehicle so it does not
Entertainment (page ?). become a projectile or get damaged
Select to use the climate in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
controls. serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent Emergency
Note: Not available through the system on Assistance from working properly.
all models. For this feature to work, your mobile
Select to make calls and access phone must be Bluetooth-enabled
the phonebook on your cell and compatible with the system.
phone. See Phone (page ?).
Note: Before setting the feature on, please
Select to use the navigation read the important notice about the
system. See Navigation (page Emergency Assistance feature and the
?). Emergency Assistance privacy notice later
Select to search for and use in this section for important information.
compatible apps on your iOS or Note: When you switch Emergency
Android device. See Apps (page Assistance on or off, the settings apply to
?). all paired mobile phones. If you switch
Emergency Assistance off and a previously
Select to adjust system settings. paired phone connects when you switch the
See Settings (page ?). ignition on, either a voice message plays, a
display message or icon is shown or both.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Note: Every mobile phone operates
See Cleaning the Interior (page ?). differently. While Emergency Assistance
works with most mobile phones, some
mobile phones may experience difficulties
using this feature.
346
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the • A connected cell phone must have
fuel pump shut off, the system may adequate network coverage, battery
contact emergency services by dialing 112 power and signal strength.
(the wireless emergency number that • Your vehicle must have battery power.
works in most European countries) through
a paired and connected cell phone. For Note: This feature only works in a country
more information, visit the regional Ford or region where Emergency Assistance can
website. call the local emergency services. For more
information, visit the regional Ford website.
Note: In case of an emergency, Emergency
Assistance, as a means of communication In the Event of a Crash
aid, can help you contact specific rescue
departments of public security. Emergency Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or
Assistance does not implement the rescue triggers the fuel pump shut off, which may
operations. The local public security turn on Emergency Assistance. However, if
department deploys specific rescue Emergency Assistance is triggered, the
operations according to the actual situation. system tries to contact the emergency
services. If a connected cell phone sustains
See Supplementary Restraints System damage or loses connection to the system,
(page 25). Important information it searches for and tries to connect to any
regarding airbag deployment is in this available previously paired cell phone. The
chapter. system attempts to dial 112.
See Roadside Emergencies (page ?).
Important information regarding the fuel Before Making a Call
pump shut-off is in this chapter. • If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
To switch Emergency Assistance on and makes a successful call, an
off please view the settings information. introductory message plays for the
See Settings (page ?). emergency operator. After this
message, there is hands-free
To make sure that Emergency Assistance communication between your vehicle's
works correctly: occupants and the operator.
• The system must have power and be • The system provides a short window
working correctly at the time of the of time (approximately 10 seconds) to
crash and during feature activation and cancel the call. If you do not cancel the
use. call, the system attempts to dial 112.
• You must switch on the feature before • The system plays a message letting
a crash. you know when it attempts to make an
• You must have a cell phone connected emergency call. You can cancel the call
to the system. by selecting the relevant button or by
• In certain countries, it may be pressing the end call button on the
necessary to have a valid and steering wheel.
registered SIM card with credit in order
to place and maintain an emergency
call.
• A connected cell phone must have the
ability to make and maintain an
outgoing call at the time of the crash.
347
During a Call Note: The emergency operator may also

receive information from the cellular
• Emergency Assistance uses your
network such as cell phone number, cell
vehicle GPS or cellular network
phone location and cell phone carrier name
information when available to
independent from Emergency Assistance.
determine the most appropriate
language to use. It alerts the Emergency Assistance may not work
emergency operator of the crash and if:
delivers the introductory message. This
may include your vehicle GPS • Your cell phone or Emergency
coordinates. Assistance hardware sustains damage
• The language the system uses to in the crash.
interact with the occupants of your • The vehicle battery or the system has
vehicle may differ from the language no power.
used to deliver information to the • A crash ejects your cell phone from
emergency operator. your vehicle.
• After the delivery of the introductory • You do not have a valid and registered
message the voice line opens so that SIM card with credit in your cell phone.
you can speak hands-free with the
emergency operator. • You are in a country or region where
the Emergency Assistance cannot
• When the line is connected, you must place the call. For more information,
be prepared to provide your name, visit the regional Ford website.
phone number and location
information immediately. Important Information About
Note: While the system provides Emergency Assistance
information to the emergency operator, the Emergency Assistance does not currently
system plays a message letting you know call emergency services in the following
it is sending important information. It then countries:
lets you know when the line is open to start
hands-free communication. • Albania.
• Armenia.
Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,
an emergency priority screen appears which • Azerbaijan.
contains vehicle GPS coordinates when • Belarus.
available. • Bosnia and Herzegovina.
Note: It is possible that GPS location • Georgia.
information is not available at the time of
the crash; in this case, Emergency • Macedonia.
Assistance will still attempt to place an • Moldova.
emergency call. • Netherlands.
Note: It is possible that the emergency • Russia.
services will not receive the GPS • Ukraine.
coordinates; in this case, hands-free
communication with an emergency operator
is available.
348
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice Updating the System

When you switch on Emergency Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
services that your vehicle has been in a Downloading an Update
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut 1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
off. This feature has the capability to regional Ford website.
disclose your location information to the 2. Download the update.
emergency operator or other details about Note: The website notifies you if an update
your vehicle or crash to provide the most is available.
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do 3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
not switch on the feature. Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
meet the minimum requirements detailed
Safety Information on the website.
WARNING 4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
loss of vehicle control, crash and Installing an Update
you use extreme caution when using any Note: You can use the system when an
device that may take your focus off the installation is in progress.
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe 1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
operation of your vehicle. We recommend the USB ports.
while driving and encourage the use of 2. Connect the USB drive with the update
voice-operated systems when possible. to a USB port.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable Note: Installation starts automatically
local laws that may affect the use of within 10 minutes.
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
check your vehicle.
Select the settings option on the
• Do not operate playing devices if the feature bar.
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere Select System Wi-Fi.
with the operation of pedals, seats, Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
compartments or safe driving abilities.
Select an available Wi-Fi network.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it Note: Enter the network password to
could cause them damage. See your connect to a secure network.
device's user guide for further
information.
349
Switching Automatic System Updates may contain data about your cellular
On phone book, text messages (read and
Select the settings option on the unread), and call history, including history
feature bar. of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
Select General. creates and retains an index of supported
Select Automatic System Updates. media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
Switch automatic system updates on. minutes of all recent system activity. The
The system is now set to check for and log profile and other system data may be
receive system updates when it is used to improve the system and help
connected to a Wi-Fi network. diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
Note: You can use the system when a
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
download is in progress.
unless you delete them and are generally
Note: If the system is disconnected from accessible only in your vehicle when the
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in cellular phone or media player is
progress, the download continues the next connected.
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi
If you no longer plan to use the system or
network.
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
Additional Information and a master reset to erase all stored
Assistance information. See Settings (page ?).
System data cannot be accessed without
For additional information and assistance, special equipment and access to your
we recommend that you contact an vehicle's module. Ford Motor Company
authorized dealer or refer to the regional does not access the system data for any
Ford website. purpose other than as described absent
consent, a court order, or where required
Privacy Information by law enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
When you connect a cellular phone to the with lawful authority. Other parties may
system, it creates a profile within your seek to access the information
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. independently of Ford Motor Company.
This profile helps in offering you more
cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
HOME SCREEN
350
E224134
Item Tile Home screen display
A Audio Shows the active media source.

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
compass.
B Phone The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The
status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal
strength, battery charge, Emergency Assistance setting state
(On or Off), new text messages and roaming.
C Navigation * This map displays your current location or current route in real
time.
When you have navigation active you can see the next turn on
your route.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
audio information.
* If equipped.
351
You can touch any of the feature displays You can access each feature controlled by
to access that feature. SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
Anytime you select the home button, the To activate the SYNC 3 voice
system returns you to this screen. commands push the voice
E142599 button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice be the name of anything, such as artist, the
commands, to control features like audio name of contact or number. The context
and climate controls. By using voice and the description of the command tell
commands, you can keep your hands on you what to say for this dynamic option.
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Main Menu Brings you to the main menu.

Go back Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel Ends the voice session.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands (if equipped)
Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Included here are some of the most Audio Voice Commands

popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be a radio
frequency number, or the name of an artist,
album, song or a genre.
352
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command Description
AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM

frequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM".
FM ___
Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-
connected device.
USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
Play Playlist ___ selection. Your system must finish indexing
Play Artist ___ before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Play Album ___ Penny Lane".
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped) climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:

Climate Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 15°C-30°C.

Climate Help
353
Phone Voice Commands You can use voice commands to connect

your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the
Pairing a Phone system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Pair Phone Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing

process. See Settings (page 375).
Making Calls
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
Please make sure that you are saying the

contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command Description
<0-9> If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.
Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
354
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Text Messages
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Reply to Message

Navigation Voice Commands (If navigation voice commands it can be a POI
Equipped) category or an address.
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality.

Find a ___ State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
such as "Find restaurants".
Find POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Destination Nearest State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
___ nearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants".
Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destination
Destination Home Allows you to route to your home address.
355
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:

Cancel Route Cancels the current route.

Detour Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Displays the active route.
Where Am I Provides current location.
Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:
Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find New Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
<App Name> At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
<App Name> Help SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
356
Voice Settings Commands

You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Standard
Interaction Mode Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Advanced
Phone Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
Phone Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
You can use the volume control to adjust To disable this automatic fan speed
the volume of the system voice prompts. reduction feature during voice sessions,
While prompt is active, adjust the volume press and hold the climate control AC and
control up or down to your desired setting. Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
Note: Depending on the current climate 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
control settings, the fan speed may the above sequence.
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
ENTERTAINMENT
357
E224963
Item Message Description
A Sources This displays your selected media source.

B Presets This allows you to select the preset bank you
want to view.
C Preset This shows you the stations that you have saved
as presets.
The available options may change

You can access these options using the
depending on the source that you select.
touchscreen or voice commands.
These options may include:
358
Message and description
Direct Tune A popup appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of

a station.
Traffic (TA) Allows you to switch Traffic Announcements on and off.
Stations A list of all available radio stations appears.
You can select a station by pressing any list entry on the
touchscreen. For more entries, you can scroll down using
the up and down arrows, the slider or by swiping down the
list.
Sources DAB+/AM/FM/ Radio

Note: DAB+ Radio may not be available in
Press this button to select the source of
all markets.
media you want to listen to.
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen, select:

Menu item
Direct Tune A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency

of a station.
Station List A list of all available radio stations appears. You can select
a station by pressing any list entry on the touchscreen. For
a longer list, you can scroll up and down using the up and
down arrows, the slider or by swiping up or down the list.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
359
and then press and hold one of the

Once you have entered the station's memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
call numbers, you can select: briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
Menu item Action and descrip-
tion There are two preset banks available for
AM, three banks for FM and three banks
Enter Press to begin for DAB (if equipped). To access additional
playing the station presets, tap the preset button. The
you have entered. indicator on the preset button shows which
bank of presets you are currently viewing.
Cancel Press to exit
without changing CD
the station.
Once you select this option, the system
Presets returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
To set a new preset, tune to the station
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
360
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
play buttons to control the audio playback. provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audiobooks
361
Button Function
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,

USB Ports exFAT, and NTFS.
The USB ports are in the center console or SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
behind a small access door in the from your USB device by metadata tags.
instrument panel. Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
This feature allows you to plug in USB media files, provide information about the
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives file.
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature. If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
Select this option to play audio from your tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
USB device. metadata tags as unknown.
Apps SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
The system supports the use of certain devices.
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
CLIMATE
options depending on the app's content.
Climate is optional for your vehicle.
See Apps (page 374).
Touch the climate button on the
Supported Media Players, Formats touchscreen to access your climate control
and Metadata Information features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
The system is capable of hosting nearly may look different from one of the screens
any digital media player, including iPod, shown below. Your screen may not contain
iPhone, and most USB drives. all of the features shown.
Supported audio formats include MP3, Note: You can switch temperature units
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Supported audio file extensions include Settings (page 375).
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
362
E243778
Callout Item Description
A AUTO Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select

the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
DUAL This button lights up when the passenger controls are active.
To switch the dual zone operation off and link the passenger
temperature to the driver temperature, touch the DUAL button
to switch it off.
B Power Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching
off the climate control system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.
363
C Right-hand Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.

front seat
temper-
ature:
D Fan speed Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air
circulated in your vehicle.
E Rear A pop up appears on the screen to display the rear control
options.
Touch the power icon to switch the rear climate control func-
tions off and on.
Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to
adjust the rear climate settings. Touch it again to prevent the
rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings
If your vehicle has automatic climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings to the Auto settings of the
driver.
Touch the up and down arrows to adjust the temperature.
A/C A popup appears on the screen to display the air conditioning
options.
MAX Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air.
A/C Touch again for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C
distributes air through instrument panel vents and
may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle.
MAX A/C is more economical and efficient than
normal A/C mode.
A/C Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use
A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency. A/C engages automat-
ically in MAX A/C, defrost and footwell/defrost
364
Recircu- Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off which

lated may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
air: the interior and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior. Recirculated air also engages automatically
when you select MAX A/C. You can engage this
manually in any airflow mode except defrost. It may
also turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to
reduce fog potential.
F Manual Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
airflow
distribution Floor Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents
controls and rear seat floor vents.
G Defrost A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.

Select these controls individually or together to direct the air
flow to the desired area.
MAX Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside
Defrost: air flows through the windshield vents, the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
temperature dial returns to the full heat position.
You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin
covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear
window also automatically turns on when you select
MAX Defrost. Touch this button again to return to
the previous airflow selection.
Defrost Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the previous airflow selec-
tion. When on, defrost provides outside air to reduce
window fogging and distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Touch
again to return to the pervious airflow selection.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when Defrost is on.
H Left-hand Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.
front seat
temperature
365
PHONE 2. A prompt alerts you to search for your

vehicle model on your phone.
WARNING 3. Select your vehicle model as it displays
on your phone.
loss of vehicle control, crash and 4. Confirm that the six-digit number
injury. We strongly recommend that appearing on your phone matches the
you use extreme caution when using any six-digit number on the touchscreen.
device that may take your focus off the 5. The touchscreen indicates when the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
electronic devices while driving. Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Hands-free calling is one of the main Menu Item

features of SYNC 3. Once you pair your cell
Add a Bluetooth Device
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While Then select:
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
functionality.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time 2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with 3. Confirm that the six-digit number
the system before using the functions in appearing on your phone matches the
hands-free mode. six-digit number on the touchscreen.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to 4. The touchscreen indicates when the
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if pairing is successful.
necessary.
To add a phone, select: the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
Menu Item compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Add a This is on the phone
Bluetooth feature screen or you can At a minimum, most cell phones with
Device use the voice command. Bluetooth wireless technology support the
See Using Voice Recogni- following functions:
tion (page 352). • Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. • Dialing a number.
366
• Call waiting notification. To check your phone’s compatibility, see

• Caller identification. your phone’s manual or visit the regional
ford website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook Phone Menu
download, are phone-dependent features.
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
E224136
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A Recent Call Displays your recent calls.

List You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
All Incoming Outgoing Missed
B Contacts All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
367
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A-Z Jump Selecting this button allows

you to choose a specific letter
to view.
C Phone Settings Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Phone (page 366).
D Text Messages Displays all recent text messages.
E Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call Press this button to begin a
call.
F Do Not Disturb Touch this button to let SYNC automatically reject your incoming
calls. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services

may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 352). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
368
To call a number in your contacts, To accept the call, select:

select:
Menu Item
Accept
Contacts You can then select the Note: You can also accept the call by
name of the contact you pressing the phone button on the steering
want to call. Any numbers wheel.
stored for that contact
display. You can then To reject the call, select:
select the number that you
want to call. The system Menu Item
begins the call.
Reject
To call a number from your recent calls, Note: You can also reject the call by
select: pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
Recent Call You can then select an logs it as a missed call.
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a Phone Call
To call a number that is not stored in During a phone call, the contacts name
your phone, select: and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
Menu Item Action and Description The phone status items are also visible:
Phone Select the digits of the • Signal Strength.
Keypad number you wish to call. • Battery.
Call The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
369
Item
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
End Call Immediately end a the cell phone or
phone call. You can back to SYNC 3.
also press the
button on the Text Messaging
steering wheel.
Note: Downloading and sending text
Keypad Press this to access messages using Bluetooth are cell
the phone keypad. phone-dependent features.
Mute You can switch the Note: Certain features in text messaging
microphone off so are speed-dependent and not available
the caller does not when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
hear you. 5 km/h.
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the sender name, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View View the text on the touchscreen.
Call To call the sender.
Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close To exit the screen.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) some SYNC 3 features.
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
and Android Auto to access your phone. features use mobile data.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Apple CarPlay
Auto, you can:
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
• Make calls. newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
• Send and receive messages. the latest iOS version is recommended.
• Listen to music. 1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
• Use your phone's voice assistant. USB Port (page ?).
370
2. Follow the prompts on the

touchscreen. To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple Menu Item
CarPlay.
Android Auto Preferences
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when Your device is listed if SYNC detects
plugged into a USB port. Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select: Disable
Menu Item
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
Apple CarPlay Preferences screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your To return to SYNC 3, select the
device and select: speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
Disable touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
app.
Android Auto Your navigation system is comprised of

two main features, destination mode and
Android Auto is compatible with most map mode.
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
Map Mode
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from a leading Android app Map mode shows advanced viewing
store to prepare your device (this may comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
require mobile data usage). and 3D city models (when available). 2D
Note: The Android Auto App may not be city maps show detailed outlines of
available within your current market. buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See infrastructure for the most essential cities
USB Port (page ?). around the globe.
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen. 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
4. Follow the prompts that appear on objects that are typically recognizable and
your device. have a certain tourism value.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.
371
3D city models are complete 3D models 3D map mode provides an

of entire city areas including navigable elevated perspective of the map.
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. Adjust this viewing angle and
3D landmarks and city models appear in E251637 rotate the map 180 degrees by
3D map mode only. Coverage of these touching the map twice, and
varies and improves with updated map then dragging your finger along the shaded
releases. bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
Select the zoom in icon to see a Motorway Services Select the
closer view of the map. icon to see service stations near
you. If your vehicle is low on fuel,
E251643 E251639 station icons automatically
Select the zoom out icon to see display on the map.
a farther away view of the map.
Parking Destinations Select
You can adjust the view in preset this icon to see parking facilities
E251642 increments. You can also pinch near you.
to zoom in or out of the map. E251640
The information bar tells you the names Destination Menu This icon
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover appears when you are near a
over them with the crosshair curser. destination. You can check the
You can change your view of the map by E251638 trip summary, find places near
tapping on the location indicator icon on you, save the current location, or
the right hand side of the screen. You can pause navigation.
choose from the following options:
Navigation Menu
2D This always shows the
direction of forward travel to be Navigation Menu Select this
upward on the screen. icon to open the Navigation
E251635 Menu.
2D north up always shows the E251641
northern direction to be upward
on the screen.
E251636
372
Navigation Menu Options

Icon Function
New Route Select your destination by entering an address or its coordinate, or by

selecting a Place, a Saved Location, or a Saved Route. You can also
look up your recent destinations from History.
Multipoint Build your route from one or more route points. You can also plan a
Route route independently of your current GPS position by setting a new
starting point.
Useful Informa- Access additional options and check navigation-related information.
tion
Combined You can use the Search in All function to search all destination types
Search in a certain location.
Address You can enter a partial or whole address to find a destination.
Places You can search for Places of Interest in the Places menu.
Saved Route Displays your previously saved routes.
Coordinates You can search for a destination by entering coordinates.
Location Tap the location on the map to select your destination.
Settings Customise the way the navigation software works.
The following are available during your planned route:

Menu Item Function
Add Waypoint Add an intermediate destination to your route.

Detours and See route alternatives to avoid parts of the route, or to avoid a specific
Alternatives road from your planned route.
Route Summary View the route in its full length on the map and check route parameters
and route alternatives.
Delete Route Delete your route.
Delete Delete the next waypoint or the whole route. This is displayed if there
Waypoint is a multipoint route.
373
Navigation Map Updates 3. If there are any updates, a window

appears where you can download the
You can update your navigation system necessary files to your flash drive.
using a computer with an internet
connection, the Naviextras toolbox and a 4. Turn on your navigation system and
flash drive larger than 2GB. plug the flash drive into your system.
The updates begin automatically.
Download and install the Naviextras
Toolbox from the following website: APPS
Website
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
https://www.naviextras.com and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smart phone apps. When
Before updating, retrieve your Vehicle an app is running through AppLink, you can
Identification Number (VIN) and Electronic control main features of the app through
Serial Number (ESN) from the SYNC 3 voice commands and steering wheel
Settings menu. controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
Settings vary by market.
Menu Item Note: You must pair and connect your
smart phone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
General access AppLink.
Then select: Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
About SYNC
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smart phone devices and
To update your navigation system: troubleshooting tips please visit the regional
1. Plug a 2GB or larger flash drive into Ford website.
your computer.
Note: Make sure you have an active
2. Enter the required Vehicle Identification account for the app that you have
Number (VIN) and the Electronic Serial downloaded. Some apps will work
Number (ESN) in the Naviextras automatically with no setup. Other apps will
Toolbox. want you to configure your personal settings
and personalize your experience by creating
stations or favorites. We recommend you
do this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smart phone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
374
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app You can enable and disable apps through
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure settings. See Settings (page 375).
the required app is running on the mobile
device. App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
Menu Item Action and Descrip- into groups. You can grant these group
tion permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search
not driving, by using the settings menu.
and connect to
While in the settings menu, you can also
compatible app(s)
see the data included in each group.
running on your
mobile device. When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
requires user consent to send and receive can enable all groups or none of them
app authorization information and updates during the initial app permissions prompts.
using the data plan associated with the The settings menu offers individual group
connected device. permission control.
The connected device sends data to Ford Note: You are only prompted to grant
in the United States. The information is permissions the first time you use an app
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 with SYNC 3.
module number, anonymous usage
Note: If you disable group permissions,
statistics and debugging information. The
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
connected device sends data to Ford in the
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
United States. The information is
settings menu.
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
statistics and debugging information. SETTINGS
Updates may take place automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for Under this menu, you can access and
each connected device the first time you adjust the settings for many of the system
select a mobile app using the system. features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges Sound
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data Pressing this button allows you to adjust
through the connected device. This includes the following:
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
375
Sound Settings
Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
Speed Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
Compensated or turns the feature off.
Vol.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Podcast Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Gracenote® Switches on an off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
Management such as genre, artist, album.
376
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Informa- This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
tion media device.
Update Media Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.
Index
You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Clock Format Select how time displays.

Reset Clock to When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any Bluetooth

updates you make to the settings.
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
Menu Item Action
Bluetooth Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Phone

Bluetooth-enabled device.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth the system before using the functions in
device is the same as pairing a phone. See hands-free mode.
To add a phone in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
377

To add a phone, select: 2. Select your phone's name when it
Menu Item appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
Add Phone appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the pairing is successful.
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model the system permission to access
as it displays on your phone. information. To check your phone’s
4. Confirm that the six-digit number compatibility, see your phone’s manual
appearing on your phone matches the or visit the website.
six-digit number on the touchscreen. Other features, such as text messaging
5. The touchscreen indicates when the using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
pairing is successful. download, are phone-dependent features.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give To check your phone’s compatibility, see
the system permission to access your phone’s manual or visit the regional
information. To check your phone’s Ford website.
compatibility, see your phone’s manual Once you have paired a device you can
or visit your regional Ford website. adjust the following options.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
Device the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
378
Disconnect
Make Favorite Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete Removes the selected device from the system.
Pressing the info icon next to the device

name allows you to see phone and device
information.
Manage Contacts
Auto Phonebook Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
Download phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name Last Name
Re-download Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Phonebook
Delete Phone- Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
book in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Set Phone Ringtone

No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
379
Text Message Notification

No Alert No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
You can enable and disable the following options as well:

Mute Audio in When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
Privacy duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
Warning you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
Notification is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off

Emergency Assistance (If Equipped) setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance you can adjust the following option:
feature only operates in territories that are
supporting the feature.
Set Emergency You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
Contacts book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the Emer-
gency Assistance call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
380
FM HD Radio Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broad-

casts.
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio source,
if equipped and avail-
able)
Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media
source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio
text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your
current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned
source.
News Announcements
Regional
Alternate frequency
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Navigation (If Equipped)

You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
381
POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
Once this feature is activated you can select Select POIs
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
Icons to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest Fastest Eco
Always Use ___ Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
Route calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Automatically The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
Find Parking you approach your destination.
Eco Time Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
Penalty setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Avoid Traffic You can select the following to have the system:
Problems
Avoid Freeways Avoid Toll Roads Avoid Ferries/Car Trains
Navigation Preferences
Navigation Preferences
Guidance You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Prompts
382
Voice and Tones

Voice Only
Tones Only
Note: All Mobile Apps may not be

Mobile Apps (If Equipped) compatible with the system.
You can enable the control of compatible Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or is not responsible for any additional charges
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable you may receive from your service provider,
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent when your vehicle sends or receives data
to send and receive app authorization through the connected device. This includes
information and updates using the data any additional charges incurred due to
plan associated with the connected device. driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.
Mobile Apps Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile This provides information on the current state of available app
Apps updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps…
The system has No update is The system is trying to receive
detected a new app required. an update.
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
383
Request Update Select this button if an

update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
be SYNC 3 sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
enabled apps can see which signals are included in each group.
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for General

any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any You can adjust the following:
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Menu Item
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in one of the

selectable languages.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Screen Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
384
Wi-Fi You can adjust the following:
Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
View Available This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
Notifications network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Tap a color once to switch on ambient
lighting. This sets the color to the highest Vehicle
intensity.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
You can drag the colors up and down to these features.
increase or decrease the intensity.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
Delay
(if equipped)
385
Enhanced Park Aids

(if equipped)
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Display Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the
screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode You can select:
Auto The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Auto Dim Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
386
Menu Item
Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts

and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's
name with you before making a call.
Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin

Valet Mode number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. again.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop-up SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN However, should questions arise, please
you chose but you must use the same PIN refer to the tables below.
to disable valet mode. The system asks To check your cell phone's compatibility,
you to input the code. visit the Ford website.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact Website
the Customer Relationship Center.
www.fordsync.com
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
Phone issues
There is back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC 3 performance.
During a call, I Try switching your cell phone off, resetting

can hear the it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
other person Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
malfunction.
but they cannot 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
hear me. icon on the phone screen.
387
Phone issues
During a call, I To restart your system, shut down the

cannot hear the engine, open and close the door, and then
The system may need to
other person lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
be restarted.
and they cannot Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
hear me. and the lighted USB port is off.
dependent feature.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
SYNC 3 is not contacts from your phone. Refer to your
able to down- cell manual.
load my phone- Possible cell phone You must switch on your cell phone and
book. malfunction. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
The system contacts from your phone. Refer to your
says "Phone- cell manual.
book down-
If the missing contacts are stored on your
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
memory.
book is empty or
is missing You must switch on your cell phone and
contacts. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
dependent feature.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
I am having
trouble Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
connecting my deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
cell phone to Possible cell phone again.
SYNC 3. malfunction.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
388
Phone issues
Switch the auto download setting off.

dependent feature.
Possible cell phone Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
malfunction. it or removing the battery, then try again.
iPhone • Go to your iPhone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
Text messaging • Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
is not working from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
on SYNC 3. settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
text sender's screen of the messaging
application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do Because each cell phone is different, refer
not work on my to your device's manual for the specific cell
cell phone. This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
389
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try

switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having Possible device malfunc- cable.
trouble tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
connecting my
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
device.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a device-
Bluetooth audio dependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
does not 3 and that you have started the media
stream. The device is not player on your device.
connected.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
information.
SYNC 3 does The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
not recognize corrupted. version.
music that is on
my device. The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
The file format is not Convert the file to a supported format.
supported by SYNC 3.
390
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
The device needs to be Update media index. See Settings (page

re-indexed. 375).
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
When I connect to SYNC 3.
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Wi-Fi Issues
Failed connection. Password error. Verify password.

Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi
signal.
Multiple Access points Use a unique name for your
within range with the same SSID, don’t use the default
SSID. name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as
part of the MAC address.
Disconnecting after Weak signal probably due Position the vehicle close to
successful connection. to distance from the the hotspot with the front of
hotspot, obstruction or high the vehicle facing the
interference. hotspot direction and
remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, microwave and
cordless phones may cause
interference.
391
Wi-Fi Issues
Poor signal seen by SYNC 3 There may be an obstruction If the vehicle is equipped
despite being near a between SYNC 3 and the with heated windshield, try
hotspot. hotspot. positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not
facing the hotspot. If you
have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield,
position the vehicle to face
the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the
windows in the direction of
the hotspot if that is feas-
ible.
Try to remove other
obstructions that may
impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
A hotspot is not listed in the The hotspot was defined as Please set the network to
list of available networks. a hidden network. visible and try again.
SYNC 3 is not seen when SYNC 3 does not currently SYNC 3 currently does not
searching for Wi-Fi networks provide a hotspot. provide a hotspot
from your phone or other
devices.
Software download takes Poor signal strength, too far Check the signal quality
too long. from the hotspot, hotspot is (under network details), if
supporting multiple SYNC 3 indicates good or
connections, slow Internet excellent, test with another
connection or other prob- high-speed equipped
lems. hotspot where the environ-
ment is more predictable.
SYNC 3 seems to connect It is possible that there is no Test the connection with
with a hotspot and the new software. The another device, if the
signal strength is excellent connected hotspot may be hotspot requires a subscrip-
but the software is not being a managed one and it tion, you may contact the
updated. requires either a subscrip- service provider.
tion or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
392
AppLink issues
Make sure you have a

compatible smartphone; an
Android with OS 2.3 or
higher or an iPhone 3GS or
newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
You did not connect an Additionally, make sure you
tions: When I select "Find
Applink Compatible phone pair and connect your phone
New Apps," SYNC 3 does
to SYNC 3. to SYNC 3 in order to find
not find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB
cable.
Make sure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Make sure the app is running
AppLink-enabled apps are on your phone. Some apps
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on require you to register or
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. login to the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC 3 find the
application if you cannot
Sometimes apps do not
discover it inside the vehicle.
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
On an Android device, if
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC 3,
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit'
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for
option, then select it and
example.
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
select the phone's settings
393
AppLink issues
menu and select 'Apps',

then find the particular app
and choose 'Force stop.' Do
not forget to restart the app
afterward, then select "Find
New Apps" on SYNC 3.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC 3's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a Bluetooth issue Switch Bluetooth off and
connected, my app(s) are on some older versions of then on to reset it on your
running, I restarted them, the Android operating phone. If you are in your
but I still cannot find any system that may cause apps vehicle, SYNC 3 should be
apps. that were found on your able to automatically re-
previous vehicle drive to not connect to your phone if you
be found again if you did not press the "Phone" button.
switch Bluetooth off.
394
AppLink issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone is connected, my
back in to the phone. After a
app is running, I restarted You may need to reset the
few seconds, the app should
the app but I still cannot find USB connection to SYNC 3.
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
it on SYNC 3.
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Increase the Bluetooth
I have an Android phone. I
volume of the device by
found and started my media
The Bluetooth volume on using the device's volume
app on SYNC 3, but there is
the phone may be low. control buttons which are
no sound or the sound is
most often found on the
very low.
side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
Bluetooth ports that apps 3 to find. If the app has a
I can only see some of the can use to connect. If you "Ford SYNC" setting, disable
AppLink apps running on my have more AppLink apps on that setting in the app's
phone listed in the SYNC 3 your phone than the number settings menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. of available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
Review the cell phone voice commands

and the media voice commands at the
You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
not understand
voice session to find a list of voice
what I am
commands there.
saying.
You may be speaking too Wait for the system to prompt you before
soon or at the wrong you state your command.
time.
395
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
Make sure you are saying the complete title
SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
not understand appears on your device.
Nettles".
the name of a
song or artist. If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name
may have some special Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
characters that are not and playlists names do not have any special
being recognized by characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does exactly as it appears on your phone. For
the name exactly as it
not understand example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
appears on your phone-
or is calling the say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
book.
wrong contact is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
when I want to The contact name may
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
contain special charac-
have any special characters like *, - or +.
ters.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
The SYNC 3 rules of the selected language to the
voice control contact names stored on your cell phone.
system is having You may not be saying Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
trouble recog- the name exactly as it manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
nizing foreign appears on your phone- for phonebook and then contact name.
names stored book. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
on my cell 3 will read the contact name to you, giving
phone. you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
396
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
trouble recog- rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
nizing foreign stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
tracks, artists, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
albums, genres for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC 3.
and playlist U2) such that you can always use the
names from my English pronunciation for these artists.
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
The system voice.
generates voice
prompts and SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3 uses text-to- features for a wide range of languages.
the pronunci-
speech voice prompt Dialing a contact name directly from the
ation of some
technology. phonebook without pre-recording (for
words may not
be accurate for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
my language. track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
397
General
The language SYNC 3 supports up to four languages in a

selected for the single module for text display, voice control
instrument and voice prompts. The country where you
cluster and bought your vehicle dictates the four
information and languages based on the most popular
SYNC 3 does not support
entertainment languages spoken. If the selected language
the currently selected
display does not is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
language for the instru-
match the current active language.
ment cluster and inform-
SYNC 3
ation and entertainment
language
display.
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3

troubleshooting please call or visit the Ford
Website.
Ford Support
Website www.fordsync.com
398
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC WARNINGS
COMPATIBILITY The RF (radio frequency) transmitter
equipment (e.g. cellular telephones,
WARNINGS amateur radio transmitters etc.) may
only be fitted to your vehicle if they comply
Your vehicle has been tested and with the parameters shown in the table
certified to legislations relating to below. There are no special provisions or
electromagnetic compatibility conditions for installations or use.
(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or
other applicable local requirements). It is Do not mount any transceiver,
your responsibility to ensure that any microphones, speakers, or any other
equipment you have fitted complies with item in the deployment path of the
applicable local legislations. Have any airbag system.
equipment fitted by properly trained Do not fasten antenna cables to
technicians. original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 10 centimetres (4 inches) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
1 2 3
E205691
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1 - 30 100 W 3
50 - 54 100 W 2
68 – 87.5 50 W 2
142 – 176 50 W 2
399
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
220 - 225 50 W 2
380 – 512 50 W 2
806 – 870 10 W 2
1200 – 1400 10 W 2
1710 – 1885 10 W 2
1885 – 2025 10 W 2
Note: After the installation of RF

transmitters, check for disturbances from END USER LICENSE
and to all electrical equipment in the
vehicle, both in the standby and transmit
AGREEMENT
modes.
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
Check all electrical equipment: LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• with the ignition ON
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
• with the engine running have acquired a vehicle having several
• during a road test at various speeds. devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
Check that electromagnetic fields include software licensed or owned by
generated inside the vehicle cabin by the Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
transmitter installed do not exceed ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
applicable human exposure requirements. software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
400
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") liable for any damages arising out of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY errors in the speech recognition
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE process. It is your responsibility to
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT monitor any speech recognition
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, functions included in the system.
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF Decompilation and Disassembly:
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). You may not reverse engineer,
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This decompile, translate, disassemble or
EULA grants you the following license: attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• You may use the SOFTWARE as SOFTWARE nor permit others to
installed on the DEVICES and as reverse engineer, decompile or
otherwise interfacing with systems disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and/or services provide by or through and only to the extent that such activity
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third is expressly permitted by applicable
party software and service providers. law notwithstanding this limitation or
Description of Other Rights and to the extent as may be permitted by
Limitations the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
• Speech Recognition: If the with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE includes speech • Limitations on Distributing,
recognition component(s), you should Copying, Modifying and Creating
understand that speech recognition is Derivative Works: You may not
an inherently statistical process and distribute, copy, make modifications
that recognition errors are inherent in to or create derivative works based on
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
401
Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may charges from your wireless service

permanently transfer your rights under provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
this EULA only as part of a sale or or third party software and services
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you suppliers provide or make available to
retain no copies, you transfer all of the you Supplemental Components and
SOFTWARE (including all component no other EULA terms are provided
parts, the media and printed materials, along with the Supplemental
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Components, then the terms of this
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, designated agent reserve the right to
any transfer must include all prior discontinue without liability any
versions of the SOFTWARE. Internet-based services provided to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any you or made available to you through
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY the use of the SOFTWARE.
may terminate this EULA if you fail to • Links to Third Party Sites: The
comply with the terms and conditions SOFTWARE may provide you with the
of this EULA. ability to link to third party sites. The
• Internet-Based Services third party sites are not under the
Components: The SOFTWARE may control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
contain components that enable and its affiliates and/or its designated
facilitate the use of certain agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
Internet-based services. You COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
acknowledge and agree that FORD designated agent are responsible for
MOTOR COMPANY, third party (I) the contents of any third party sites,
software and service suppliers, its any links contained in third party sites,
affiliates and/or its designated agent or any changes or updates to third
may automatically check the version party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
of the SOFTWARE and/or its other form of transmission received
components that you are utilizing and from any third party sites. If the
may provide upgrades or supplements SOFTWARE provides links to third
to the SOFTWARE that may be party sites, those links are provided to
automatically downloaded to your you only as a convenience, and the
DEVICES. inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
• Additional Software/Services: The FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR and/or its designated agent.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
its designated agent to provide or make You recognize your obligation to drive
available to you SOFTWARE updates, responsibly and keep attention on the
supplements, add-on components, or road. You will read and abide with the
Internet-based services components DEVICES operating instructions
of the SOFTWARE after the date you particularly as they pertain to safety
obtain your initial copy of the and you agree to assume any risk
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental associated with the use of the
Components".) SOFTWARE updates DEVICES.
may cause you to incur additional
402
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the subject to U.S. and European Union export
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or applicable international and national laws
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
replacement copy for the existing other governments.
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
this EULA, including any additional EULA you any rights in connection with any
terms accompanying the upgrade trademarks or service marks of FORD
SOFTWARE. MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: party software and service providers.
All title and intellectual property rights in PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
limited to any images, photographs, provided in the documentation for the
animations, video, audio, music, text and DEVICES product support, such as the
"applets" incorporated into the vehicle owner guide.
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the Should you have any questions concerning
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may please refer to the address provided in the
not copy the printed materials documentation for the DEVICES.
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title No Liability for Certain Damages:
and intellectual property rights in and to EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
the content which may be accessed MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
through use of the SOFTWARE is the SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
property of the respective content owner AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
and may be protected by applicable LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
copyright or other intellectual property CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
rights to use such content outside its CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
intended use. All rights not specifically PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
granted under this EULA are reserved by LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
and third party software and service PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
services which may be accessed through EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the VEHICLE.
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
403
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

Information Read and follow features may require manual
instructions: (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
• Before using your SYNC® system, read while driving can distract your attention
and follow all instructions and safety and could cause an accident or other
information provided in this end user serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not and legal manner before attempting
following precautions found in the these operations.
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
General Operation as an aid. Make your driving decisions
• Voice Command Control: Certain based on your observations of local
functions within the SYNC® system conditions and existing traffic
may be accomplished using voice regulations. Any such feature is not a
commands. Using voice commands substitute for your personal judgment.
while driving helps you to operate the Any route suggestions made by this
system without removing your hands system should never replace any local
from the wheel or eyes from the road. traffic regulations or your personal
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not judgment or knowledge of safe driving
access any function requiring a practices.
prolonged view of the screen while you • Route Safety: Do not follow the route
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal suggestions if doing so would result in
manner before attempting to access a an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
function of the system requiring would be placed in an unsafe situation,
prolonged attention. or if you would be directed into an area
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the that you consider unsafe. The driver is
volume excessively. Keep the volume ultimately responsible for the safe
at a level where you can still hear operation of the vehicle and therefore,
outside traffic and emergency signals must evaluate whether it is safe to
while driving. Driving while unable to follow the suggested directions.
hear these sounds could cause an • Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
accident. used by this system may be inaccurate
• Navigation Features: Any navigation because of changes in roads, traffic
features included in the system are controls or driving conditions. Always
intended to provide turn by turn use good judgment and common sense
instructions to get you to a desired when following the suggested routes.
destination. Please make certain all • Emergency Services: Do not rely on
persons using this system carefully any navigation features included in the
read and follow instructions and safety system to route you to emergency
information fully. services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
404
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Disclaimer of Warranty

Risk
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
• You agree to each of the following:(a) AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
Any use of the SOFTWARE while SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
driving an automobile or other vehicle THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
in violation of applicable law or SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
presents a significant risk of distracted ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
driving and should not be attempted TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
under any circumstances;(b) Use of BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
poses a significant risk of hearing THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
damage and should not be attempted "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
under any circumstances;(c) The FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
SOFTWARE may not be compatible ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
with new or different versions of an HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
operating system, third party software, AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
or third party services, and the THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
critical failure of an operating system, SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
third party software, or third party STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
service.(d) Any third party service LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
accessed by or third party software AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
charge an additional fee for access, (ii) QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
may not work correctly, on an ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
may change streaming formats or NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
adult, profane or offensive content; and NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
misleading traffic, weather, financial OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
or safety information or other content; SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
cause you to incur additional charges SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
from your wireless service provider WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
(WSP) and any data or minute THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
calculators that may be included in the SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
software program are for reference OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
only, are not warranted in any way and UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
should not be relied upon in anyway. OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
to be responsible for and assume the THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
entire risk to the items set forth in CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
Section (a) – (e) above. INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
405
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE Binding Arbitration and Class Action

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, Waiver
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE (a) Application. This Section applies to
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR controversy between You and FORD
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING exceptions listed above, concerning the
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE legal or equitable basis.
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
• The laws of the State of Michigan which is a written statement of the name,
govern this EULA and Your use of the address, and contact information of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to dispute, and the relief requested. You and
other local, state, national, or FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
international laws. Any litigation arising resolve any dispute through informal
out of or related to this EULA shall be negotiation within 60 days from the date
brought and maintained exclusively in the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
a court of the State of Michigan You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
located in Wayne County or in the commence arbitration.
United States District Court for the (c) Small claims court. You may also
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby litigate any dispute in small claims court
consent to submit to the personal in your county of residence or FORD
jurisdiction of a court in the State of MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
Michigan located in Wayne County and business, if the dispute meets all
the United States District Court for the requirements to be heard in the small
Eastern District of Michigan for any claims court. You may litigate in small
dispute arising out of or relating to this claims court whether or not You
EULA. negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
406
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a may award the same damages to You
party or class member) all disputes in court individually as a court could. The arbitrator
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes may award declaratory or injunctive relief
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, only to You individually, and only to the
whose decision will be final except for a extent required to satisfy Your individual
limited right of appeal under the Federal claim.
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award. • I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
forum will be conducted solely on an
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
COMPANY’S last written settlement
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
offer made before the arbitrator was
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
appointed (“last written offer”), your
attorney general action, or in any other
dispute goes all the way to an
proceeding in which any party acts or
arbitrator’s decision (called an
proposes to act in a representative
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
you more than the last written offer,
be combined with another without the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
prior written consent of all parties to all
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
arbitration will be conducted by the (3) reimburse any expenses (including
American Arbitration Association (the expert witness fees and costs) that
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration your attorney reasonably accrues for
Rules. If You are an individual and use the investigating, preparing, and pursuing
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or will determine the amounts.
less whether or not You are an individual • ii. Disputes involving more than
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA $75,000. The AAA rules will govern
Supplementary Procedures for payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
Consumer-Related Disputes will also and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for • iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may any arbitration you commence, FORD
request a telephonic or in-person hearing MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
good cause to hold an in-person hearing or brought for an improper purpose. In
instead. For more information, see adr.org any arbitration FORD MOTOR
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to COMPANY commences, it will pay all
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
407
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and 1. Safe and Lawful Use
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any You acknowledge that devoting attention
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
counted in determining how much a of injury or death to you and others in
dispute involves. situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed agree to comply with the following when
within one year. To the extent permitted using the TeleNav Software:
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
be filed within one year in small claims drive safely;
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section (b) use your own personal judgment while
d). The one-year period begins when the driving. If you feel that a route suggested
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
a claim or dispute is not filed within one perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
year, it is permanently barred. places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver you into an area that you consider to be
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
dispute, then that portion of Section e will manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
not apply to those parts. Instead, those your vehicle is stationary and parked;
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
or in any manner inconsistent with this
unenforceable, that provision will be
Agreement;
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect. (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software End User License TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
Agreement your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
Please read these terms and conditions
operation of any safety device (such as an
carefully before you use the TeleNav
airbag).
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
terms and conditions. If you do not accept harmless against all claims resulting from
these terms and conditions, do not break any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
the seal of the package, launch, or use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
otherwise use the TeleNav Software. vehicle, including as a result of your failure
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and to comply with the directions above.
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
408
Appendices
2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise

transfer the TeleNav Software to
You agree: (a) when registering the others, except as part of your
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with permanent transfer of the TeleNav
true, accurate, current, and complete Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
information about yourself, and (b) to Software in any manner that
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true, I. infringes the intellectual property or
accurate, current and complete. proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
3. Software License
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
• Subject to your compliance with the regulation, including but not limited to laws
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav and regulations related to spamming,
hereby grants to you a personal, privacy, consumer and child protection,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license obscenity or defamation, or
(except as expressly permitted below iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
in connection with your permanent harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
transfer of the TeleNav Software obscene, libelous, or otherwise
license), without the right to objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
sublicense, to use the TeleNav otherwise permit unauthorized access by
Software (in object code form only) in third parties to the TeleNav Software
order to access and use the TeleNav without advanced written permission of
Software. This license shall terminate TeleNav.
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will 4. Disclaimers
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, • To the fullest extent permissible
and not to provide commercial pursuant to applicable law, in no event
navigation services to other parties. will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
3.1 License Limitations foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, else in reliance on the information
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
provided by the TeleNav Software.
or otherwise change the TeleNav
TeleNav also does not warrant the
Software or any part thereof; (b)
accuracy of the map or other data used
attempt to derive the source code,
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
audio library or structure of the
may not always reflect reality due to,
TeleNav Software without the prior
among other things, road closures,
express written consent of TeleNav;
construction, weather, new roads and
(c) remove from the TeleNav
other changing conditions. You are
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
responsible for the entire risk arising
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
out of your use of the TeleNav
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
Software. For example but without
other notices or markings; (d)
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
409
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

navigation, as the maps or functionality WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
of the TeleNav Software are not REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
intended to support such high risk DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
applications, especially in more remote CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
geographical areas. NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV • You agree that any dispute, claim or
SOFTWARE. controversy arising out of or relating to
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the this Agreement or the TeleNav
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this Software shall be settled by
limitation may not apply to you. independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
5. Limitation of Liability the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER The arbitrator shall apply the
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV American Arbitration Association, and
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS the judgment upon the award rendered
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD by the arbitrator may be entered by any
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, court having jurisdiction. Note that
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES proceeding and the decision of the
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT arbitrator shall be binding upon both
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE parties. You expressly agree to waive
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, and performance hereunder will be
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF governed by and construed in
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION accordance with the laws of the State
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE of California, without giving effect to
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE its conflict of law provisions. To the
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF extent judicial action is necessary in
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE connection with the binding arbitration,
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. both TeleNav and you agree to submit
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
410
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the conferred by implication, statute,

courts of the County of Santa Clara, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
California. The United Nations TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
Convention on Contracts for the hereby reserve all of their respective rights
International Sale of Goods shall not other than the licenses explicitly granted
apply. in this Agreement.
7. Assignment 8.3
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer By using the TeleNav Software, you
this Agreement or any of your rights or consent to receive from TeleNav all
obligations, except in totality, in communications, including notices,
connection with your permanent agreements, legally required disclosures
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and or other information in connection with the
expressly conditioned upon the new TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing electronically. TeleNav may provide such
to be bound by the terms and Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
conditions of this Agreement. Any such Website or by downloading such Notices
sale, assignment or transfer that is not to your wireless device. If you desire to
expressly permitted under this withdraw your consent to receive Notices
paragraph will result in immediate electronically, you must discontinue your
termination of this Agreement, without use of the TeleNav Software.
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately 8.4
cease all use of the TeleNav Software. TeleNav's or your failure to require
Notwithstanding the foregoing, performance of any provision shall not
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to affect that party's right to require
any other party at any time without performance at any time thereafter, nor
notice, provided the assignee remains shall a waiver of any breach or default of
bound by this Agreement. this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
8. Miscellaneous subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.1
8.5
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with If any provision herein is held
respect to the subject matter hereof. unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
8.2 parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
Except for the limited licenses expressly effect.
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
411
Appendices
8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to
The headings in this Agreement are for
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, ©United States Postal Service® 2014.
and will not be referred to in connection Prices are not established, controlled or
with the construction or interpretation of approved by the United States Postal
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, Service®. The following trademarks and
the words "include" and "including" and registrations are owned by the USPS:
variations thereof, will not be deemed to United States Postal Service, USPS, and
be terms of limitation, but rather will be ZIP+4
deemed to be followed by the words The Data for Mexico includes certain data
"without limitation". from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions Geografía.
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
other data licensed to Telenav by third (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
party vendors for the benefit of you and The data (“Data”) is provided for your
other end users. This Agreement personal, internal use only and not for
includes end-user terms applicable to resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
these companies (included at the end subject to the following terms and
of this Agreement), and thus your use conditions which are agreed to by you, on
of the Telenav Software is also subject the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
to such terms. You agree to comply Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
with the following additional terms and their licensors and suppliers) on the other
conditions, which are applicable to hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
Terms and Conditions
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
The data (“Data”) is provided for your for the internal business and personal
personal, internal use only and not for purposes for which you were licensed, and
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is not for service bureau, time-sharing or
subject to the following terms and other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
conditions which are agreed to by you, on subject to the restrictions set forth in the
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and following paragraphs, you agree not to
its licensors (including their licensors and otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
suppliers) on the other hand. decompile, disassemble, create any
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
The Data for areas of Canada includes or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
information taken with permission from except to the extent permitted by
Canadian authorities, including: © Her mandatory laws.
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
412
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
and without limiting the preceding Territories and Countries do not allow
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) certain warranty exclusions, so to that
with any products, systems, or applications extent the above exclusion may not apply
installed or otherwise connected to or in to you.
communication with vehicles, capable of Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
real time route guidance, fleet LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
management or similar applications; or (b) BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
with or in communication with any CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
positioning devices or any mobile or IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
wireless-connected electronic or computer CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
devices, including without limitation ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
computers, pagers, and personal digital MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
assistants or PDAs. POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
Warning. The Data may contain FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
inaccurate or incomplete information due CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
to the passage of time, changing OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
circumstances, sources used and the SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
nature of collecting comprehensive ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
geographic data, any of which may lead to INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
incorrect results. ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
guarantees, representations or warranties LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
of any kind, express or implied, arising by POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
law or otherwise, including but not limited States, Territories and Countries do not
to, content, quality, accuracy, allow certain liability exclusions or
completeness, effectiveness, reliability, damages limitations, so to that extent the
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, above may not apply to you.
use or results to be obtained from this Export Control. You shall not export from
Data, or that the Data or server will be anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
uninterrupted or error-free. product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
required under, applicable export laws,
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
rules and regulations, including but not
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
administered by the Office of Foreign
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
413
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

HERE from complying with any of its NOTICE OF USE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. These terms and SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
conditions constitute the entire agreement West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
between Telenav (and its licensors, 60606
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, This Data is a commercial item as
and supersedes in their entirety any and defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
all written or oral agreements previously these End-User Terms under which this
existing between us with respect to such Data was provided.
subject matter.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws If the Contracting Officer, federal
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” government agency, or any federal official
where European HERE Data is used], refuses to use the legend provided herein,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of the Contracting Officer, federal
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations government agency, or any federal official
Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European I. US/Canada Territory
HERE Data is used] for any and all A. United States Data. The End-User
disputes, claims and actions arising from Terms for any Application containing
or in connection with the Data provided to Data for the United States shall contain
you hereunder. the following notices:
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the “HERE holds a non-exclusive license
United States government or any other from the United States Postal
entity seeking or applying rights similar to Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
those customarily claimed by the United information.”
States government, this Data is a “©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined 20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms, States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
414
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
415
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
and their officers, employees and MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
agents from and against any claim, AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
demand or action, irrespective of 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
the nature of the cause of the claim, ENERO DE 2011”
demand or action, alleging loss, “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
costs, expenses, damages or injuries TOPO ®”
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession Guade-
of the data or the Data. loupe,
French
4. Additional Provisions: The terms Guiana
contained in this Section are in addi- and
tion to all of the rights and obligations Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
of the parties under the Agreement. nique Nacional de Estadística y
To the extent that any of the provi- Mexico Geografía)”
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi- IV. Middle East Territory
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
416
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, HERE Client only after receiving certification
shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
417
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich-

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; und Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung
limitation, Landervermessungämter of der zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Survey data © Crown
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- copyright and database
swesen of Austria, and the National right 2010 Contains Royal
Land Survey of Sweden. Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting right 2010”
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-
a direct action against Client to enforce Map Ltd.”
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
map requirements (see Section IV(B) stata prodotta usando
above) contained in this Agreement. quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies al tratto prodotta e fornita
of the Data and/or packaging relating dalla Regione Toscana.”
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used Norway “Copyright © 2000;
as described below corresponding to Norwegian Mapping
the Territory (or portion thereof) Authority”
included in such copy:
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Country(ies) Notice
418
Appendices
Spain “Información geográfica Product incorporates data which is ©

propiedad del CNIG” 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Sweden “Based upon electronic Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.” B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Switzerland “Topografische Terms for any Application containing
Grundlage: © Bundesamt RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
für Landestopographie. shall contain the following notice:
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client “Product incorporates traffic location
acknowledges that HERE has not codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
received approvals to distribute map tion Limited and its licensors.”
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. Telematics Disclosure
HERE may update such list from time to
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
time. The license rights granted to Client
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
under this TL with respect to the Data
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
for such countries are contingent upon
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
Client’s compliance with all applicable
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
laws and regulations, including, without
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
limitation, any required licenses or
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
approvals to distribute the Application
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
incorporating such Data in such
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
respective countries.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
VI. Australia Territory CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
of the Data and/or packaging relating PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
thereto shall include the respective Third AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
Party Notices set forth below and used UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
as described below corresponding to UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
the Territory (or portion thereof) UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
included in such copy: EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
Copyright. Based on data provided KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
under license from PSMA Australia REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
Limited (www.psma.com.au). ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
419
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
DEVICE. TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE CARRIER.
SERVICES
VII. China Territory
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL Personal Use Only
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END You agree to use this Data together with
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE [insert name of Client Application] for the
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT solely personal, non-commercial purposes
GUARANTEE ANY END USER for which you were licensed, and not for
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR service bureau, time-sharing or other
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS to the restrictions set forth in the following
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER as necessary for your personal use to (i)
420
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you rigCustomer Remedies
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
and may not transfer or distribute it in any the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
form, for any purpose, except to the extent Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
permitted by mandatory laws. with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
Restrictions resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
Except where you have been specifically be warranted for the remainder of the
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
not (a) use this Data with any products, nor any product support services offered
systems, or applications installed or by NAV2 are available without proof of
otherwise connected to or in purchase from an authorized international
communication with vehicles, capable of source.
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet No Other Warranty:
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
positioning devices or any mobile or SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
wireless-connected electronic or computer PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
devices, including without limitation AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
computers, pagers, and personal digital ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
using this Data if you fail to comply with MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
these terms and conditions. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
Limited Warranty exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusion may not apply to you.
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a Limited Liability:
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
described in applicable written materials LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
support engineers will make commercially BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
reasonable efforts to solve any problem CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
issues. IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
421
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, Governing Law.

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The above terms and conditions shall be
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES governed by the laws of the People’s
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Republic of China, without giving effect to
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR United Nations Convention for Contracts
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR for the International Sale of Goods, which
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A from or in connection with the Data
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS provided to you hereunder shall be
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE submitted to the Shanghai International
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER Economic and Trade Arbitration
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR Commission for arbitration.
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER Gracenote® Copyright
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under CD and music-related data from
applicable law, so to that extent the above Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
exclusion may not apply to you.
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Export Control Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
You agree not to export to anywhere any practice one or more of the following U.S.
part of the Data provided to you or any Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
direct product thereof except in 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
compliance with, and with all licenses and 6,330,593 and other patents issued or
approvals required under, applicable pending. Some services supplied under
export laws, rules and regulations. license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
IP Protection
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
suppliers and are protected by applicable logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
copyright and other intellectual property Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
law and treaties. The Data are provided Gracenote.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Entire Agreement
This device contains software from
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
entire agreement between NAV2(and its Emeryville, California 94608
licensors, including their licensors and ("Gracenote").
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their The software from Gracenote (the
entirety any and all written or oral "Gracenote Software") enables this device
agreements previously existing between to do disc and music file identification and
us with respect to such subject matter. obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
422
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform including any copyrighted material or

other functions. You may use Gracenote music file information. You agree that
Data only by means of the intended End Gracenote may enforce its respective
User functions of this device. This device rights, collectively or separately, under this
may contain content belonging to agreement against you, directly in each
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the company's own name.
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
queries for statistical purposes. The
content and such content providers shall
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
be entitled to all of the benefits and
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
protections set forth herein that are
queries without knowing anything about
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
who you are. For more information, see the
will use the content from Gracenote
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
non-commercial use only. You agree not OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
associated with a music file) to any third WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
HEREIN. TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
Gracenote Servers.
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Gracenote Content, including all ownership OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
rights. Under no circumstances will either ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
Gracenote become liable for any payment THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
to you for any information that you provide, PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
423
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Taiwan Territory

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Note: In accordance with the management
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
approach of low-power radio wave
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
radiation motors:
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE Article 12: For approved and certified
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY low-power radiation motor models,
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL companies, firms or users must not alter
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY the frequency, increase the power or
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL change the characteristics and functions
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS of the original design without authorization.
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON Article 14: The usage of low-power
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. radio-frequency motors must not affect
Radio Frequency Statement aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L be detected, immediately stop using the
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
This device complies with Part 15 of the interference. For the legal
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry telecommunication and wireless
Canada. Operation is subject to the telecommunication of the telco, the
following two conditions: low-power radio frequency motor must be
(1) This device may not cause harmful able to tolerate legal limits of interference
interference, and from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
interference that may cause undesired AND CONDITIONS
operation.
By activating, using and/or accessing the
WARNING SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
Changes or modifications not other content or material provided by
expressively approved by the party Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
responsible for compliance could and/or Services), you must accept
void the user's authority to operate the certain terms and conditions. The following
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio is a brief summary of the terms and
certification number only signifies that conditions that apply to you. To view the
Industry Canada technical specifications full terms and conditions relevant to your
were met. use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
The antenna used for this transmitter must
Website
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
transmitter. ditions/
1. Acceptance
424
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, 5. Service Continuity and Reception of

you will be deemed to have accepted and the SUNA Traffic Channel
agreed to be bound by the terms and
We will use reasonable endeavours to
conditions fully detailed at:
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Website Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
maintenance. We will try to perform
ditions/
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services at any
SUNA Products and/or Services are for time.
your personal use. You may not record, or Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
retransmit the content, nor use the content reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
in association with any other traffic RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You 6. Limitation of Liability
obtain no right of ownership in any Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
Intellectual Property Rights (including the manufacturer of your device (the
copyright) in the data that is used to “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services. any third party for any damages either
3. Appropriate Use direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
SUNA Products and/or Services are inability to use SUNA Products and/or
intended as an aid to personal motoring Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
and travel planning, and do not provide has been advised of the possibility of such
comprehensive or accurate information on damages. You also acknowledge that the
all occasions. On occasions, you may neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
experience additional delay as a result of guarantees nor make any warranties that
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You relate to the availability, accuracy or
acknowledge that it is not intended, or completeness of SUNA Products and/or
suitable, for use in applications where time Services, and to the extent which it is
of arrival or driving directions may impact lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
the safety of the public or yourself. Supplier excludes any warranties which
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services might otherwise be implied by any State
while driving or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or 7. Please Note
Services are available or installed and Great care has been taken in preparing this
active, remain at all times responsible for manual. Constant product development
observing all relevant laws and codes of may mean that some information is not
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only entirely up-to-date. The information in this
actively operate SUNA Products and/or document is subject to change without
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete notice.
stop and it is safe to do so.
425
Appendices
WARNING
against the use of any hand-held device E207817
while driving and encourage the use of Abu Dhabi, Dubai

TYPE APPROVALS
This equipment operates on a secondary
basis, that is, it is not entitled to protection
against harmful interference, even from
same-type stations, and may not cause
interference to systems operating on a
primary basis. E197509
RF Certification Logos
Brazil
E202555
Brazil
E207816
Argentina
E207818
European Union EU
426
Appendices
E197811
Moldova
E207821
Morocco
E238961
Jordan
E198001
Philippines
E207819
E197844
E207820
Serbia
Malaysia
427
Appendices
E207822
Singapore
E203679
Taiwan
E198002
South Africa
E198009
Bluetooth
E203899
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ford Motor Company
is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective
owners.
iPod
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
428
Appendices
SD Card
E97713
E97714
SD Logo is a trademark.
429
430
Index
4 Audio Troubleshooting..............................302
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/Aux
4WD In/USB/Bluetooth.....................................281
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................125 Clock.......................................................................282
Display Screen....................................................282
A Function Buttons...............................................282
Media......................................................................283
A/C Menu.......................................................................283
See: Climate Control..........................................89 Mute........................................................................283
About This Manual...........................................7 Number Block.....................................................282
ABS OK and Cursor Arrows.....................................283
See: Brakes...........................................................130 Phone.....................................................................283
ABS driving hints Radio......................................................................282
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse..................283
Brakes..................................................................131 Sound.....................................................................283
Accessories TA.............................................................................283
See: Replacement Parts Tune........................................................................283
Recommendation............................................10 Volume and Power............................................283
ACC Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............145 SYNC/Touchscreen Display.................295
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................41 CD Eject.................................................................296
Air Conditioning CD Slot..................................................................296
See: Climate Control..........................................89 Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.................296
Alarm Tune........................................................................296
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................39 Volume and Power...........................................296
Ambient Lighting............................................54 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................39 SYNC.............................................................286
Alarm System........................................................39 Alternative Frequencies...................................291
Arming the Alarm................................................40 Answer or Make a Phone Call.......................294
Disarming the Alarm..........................................40 Automatic Volume Control...........................290
Full and Reduced Guard...................................40 Autostore Control.............................................290
Triggering the Alarm...........................................40 Aux..........................................................................289
Appendices....................................................399 CD............................................................................289
Apps..................................................................374 CD Eject.................................................................294
...................................................................................374 CD Slot..................................................................294
At a Glance........................................................12 Clock.......................................................................294
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............66 Digital Signal Processing (DSP)...................291
Door Ajar.................................................................66 Display Screen....................................................294
Front and Rear Park Aid.....................................67 End Phone Call...................................................294
Headlamps On......................................................66 Function Buttons...............................................288
Key in Ignition........................................................66 Info..........................................................................288
Lane Departure Warning...................................67 Media......................................................................295
Parking Brake On.................................................66 Menu......................................................................288
Seatbelt Reminder..............................................66 Mute........................................................................294
Audio Control....................................................41 News Broadcasts................................................291
Audio Input Jack...........................................301 Number Block.....................................................288
Audio System...............................................280 OK and Cursor Arrows.....................................288
General Information.........................................280 On, Off Control...................................................289
431
Index
Phone.....................................................................289 Auxiliary Power Points...............................106

Play/Pause...........................................................294 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................106
Radio......................................................................289 230 Volt AC Power Point.................................106
Regional Mode.....................................................291 Location.................................................................106
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.................288
Sound....................................................................288
Sound Button.....................................................289
B
Station Preset Buttons....................................289 Battery
Station Tuning Control....................................289 See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................231
TA............................................................................288 Bonnet Lock
Traffic Information Control............................290 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........220
Tune........................................................................294 Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................230
Volume and Power...........................................288 Brakes...............................................................130
Waveband Button.............................................289 General Information..........................................130
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ Breaking-In......................................................178
CD...................................................................283 Brakes and Clutch...............................................178
AM/FM...................................................................285 Engine......................................................................178
Autostore Control..............................................286 Tires..........................................................................178
CD or AUX.............................................................285 Bulb Specification Chart...........................239
Display...................................................................285
Menu Back ..........................................................285
Next Folder...........................................................285
C
Power.....................................................................285 Cabin Air Filter.................................................97
Previous Folder...................................................285 Capacities and Specifications................276
Repeat...................................................................285 Cargo Lamps...................................................54
Scan/AS................................................................285 Car Wash
Scroll Display......................................................285 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................241
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.................284 Catalytic Converter........................................117
Shuffle...................................................................285 Driving with a Catalytic Converter.................117
Station Preset Buttons....................................285 Center Console.............................................108
Station Tuning Control....................................285 Changing a Bulb...........................................235
Volume and Menu.............................................284 Approach Lamp and Side Direction
Autolamps........................................................49 Indicator...........................................................236
Automatic Climate Control.......................90 Central High Mounted Brake Lamp............238
Type 1.........................................................................91 Front Fog Lamps................................................236
Type 2.......................................................................93 License Plate Lamp..........................................238
Automatic Transmission.............................121 Rear Lamps..........................................................237
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs...................235
Learning.............................................................124 Side Repeater......................................................236
Emergency Park Position Release Changing a Fuse...........................................218
Lever....................................................................123 Fuses.......................................................................218
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Changing a Road Wheel...........................252
Snow...................................................................124 Installing a Road Wheel...................................257
Selector lever positions.....................................121 Jacking and Lifting Points...............................255
SelectShift™ Automatic Lug Nuts................................................................252
Transmission....................................................122 Removing a Road Wheel................................256
Autowipers.......................................................45 Spare Wheel........................................................254
Stowing the Flat Tire........................................258
432
Index
Vehicle Jack..........................................................252
Changing the 12V Battery..........................231
D
Remove and Reinstall the Battery...............232 Data Recording..................................................9
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................233 Daytime Running Lamps............................50
Checking MyKey System Status...............34 Diesel Particulate Filter...............................113
Checking the Wiper Blades......................233 Regeneration.........................................................113
Child Restraint Positioning..........................19 Direction Indicators.......................................53
Child Safety.......................................................15 Doors and Locks.............................................36
Child Seats.........................................................15 DPF
Child restraints for different mass See: Diesel Particulate Filter............................113
groups...................................................................15 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........231
Cleaning the Exterior...................................241 Driver Alert.......................................................153
Body paintwork preservation........................242 Principle of Operation.......................................153
Cleaning the alloy wheels................................241 Using Driver Alert................................................153
Cleaning the chrome trim................................241 Driver and Passenger Airbags....................25
Cleaning the headlamps..................................241 Driving Aids.....................................................152
Cleaning the rear window................................241 Driving Hints....................................................178
Cleaning the Interior...................................242 Driving Through Water................................178
Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens, DRL
radio screens...................................................242 See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................50
Rear windows......................................................242
Safety belts..........................................................242
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................32
E
Climate............................................................362 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............399
Climate Control..............................................89 Electronic Locking Differential................129
Clock....................................................................75 End User License Agreement.................400
Cold Weather Precautions........................178 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
Compact Disc Player..................................297 AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................400
CD Text Display Options................................300 Engine Coolant Check...............................229
Compact Disc Playback..................................297 Adding Coolant...................................................229
Compact Disc Track Scanning.....................298 Engine Immobilizer
Ending Compact Disc Playback....................301 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................39
Fast Forward and Reverse..............................297 Engine Oil Check..........................................228
MP3 Display Options.......................................300 Adding Oil.............................................................228
MP3 File Playback.............................................298 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
Repeat Compact Disc Tracks.......................298 (Puma) Diesel/3.2L Duratorq-TDCi
Shuffle and Random........................................297 (Puma) Diesel............................................228
Track Selection...................................................297 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L Duratec-HE
Coolant Check (122kW/165PS) - MI4..............................228
See: Engine Coolant Check............................229 Engine Specifications - 2.2L
Creating a MyKey............................................32 Duratorq-TDCi (110kW/150PS) -
Programming/Changing Configurable Puma.............................................................262
Settings...............................................................32 Engine Specifications - 2.2L
Cruise Control..................................................42 Duratorq-TDCi (118kW/160PS) -
Principle of Operation.......................................144 Puma.............................................................263
Cruise control Engine Specifications - 2.2L
See: Using Cruise Control................................144 Duratorq-TDCi (88kW/120PS) -
Cup Holders...................................................108 Puma............................................................260
433
Index
Engine Specifications - 2.2L Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................115

Duratorq-TDCi (92kW/125PS) - Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................115
Puma..............................................................261 Biodiesel Usage....................................................115
Engine Specifications - 2.5L Duratec-HE Long-Term Storage.............................................115
(122kW/165PS) - MI4.............................264 Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................114
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Long-Term Storage.............................................115
Duratorq-TDCi (148kW/200PS) - Fuel Shutoff....................................................182
Puma.............................................................265 Fuse Box Locations.....................................186
Entertainment...............................................357 Auxiliary Fuse Box..............................................188
Apps........................................................................362 Engine Compartment Fuse (Vehicles with
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................360 Electronic Power Assist Steering)...........187
CD...........................................................................360 Engine Compartment Fuse Box (Vehicles
DAB+/AM/FM/ Radio......................................359 with Hydraulic Power Assist
Sources..................................................................359 Steering)...........................................................186
Supported Media Players, Formats and Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............187
Metadata Information................................362 Pre-fuse Box.........................................................186
USB Ports.............................................................362 Fuses.................................................................186
Event Data Recording Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles With:
See: Data Recording..............................................9 Electronic Power Assist Steering
Exterior Mirrors................................................58 (EPAS)...........................................................198
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................58 Engine Compartment Fuse Box - (2.2L
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................59 Diesel)...............................................................198
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................58 Engine Compartment Fuse Box - (3.2L
Power-Folding Mirrors........................................59 Diesel)...............................................................205
Puddle Lamps ......................................................59 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............214
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................59 Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles With:
Hydraulic Power Assist Steering
F (HPAS)..........................................................188
Auxiliary Fuse Box...............................................197
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................22 Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................188
Fire Extinguisher.............................................181 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............194
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................252
Floor Mats........................................................179
G
Fog Lamps - Front Gauges...............................................................60
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................50 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............61
Fog Lamps - Rear Fuel Gauge..............................................................62
See: Rear Fog Lamps...........................................51 Information Display..............................................61
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................125 Type 1........................................................................60
Principle of Operation.......................................125 Type 2........................................................................61
Front Fog Lamps............................................50 Gearbox
Front Parking Aid..........................................140 See: Transmission................................................121
Front Sensing System......................................140 General Information on Radio
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................141 Frequencies...................................................28
Fuel and Refueling........................................114 Glove Box........................................................108
Fuel Consumption.........................................119 Glove Box with Lock..........................................108
Calculating Fuel Economy...............................119
Filling the Fuel Tank............................................119
434
Index
H Switching the Ignition On.................................110

Switching the Ignition to Accessory
Handbrake Mode...................................................................110
See: Parking Brake...............................................131 Information Display Control.......................42
Hazard Flashers.............................................181 Information Displays....................................68
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................50 General Information...........................................68
Headlamp Leveling.........................................51 Information Messages..................................77
Headlamp Leveling to Suit Vehicle 4x4............................................................................80
Load......................................................................52 Active Park...............................................................77
Headlamp Removal Adaptive Cruise Control......................................77
See: Removing a Headlamp..........................234 Airbag........................................................................78
Headrest Alarm.........................................................................78
See: Head Restraints..........................................99 Auto-Start-Stop...................................................79
Head Restraints..............................................99 AWD...........................................................................79
Adjusting the Head Restraints......................100 Battery and Charging System.........................80
Removing the Head Restraints.....................100 Doors and Locks....................................................81
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................97 Driver Alert...............................................................81
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................97 Fuel.............................................................................81
Heated Rear Window..........................................97 Hill Descent Control............................................82
Heated Windshield........................................97 Hill Start Assist......................................................81
Heating Keys and Starting.................................................82
See: Climate Control..........................................89 Lane Keeping System.........................................83
Hill Descent Control....................................136 Maintenance..........................................................83
Principle of Operation.......................................136 Parking Aid.............................................................84
Hill Start Assist...............................................131 Parking Brake.........................................................85
Enable and Disable the System....................132 Power Steering......................................................85
Switching the System On and Off................132 Powertrain..............................................................86
Using Hill Start Assist........................................132 Starting System ...................................................86
Hints on Controlling the Interior Terrain Management System..........................86
Climate...........................................................94 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................87
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Traction Control....................................................87
Weather...............................................................97 Trailer........................................................................88
General Hints.........................................................94 Transmission.........................................................88
Quickly Cooling the Interior..............................96 Installing Child Restraints............................16
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................95 Attaching a Child Restraint with Top
Recommended Settings for Cooling............96 Tethers..................................................................19
Recommended Settings for Heating...........96 Booster Seats..........................................................17
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Child Seats for Different Mass Groups..........17
Brakes..............................................................131 ISOFIX Anchor Points..........................................18
Home Screen................................................350 Top Tether Anchor Points (If
Hood Lock Equipped)...........................................................19
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........220 Instrument Cluster........................................60
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................49
I Instrument Panel Overview.........................12
Left-hand drive.......................................................13
Ignition Switch................................................110 Right-hand drive....................................................12
Starting the Engine..............................................111 Interior Lamps.................................................53
Switching the Ignition Off................................110 Courtesy lamp.......................................................53
435
Index
Reading lamps.......................................................53 Lug Nuts

Interior Mirror...................................................59 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................252
Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................59
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................59
Introduction.........................................................7
M
Maintenance.................................................220
J General Information.........................................220
Manual Climate Control..............................89
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................183 A/C............................................................................90
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................183 Air Distribution Control......................................90
Jump Starting......................................................184 Fan Speed Control..............................................90
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................183 Heated Rear Window.........................................90
Removing the Jumper Cables........................184 MAX A/C.................................................................90
MAX Defrost..........................................................90
K Power.......................................................................90
Recirculated Air....................................................89
Keys and Remote Controls.........................28 Temperature Control..........................................90
Manual Seats................................................100
L Adjusting the Height of the Driver
Seat......................................................................101
Lane Keeping System.................................154 Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................101
Switching the System On and Off...............155 Folding the Seat Backrest - Super
Lighting Control...............................................47 Cab......................................................................102
Headlamp Low and High Beam.....................48 Moving the Seat Backward and
Parking Lamps......................................................48 Forward..............................................................101
Position Lamps.....................................................48 Recline Adjustment...........................................102
Lighting...............................................................47 Manual Transmission...................................121
General Information............................................47 Selecting Reverse Gear......................................121
Limited Slip Differential.............................129 Media Hub......................................................302
Load Carriers Message Center
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............166 See: Information Displays.................................68
Load Carrying.................................................164 Mirrors
General Information..........................................164 See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................97
Load Retaining Fixtures..............................167 See: Windows and Mirrors................................55
Load Rest..............................................................169 Mobile Communications Equipment........11
Tie Down Points..................................................167 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................35
Locking and Unlocking.................................36 MyKey™..............................................................31
Autolock Configuration.......................................37 Principle of Operation..........................................31
Child play protection function.........................37
Locking and unlocking the doors from
inside....................................................................37
N
Locking and unlocking the doors with the Navigation........................................................371
key.........................................................................36 Map Mode..............................................................371
Locking and unlocking the doors with the Navigation Map Updates................................374
remote control.................................................36 Navigation Menu.................................................372
Luggage Covers.............................................164
Locking and unlocking into position...........164
Operation..............................................................164
436
Index
O Power Windows..............................................55
Bounce-Back..........................................................57
Oil Check Driver’s Door Switches (Double Cab)..........55
See: Engine Oil Check......................................228 Driver’s Door Switches (Single and Stretch
Opening and Closing the Hood..............220 Cab).....................................................................56
Closing the Hood.................................................221 Front and Rear Passengers’ Door
Opening the Hood.............................................220 Switches.............................................................56
Overhead Console.......................................109 Opening and Closing Other Windows
Automatically...................................................56
P Opening and Closing the Driver Side
Window Automatically.................................56
Parking Aids....................................................138 Resetting the Memory of the Electric
Principle of Operation.......................................138 Windows - Vehicle with One Touch
Parking Brake..................................................131 Up/Down on Driver Side only......................57
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................39 Safety Mode...........................................................57
Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................39 Safety Switch for the Rear Windows............56
Coded Keys.............................................................39 Pre-Collision Assist.....................................160
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer................39 Using the Pre-Collision Assist
Principle of Operation........................................39 System..............................................................160
PATS Puncture
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................39 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................252
Personalized Settings...................................76
Chime deactivation..............................................76
Languages...............................................................76
R
Measure units.........................................................76 Radio.................................................................297
MyKey........................................................................76 Antenna.................................................................297
Temperature units................................................76 Rear Axle..........................................................129
Phone..............................................................366 Rear Fog Lamps...............................................51
During a Phone Call..........................................369 Rear Parking Aid............................................139
Making Calls........................................................368 Rear Sensing System........................................139
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Rear Seat Armrest.......................................109
Time..................................................................366 Rear Seats.......................................................104
Phone Menu.........................................................367 Folding the Seat Backrest...............................105
Receiving Calls...................................................369 Folding the Seat Cushion................................104
Smartphone Connectivity..............................370 Unfolding the Seat Backrest..........................105
Text Messaging...................................................370 Unfolding the Seat Cushion...........................105
Power Door Locks Rear View Camera.........................................141
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................36 Switching the Rear View Camera Off.........143
Power Seats...................................................102 Switching the Rear View Camera On...........141
Adjusting the Height of the Driver Using the Display................................................142
Seat.....................................................................103 Rear View Camera
Moving the Seat Backward and See: Rear View Camera.....................................141
Forward.............................................................103 Recommended Towing Weights..............171
Recline Adjustment...........................................103 Reduced Engine Performance.................178
Tilting the Seat....................................................103 Refueling...........................................................118
Power Steering Fluid Check....................230 Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap...........................118
Adding Power Steering Fluid.........................230 Remote Control..............................................28
Changing the Remote Control Battery........29
437
Index
Programming a New Remote Control..........28 Sound.....................................................................375

Programming the additional key....................28 Valet Mode...........................................................387
Reprogramming the Unlocking Vehicle...................................................................385
Function..............................................................28 Voice Control......................................................386
Removing a Headlamp..............................234 Wi-Fi.......................................................................385
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............242 Side Airbags.....................................................26
Replacement Parts Side Curtain Airbags......................................27
Recommendation........................................10 Sitting in the Correct Position...................99
Collision Repairs....................................................10 Snow Chains
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical See: Using Snow Chains.................................248
Repairs.................................................................10 Spare Wheel
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10 See: Changing a Road Wheel........................252
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Special Notices................................................10
Control............................................................30 Speed Control
Roadside Emergencies................................181 See: Cruise Control............................................144
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................166 Speed Limiter.................................................152
Running-In Principle of Operation.......................................152
See: Breaking-In..................................................178 Using the System................................................152
Running Out of Fuel - Diesel......................117 Stability Control............................................134
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................117 Principle of Operation.......................................134
Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature....................117 Starter Switch
Running Out of Fuel - Gasoline................115 See: Ignition Switch............................................110
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Starting a Diesel Engine..............................112
Container...........................................................116 Cold or Hot Engine...............................................112
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................116 Failure to Start......................................................112
Starting a Gasoline Engine..........................111
S Cold or Hot Engine................................................111
Engine Idle Speed after Starting....................112
Safety Precautions........................................114 Failure to Start......................................................112
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................23 Fuel Flooded Engine............................................111
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................23 Starting and Stopping the Engine..........110
Turning the Seatbelt Reminder Off...............24 General Information...........................................110
Seatbelts...........................................................22 Steering............................................................158
Principle of Operation.........................................22 Electric Power Steering....................................159
Seats...................................................................99 Hydraulic Power Steering................................158
Security..............................................................39 Steering Wheel Lock......................................111
Settings............................................................375 Unlocking the Steering Wheel.........................111
Ambient Lighting...............................................385 Steering Wheel................................................41
Bluetooth...............................................................377 Storage Compartments............................108
Clock........................................................................377 Supplementary Restraints System.........25
Display...................................................................386 Principle of Operation.........................................25
Emergency Assistance....................................380 Switching Off the Engine............................113
General..................................................................384 Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................113
Media Player........................................................376 Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Mobile Apps.........................................................383 SYNC™ 3........................................................345
Navigation.............................................................381 General Information.........................................345
Phone......................................................................377 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................387
Radio......................................................................380
438
Index
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......319 Trailer Sway Control......................................171

SYNC AppLink.....................................................323 Transmission...................................................121
SYNC Emergency Assistance.......................320 Transporting the Vehicle...........................185
SYNC™...........................................................304 Trip Computer..................................................75
General Information.........................................304 Average Fuel Consumption..............................76
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................335 Average Speed......................................................76
Digital Speedometer...........................................76
T Distance to Empty................................................75
Instantaneous fuel consumption...................76
Tailgate.............................................................170 Odometer................................................................76
Lowering the Tailgate........................................170 Outside Air Temperature...................................76
Technical Specifications Resetting the trip computer.............................76
See: Capacities and Specifications............260 Trip Odometer.......................................................76
Tire Care..........................................................243 Type Approvals............................................426
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........248 Bluetooth..............................................................428
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure iPod.........................................................................428
Monitoring System.......................................249 RF Certification Logos.....................................426
How Temperature Affects the Tire SD Card.................................................................429
Pressures.........................................................249
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure..........................................................251
U
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring Under Hood Overview - 2.2L
System..............................................................249 Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel..............221
Tires Under Hood Overview - 2.5L Duratec-HE
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................243 (122kW/165PS) - MI4..............................224
Tow Ball............................................................175 Under Hood Overview - 3.2L
Anti-rattle pinch bolt removal (If Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............226
equipped).........................................................176 Under Seat Storage.....................................109
Driving with a trailer...........................................176 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................145
Driving without a trailer....................................176 Automatic Cancellation...................................148
Maintenance.........................................................176 Blocked Sensor...................................................150
Type 1.......................................................................175 Canceling the Set Speed.................................148
Type 2......................................................................175 Changing the Set Speed..................................148
Type 3......................................................................176 Detection Issues.................................................149
Towbar Dimensions.....................................271 Following a Vehicle............................................146
4x2 (vehicles with increased ride height) Hilly Condition Usage.......................................148
and 4x4 vehicles............................................274 Overriding the Set Speed................................148
4x2 vehicles..........................................................272 Resuming the Set Speed.................................148
Towing a Trailer...............................................171 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............146
Towing Points................................................185 Setting the Gap Distance.................................147
Towing the Vehicle on Four Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Wheels...........................................................176 Off.......................................................................148
All Vehicles............................................................176 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Vehicles With Automatic On........................................................................145
Transmission....................................................177 Switching to Normal Cruise Control.............151
Towing................................................................171 System Not Available.......................................150
Traction Control............................................133 Using Cruise Control....................................144
Principle of Operation.......................................133 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................144
439
Index
Switching Cruise Control On..........................144 Climate Voice Commands.............................353

Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................125 Initiating a Voice Session...............................306
Driving in Special Conditions With Mobile App Voice Commands......................356
Four-Wheel Drive...........................................126 Navigation Voice Commands.......................355
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range - 4H.............125 Phone Voice Commands................................354
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range - 4L..............125 System Interaction and Feedback..............307
Shifting Between 2H and 4H..........................125 Voice Settings Commands.............................357
Shifting Between 2H and 4L...........................125 Using Winter Tires.......................................248
Shifting Between 4H and 4L..........................126
Two-Wheel Drive, High Range - 2H.............125
Using Hill Descent Control........................136
V
HDC Operation....................................................136 Vehicle Care....................................................241
Selecting HDC......................................................136 Vehicle Dimensions - Double Cab/Single
Using Snow Chains.....................................248 Cab/Super Cab.........................................266
Vehicles with Stability Control.....................248 Double cab...........................................................269
Using Stability Control................................134 Single cab.............................................................266
2-wheel drive vehicles......................................135 Super cab..............................................................267
4-wheel drive vehicles......................................135 Vehicle Dimensions - Short Wheelbase,
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Chassis Cab................................................270
Player............................................................326 Dimensions - Chassis Cab..............................270
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............330 Vehicle Identification Number................275
Bluetooth Devices and System Vehicle Identification Plate......................275
Settings.............................................................333 Ventilation
Connecting Your Media Player to the USB See: Climate Control..........................................89
Port.....................................................................326 VIN
Line In Audio........................................................333 See: Vehicle Identification Number.............275
Media Menu Features......................................329 Voice Control...................................................42
Media Voice Commands.................................327
USB 2......................................................................333
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........334
W
What's Playing?..................................................327 Warning Lamps and Indicators.................62
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........308 Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp........................62
Accessing Features Through the Cell Phone Anti-Lock Braking System Warning
Menu...................................................................313 Lamp....................................................................62
Accessing Your Cell Phone Settings............316 Automatic High Beam Lamp...........................63
Bluetooth Devices...............................................317 Auto Start-Stop Lamp.......................................63
Cell Phone Options During an Active Battery Warning Lamp.......................................63
Call.......................................................................311 Blind Spot Monitor Indicator............................63
Cell Phone Voice Commands........................310 Brake System Warning Lamp..........................63
Making a Call.........................................................311 Cruise Control Indicator.....................................63
Pairing a Cell Phone For the First Direction Indicator...............................................63
Time..................................................................308 Door Ajar Indicator...............................................63
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................309 Electronic Locking Differential........................64
Receiving a Call....................................................311 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Text Messaging....................................................314 Lamp....................................................................63
Using Traction Control................................133 Engine Oil Warning Lamp.................................64
Using Voice Recognition...........................306 Fasten Rear Seatbelt Warning Lamp...........65
Audio Voice Commands.................................352 Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.....................64
440
Index
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators............................64

Front Airbag Warning Lamp............................64
Front Fog Lamps Indicator...............................64
Frost Warning Lamp...........................................64
Glow Plug Indicator.............................................64
High Beam Indicator...........................................64
Hill Descent Control............................................64
Hood Ajar Warning Lamp.................................64
Lane Keeping Aid Indicator..............................65
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp........................65
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................65
Low Washer Fluid.................................................65
Over Speed Warning...........................................65
Parking Lamps Indicator...................................65
Powertrain Fault...................................................65
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator.................................65
Service Engine Soon...........................................65
Shift Indicator........................................................66
Speed Limiter........................................................66
Stability Control Off Indicator.........................66
Stability Control Warning Lamp....................66
Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp.........................66
Warning Triangle............................................181
Double cab............................................................182
Single cab...............................................................181
Super cab...............................................................181
Washer Fluid Check....................................230
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................241
See: Wipers and Washers.................................44
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................252
Wheels and Tires.........................................243
General Information.........................................243
Technical Specifications.................................258
Windows and Mirrors....................................55
Windshield Washers.....................................46
Windshield Wipers........................................44
Intermittent Wipe................................................44
Winter Tires
See: Using Winter Tires...................................248
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................233
Wipers and Washers.....................................44
441
442

Ranger p375 TKD Hb3b-19a321-Ckb Owner Manual Asean Eng

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ranger p375 TKD Hb3b-19a321-Ckb Owner Manual Asean Eng

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual

All rights reserved.

Introduction Creating a MyKey ...........................................32

Supplementary Restraints Lighting

Windows and Mirrors Center Console ............................................108

Instrument Cluster Starting and Stopping the

Brakes Luggage Covers ............................................164

Parking Aids Roadside Emergencies

Load Carrying Maintenance

Opening and Closing the Hood .............220 Capacities and Specifications

Audio Troubleshooting .............................302

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Note: This manual describes product

manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

Brake system Explosive gas

Cabin air filter Fan warning

Check engine Fasten seatbelt

Check fuel cap Front airbag

Child safety door lock Front fog lamps

Child safety door unlock Fuse compartment

Child seat lower anchor Hazard warning flashers

Child seat tether anchor Heated rear window

Cruise control Heated windshield

Do not open when hot Windshield defroster

Electronic power steering Interior luggage compartment

Engine air filter Jack

Engine coolant Lighting control

Engine coolant temperature Lock rear window

Engine oil Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level DATA RECORDING

When using the vehicle, situations may Collision Repairs

Scheduled Maintenance and

Using mobile communications equipment

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

A Air vents. F Cruise control switches. See

K Steering wheel adjustment lever. M Horn.

A Air vents. E Instrument cluster. See Gauges

I Hood release lever. See

CHILD SEATS WARNINGS

Note: Mandatory use of child restraints

Child restraints for different mass

Baby safety seat

Child safety seat

Secure children that weigh between 13 and

Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies

See Head Restraints (page 99).

Note: When using a child restraint on a Booster Cushion (Group 3)

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX

Secure children that weigh more than 15 kg

Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that

Top Tether Anchor Points (If

2. Push the child restraint back firmly to

Note: See an authorized dealer for the

Mass Group Categories

0–10 kg 0–13 kg 9–18 kg 15–25 kg 22–36 kg

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

Note: When using a child restraint on a

ISOFIX Child Restraints

Rear center seat Size class

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Status After a Crash

Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt

To raise or lower, pull the locking button

• The seatbelt reminder warning lamp